Home

iPECS Feature and Operations Manual

1. MAP 1 Flex 1 Atd Override Flex 2 All Call Page Flex 3 Call Park 01 Flex 4 Station Group 1 Flex 5 Camp On Flex 6 Int All Call Page Flex 7 Call Park 02 Flex 8 Station Group 2 Flex 9 Release Flex 10 Ext All Call Page Flex 11 Call Park 03 Flex 12 Station Group 3 Flex 13 38 Station 100 125 Table 6 11 2 DSS DLS button maps iPECS 50 amp 100 Maps 1 to 3 MAP 1 Flex 1 Atd Override Flex 2 All Call Page Flex 3 Call Park 01 Flex 4 Station Group 1 Flex 5 Camp On Flex 6 Int All Call Page Flex 7 Call Park 02 Flex 8 Station Group 2 Flex 9 Release Flex 10 Ext All Call Page Flex 11 Call Park 03 Flex 12 Station Group 3 Flex 13 48 Station 100 135 MAP 2 iPECS 100 Flex 1 34 Station 136 169 iPECS 50 Flex 1 14 Station 136 149 MAP 3 377 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Table 6 11 2 DSS DLS button maps iPECS 50 amp 100 Maps 1 to 3 Flex 1 42 CO 01 42 iPECS Micro Flex 1 5 CO 01 05 Table 6 11 3 DSS DLS button maps iPECS 300 amp 600 amp 1200 Maps 1 to 9 MAP 1 Flex 1 Atd Override Flex 2 All Call Page Flex 3 Call Park 01 Flex 4 Station Group 1 Flex 5 Camp On Flex 6 Int All Call Page Flex 7 Call Park 02 Flex 8 Station Group 2 Flex 9 Release Flex 10 Ext All Call Page MAP 2 Flex 1 48 Station
2. messages Conditions 1 The system can store up to 10 received SMS messages and 1 sent SMS message per station 2 Once the received message storage capacity is reached additional incoming SMS messages are ignored 3 For operation with the Phontage WLAN Phone or UCS Client refer to the respective User Guide Programming Related Features Hardware e iPECS Phone w Display e iPECS Phontage e iPECS WLAN Phone e iPECS UCS Client 3 9 3 Station Message Wait Call Back Description When a called station does not answer or is in DND a station user can activate a Message Wait indication to request a Call Back A station may receive a Message Wait from any number of other stations in the system The station receiving the Message Wait can return the calls using the MSG CALLBK button When a busy station is called the calling user may request to be placed in a queue to receive a Call Back When the called station returns to idle the system signals the initiating station with Callback ring When the user answers the previously busy station is called When a Message is waiting the MSG CALLBK button LED of iPECS Phones and digital phones flashes and for properly equipped SLTs the MW Lamp will flash 272 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation iPECS Phone To leave a Message Wait while receiving ring back tone or no response on a Call announce H
3. 146 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Message 08 IN MEETING RETURN AT TIME hh mm Message 09 AT HOME Message 10 AT BRANCH OFFICE Operation iPECS Phone To assign a Flex button for Display Messages DISPLAY MESSAGE button PGM FLEX PGM 51 SAVE ONE TOUCH DISPLAY MESSAGE button PGM FLEX PGM 51 message number SAVE To activate Display Message Press the PGM button Dial 51 the Display Message code To view available messages press VOL UP VOL DOWN button Dial the Message number 00 20 Dial auxiliary input as desired Press the SAVE button Press the DISPLAY MESSAGE button To view available messages press VOL UP VOL DOWN button Dial the Message number 00 20 Dial auxiliary input as desired Press the SAVE button 1 Press the ONE TOUCH DISPLAY MESSAGE button 2 Dial auxiliary input as desired 3 Press the SAVE button To cancel an active Display Message On KR WN A ODA Fb GM s 1 Press the flashing FWD button To define the User Custom Text Message 00 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 52 the Custom Message program code 147 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 Enter the Message contents up to 24 charact
4. 9 14 CALL PROFILE Description This function provides many flexibility of call re routing If user is not in office user is in another place user can get the call by pre programmed call profile table Each station has its 3 call profile tables table 1 table 3 and each profile table can have up to 10 destinations In Station Program menu PGM 2 6 CALL PROFILE user can set or disable Call Profile Table User can choose one Call Profile Table of three tables by this menu If one Call Profile is selected incoming call can routed by this Call Profile table In Station Program menu PGM 2 4 ICR SCENARIO user can configure Call Profile destinations scenario Each destination scenario composed of Destination Scenario Priority Call profile table index 0 Deact 1 3 Call Profile table and Call profile timer Operation iPECS Phone To create a Call Profile Scenario bold text step is necessary 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 24 the ICR menu or log on to the Station Web portal 3 Select the desired Scenario number 0 9 4 Select the type of Caller ID 0 5 Type 0 Station CID Type 1 All Station Type 2 CO CID Type 3 All CO call Type 4 All call e Type 5 N A 5 Enter the Scenario Start and End Date YYMMDD 6 Select day of week using Flex button e Flex button 1 MON Flex button 7 SUN e Flex 8 button Holiday 7 Enter scenario Start Time and E
5. 3 8 INTERCOM TRANSFER Description Users can transfer an active Intercom call to other stations in the iPECS system Intercom calls can be transferred after announcing the call screened or without announcing the call unscreened The Intercom station is placed on Exclusive Hold The Transfer Recall Timer is initiated and if this timer expires before the Intercom call is answered the call will recall the transferring station until answered or abandoned Operation iPECS Phone To perform a Screened ICM transfer while on an ICM call 1 Press TRANS button 2 Dial the station to receive call 3 At answer or Splash tone announce call 4 Hang up return to idle Or 1 Press DSS BLF button for the desired station 2 At answer or Splash tone announce call 3 Hang up return to idle While on an Intercom call Unscreened call transfer 1 Press TRANS button 2 Dial Station to receive call 3 Hang up return to idle Or 1 Press DSS BLF button for the desired station 2 Hang up return to idle SLT To perform a Screened transfer of an active Intercom call 1 Momentarily depress the Hook switch 2 Dial Station to receive call 3 At answer or Splash tone announce call 4 Hang up return to idle While on an Intercom call Unscreened call transfer 1 Momentarily depress the Hook switch 2 Dial Station to receive call 3 Hang up return to idle 266 iPECS LIK Fe
6. 4 13 IP TRUNKING 4 13 1 H 323 v4 Service Description When assigned to support H 323 protocol VoIP channels provide protocol conversion between H 323 v4 and the iPECS protocol or SIP This permits the VoIP channel to connect to external H 323 networks or terminals and to support H 323v4 supplementary services In addition H 323 VoIP channels can register with an external H 323 GateKeeper to support Gatekeeper call routing Supplementary services are supported employing H 450 1 H 450 12 standards which define the following supplementary services e H 450 1 e H 450 2 e H 450 3 e H 450 4 e H 450 5 e H 450 6 e H 450 7 e H 450 8 e H 450 9 e H 450 10 e H 450 11 e H 450 12 Operation System Operation of H 323 Service is automatic Conditions Programming STATION 1 Station IP Attributes PGM 122 BOARD 1 H323 VoIP Attributes PGM 130 CO IP 1 CO IP Line Group PGM 141 Btn 1 2 CO VoIP Mode PGM 141 Btn 11 Related Features e System Networking e SIP Service 297 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 e Remote Device Zone Management Hardware e VOIM8 or VOIM24 4 13 2 SIP Service Description When assigned to support SIP Session Initiation Protocol VolP channels provide protocol conversion between SIP and the iPECS protocol or H 323 This permits the VoIP channel to connect to external SIP networks for call services In addition to the IETF RFC 32
7. 161 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 Press the SAVE button To dial a Station Speed Dial number with the LIP 8000 series soft buttons 1 Press the DIR soft button 2 Press the SPEED soft button 3 Press the ADD soft button 4 Dial the Speed Dial bin number iPECS Micro A 50 8 100 200 999 iPECS 300 2000 4999 iPECS 600 2000 7999 iPECS 1200 20000 31999 5 Press the CO IP LOOP or POOL button or dial the CO IP line group access code 6 Dial the number to be stored 7 Press the SAVE button 8 If desired enter a name see alphanumeric entry chart under Station Speed Dial 9 Press the SAVE button Conditions 1 Accessing an empty Speed Dial bin will return error tone 2 ASpeed Dial number can be assigned to use a CO IP Line Group If the assigned line is busy a line from the same group will be selected If all lines in the group are busy the user may queue for the next available line 3 All Speed Dial numbers are stored in memory protected from power loss 4 The CO IP line used for a Speed Dial is presented to a direct appearance on the iPECS Phone If there is no direct appearance at the station a POOL or LOOP button is used as the appearance for the line 5 The user may pre select the CO IP line for a Speed Dial number overriding the CO IP line assignment in the Speed Dial bin 6 Aname can be entered for
8. Programming STATION Page Access PGM 111 Btn 7 Internal Page Zone Access PGM 118 SYSTEM Page Warning Tone PGM 161 Btn 4 External Control Contacts PGM 168 Paging Timeout Timer PGM 181 Btn 9 GA M A DN Related Features e Meet Me Page Answer Hardware e External Amplifier amp Speakers 3 10 2 Meet Me Page Answer Description Any station may respond to a Meet Me Page request over an Internal or External Page Zone The user answers the page from any station and is connected to the paging party Flexible buttons of an iPECS Phone may be assigned as a MEET ME button Operation iPECS Phone To assign a Flex button as a MEET ME button 1 PGM FLEX 544 SAVE To answer a page with Meet Me Page 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Dial 544 the Meet Me Page code or press the MEET ME button SLT To answer a page with Meet Me Page 1 Lift the handset to receive intercom dial tone 2 Dial 544 the Meet Me Page code Conditions 1 A Meet Me Page must be answered within the Page Time out timer 2 A station mav answer a Meet Me Page from anv station regardless of pickup paging group assignments and page access permission 3 The paging partv must remain off hook until the paged partv answers the Meet Me request The initiator mav press the Mute button to eliminate transmitting over the page circuit while waiting for the partv to answer 278
9. To delete all Message Waits 1 Press SPEED button 2 Press button twice 273 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 SLT To leave a Message Wait while receiving ring back tone or no response on a call announce H or P mode 1 Momentarily press the hook switch 2 Dial 556 the Message Wait Call Back code 3 Hang up Message Wait activated To leave a Message Wait while receiving DND tone 1 Momentarily press the hook switch 2 Dial 556 the Message Wait Call Back code 3 Hang up Message Wait activated To retrieve a Station Message Wait 1 Dial 557 the Message Wait Call Back Answer code To leave a Call Back queue for a station while receiving busy 1 Momentarily press the hook switch 2 Dial 556 the Message Wait Call Back code 3 Hang up return to idle To respond to a Call back recall when the busy station is available the system calls back 1 Lift the handset 2 Previously busy station is called Conditions 1 A Message Wait Call Back return call will always ring at the receiving station overriding the Intercom signaling mode selected 2 A station can leave only one callback request 3 The MSG CALLBK button LED will continue to flash until all Message Wait and Call Back requests including Voice Mails have been serviced 4 If a station is attempting to leave a message and the system Message Wa
10. 280 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Conditions 1 Conditions associated with Internal External amp All Call Page apply to Push to Talk paging 2 To access PTT paging the station must be permitted access to system paging PGM CODE 111 button 7 3 If allowed access to all PTT groups a station may log into all groups PTT group 0 to place announcements to all groups simultaneously and receive announcements from any group 4 A station can only login to PTT groups to which it is assigned as a member 5 The station must have a PTT to place or receive PTT announcements As a default the iPECS WLAN phone is assigned a PTT button 6 The station may be assigned and logged in to the default active PTT group in the system database Programming NUMBERING 1 PTT Log in out Code PGM 109 Btn 4 STATION 1 Page Access PGM 111 Btn 7 2 Default Active PTT Group PGM 111 Btn 16 3 PTT Group Access PGM 119 Related Features e Paging Hardware e iPECS Phone e iPECS WLAN e iPECS Phontage e jPECS UCS Client 281 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 12 BARGE IN Description Barge in permits an authorized extension to intrude into other existing outside internal calls Between intruding extension and parties on initial calls a conference call is established There are Two Barging In operations Monitor The intruding extension can li
11. iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 1 2 SYSTEM CAPACITIES The iPECS Series is available in several configurations as listed in Table 1 2 1 Total port capacities range from the 31 channel iPECS Micro to iPECS 1200 at 1200 ports Table 1 2 1 System Capacity Chart dial B l iPECS 100 iPECS 300 iPECS 600 iPECS 1200 Item iPECS Micro iPECS 50 MFIM100 MFIM300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 Main Cabinet n a n a 10 slots 10 slots 10 slots 10 slots System Ports 31 ports 50 ports 100 ports 300 ports 600 ports 1200 ports Stations t See SLEY E 70 300 600 1200 std std max 42 basic iPECS 50A eg std 4 PSTN PSTN circuits 5 42 200 400 600 VoIP iPECS 50B std 4 BRI VoIP Max RSGMs 13 25 35 150 300 600 Attendants 4 4 4 5 5 5 Serial Port RS n a 1 1 1 1 r 232C USB Host port 1 1 1 1 1 1 Alarm Door bell n a 1 2 2 2 2 input External Control n a 1 2 4 4 A Relays Music Source nla 1 2 2 2 2 Inputs r I Power Fail Circuit n a 1 4 4 Ext PFTU 4 Ext PFTU 4 Ext PFTU 6 optional 6 optional 6 optional External Page n a 1 2 2 2 2 zones Internal Page Zones 10 10 10 35 35 100 System Speed Dial 800 800 800 3000 6000 12000 23 digits 23 digits 23 digits 23 digits 23 digits 23 digits System Speed Dial 10 10 10 10 20 50 Zones Groups Station Speed Dial 20 23 digits 20 23 digits 20 23 digits 100 23 digits 1
12. 5 Manuallv dialing a Flash during an outgoing call will cause oniv those digits dialed after the Flash to be stored in the LNR buffer 6 LNR applies to both CO and VolP calls 130 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming Related Features e Save Number Redial SNR e Station Speed Dial e System Speed Dial Hardware 131 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 51 LCR LEAST COST ROUTING Description The LCR Tables are employed to define appropriate routing for outgoing calls based on the dialed number Generally the LCR Tables are structured to define the Least Cost Route for Long Distance calls User dialed digits are compared to table entries and modified based on time of day day of week and assigned routes There are four LCR Tables LCR Control Attributes LCR Leading Digit Tables LCR Digit Modification and LCR Initialization Tables LCR Access modes are assigned in the LCR Control Attributes Table These modes define the manner in which the user accesses the LCR function LCR may be disabled or one or more of the three access modes can be allowed to access LCR The basic modes are 1 Internal LCR If the user dialed digits match an Internal LCR code in the LDT Leading Digit Table a CO IP path is selected and digits are modified using the DMT Digit Modification Table 2 Loop LCR If the user dials 9 the 15 available C
13. Description A station which is ringing or receiving Off hook muted ring can press the DND button to reject the call and terminate ringing The station is placed in DND ringing terminates and the call receives treatment based on the following precedence 1 Previous or active Call Forward busy 2 Preset Call Forward busy 3 Station Call Coverage 4 Direct Transfer to Voice Mailbox 5 Return busy signal and disconnect When the station returns to the idle status DND is cancelled and the DND LED is extinguished Operation iPECS Phone To activate One Time DND while ringing 1 Press the DND button the DND LED lights station goes to DND state System Deactivation 1 When the station returns to idle DND is disabled and the DND LED extinguishes Conditions 1 CO IP recalls will override One Time DND 2 The Attendant can override stations in One Time DND by using Camp On or intrusion The Attendant does not have One Time DND service 3 One Time DND cancels existing Callback queues Programming STATION 1 DND PGM 111 Btn 3 2 Call Forward PGM 111 Btn 2 3 Preset Call Forward PGM 120 4 Direct xfer to Mail box PGM 120 Btn 6 SYSTEM 1 System Call Forward No Answer Timer PGM 181 Btn 1 Related Features e Call Waiting Camp On e DND Do Not Disturb e Call Forward 324 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 e Call Forward Preset e Station Call Co
14. Pick Up incoming and transferred intercom CO and IP calls ringing at another station in the same pick up group All ringing calls except Private Line and Queue Callbacks are subject to Pick up by other stations in the same group iPECS phone users may assign a Flex button as a PICK UP GROUP CALL PICK UP button Operation iPECS Phone To assign a PICK UP GROUP CALL PICK UP button 1 PGM FLEX 588 SAVE button To Pick up a call ringing at another station 1 Lift the handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Dial 588 the Pick Up Group Call Pick up feature code Or 1 Lift the handset or press SPEAKER 2 Press the PICK UP GROUP CALL PICK UP button SLT To Pick up a call ringing at another station 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 588 the Pick Up Group Call Pick up code 3 Dial Pick Up Group Number 56 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Conditions 1 When a user dial Group Call Pick up feature code 566 a station can answer calls ringing at another station in the same pick up group in PGM190 and PGM192 But when a user dial Pick Up Group Call Pick up feature code 588 a station can answer calls ringing at another station in the same pick up group in PGM192 A station can t pick up the call of pick up group in PGM190 with Pick Up Group Call Pick up feature code 588 TO pick up a CO IP call the station must have an idle
15. DEVICE LOGIN 1 Remote Phone amp CO Gateway Login Web Admin only ZONE 1 Zone Data PGM 436 441 amp 444 Web Admin only Related Features 153 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Hardware 154 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 63 RINGING LINE PREFERENCE Description A station is automatically connected to incoming calls by lifting the handset or pressing the SPEAKER button when assigned Ringing Line Preference Operation iPECS Phone To answer a call while the station is ringing 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button Conditions 1 When multiple calls are ringing at the station a priority defines the order in which calls are answered The default priority is Transfer gt recalls gt incoming calls gt queued calls 2 Intercom calls are always given the lowest answering priority Ringing Line Preference overrides Prime Line assignment 4 SLTs operate only in the RLP mode when ringing lifting the handset connects the SLT to the ringing call oO Programming STATION 1 Auto Speaker Select PGM111 Btn 1 2 Ringing Line Preference PGM 112 Btn 7 CO IP 1 Ring Assignments PGM 144 SYSTEM 1 RLP Priority PGM 173 Related Features e Prime Line Immediately Delayed e Automatic Speaker Select Hardware 155 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 64 SPEED
16. Hardware e iPECS Phone 41 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 8 AUTO SERVICE MODE CONTROL Description The service mode defines different ring assignments COS and answering privileges for the system The service mode can be controlled automatically through definitions in the Auto Ring Mode Selection Table which defines the time of day for the Day Night and Timed shift modes The Attendant may change the system mode selection from automatic to manual Operation System Operation of this feature is automatic Conditions Programming STATION CO IP Station COS PGM 116 CO Ring Assignment PGM 144 CO COS PGM 141 Btn 2 DISA COS PGM 166 External Control Contact PGM 168 PBX Trunk Access Codes PGM 172 LD Digit Count PGM 177 Btn 3 LD Digit Code PGM 177 Btn 19 Toll Restriction PGM 224 Authorization Codes Table PGM 227 Auto Ring Mode Selection Table PGM 233 SYSTEM TABLES GA MM A aRWBN AYN A Related Features e Off Hook Signaling e Authorization Codes Password e Direct Inward System Access DISA e Day Night Timed Scenario Ring Mode e System Clock Set e CO IP Ring Assignment e LBC Loud Bell Control e Dialing Restrictions Hardware 42 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 9 AUTOMATIC SYSTEM DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME Description The system can automatically adjust for Daylight Saving Time
17. In the Headset mode pressing the SPEAKER button will send audio to the Headset instead of the speakerphone In addition when in the Headset mode ring signals can be delivered to the speaker or the headset as defined in the system database iPECS Phone users may assign a Flex button to select Headset or Speakerphone operation The HEADSET SELECT button may be used to toggle the operation of the phone between Headset and Speakerphone Operation iPECS Phone To assign a Flex button for HEADSET SELECT 1 PGM FLEX PGM 61 SAVE To change operation from Speakerphone to Headset 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 61 the Headset select code 3 Dial 0 to select Headset 1 to select Speakerphone Or 1 Press HEADSET SELECT button To change the device to receive ring signals 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 62 the Ring select code 3 Dial 1 for Speaker 2 for Headset or 3 for both To place answer calls using the headset 1 Press the SPEAKER button with the phone in Headset mode Conditions 1 The Intercom Signaling Mode can be set in the Headset mode as with the Speakerphone mode 2 The station always receives Page announcements over the speaker of the iPECS Phone 3 Although the phone is in the headset mode the system will monitor the hook switch status If the user lifts the handset to go off hook audio is delivered to the handset
18. Prefix Table ID Related Features Hardware 248 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 84 IP CALL RECORDING Description System can record automatically or manually using IPCR server IPCR IP call recording Server can be registered to P5 5 system The station with agent ID is automatically recorded about call external and conference call Operation Registration Before registration you should install the IPCR server in PC based on linux os fedora 12 using install CD or downloading from our bcs web site 1 IPCR setting before registration to system 1 1 PBX registration system IP SIP ID SIP Password 1 2 IPCR Server registration 1 3 User registration 1 4 Channel registration 2 System should set register MAC table for IPCR s MAC or Dip Switch ON of Register 3 If SIP ID is not allowed it s set SIP ID and password in PGM 443 Programming Agent ID 1 Enter the number of IPCR s order in PGM 237 2 Match Agent ID to favorite station 3 You can see the ACR Auto call recording or ODR On Demand Recording 4 You should choice STN Type for station But DID Type is for the future Two way recording 1 You should set External VM group ex 620 and the SIP number of the IPCR as the member of Ex VM in PGM190 2 Automatic Recording Destination should be set the Ex VM ex 620 of IPCR in station PGM 111 113 And you don t need to set automatic call recording O
19. SYSTEM 1 External Contact Control PGM 168 2 Door Open Timer PGM 181 Btn 5 STATION 1 Door Open PGM 113 BTN 25 99 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features e LBC Loud Bell Control Hardware e External Control Contact connected to a door lock release mechanism 100 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 35 EMERGENCY CALL E 911 CALLER LOCATION SUPPORT Description The Emergency Call E 911 caller location Support feature integrates the IPECS to a PBX ANI Link unit such as from Tone Commander to provide caller id and location information to an emergency center When an emergency call is placed from a station of the iPECS an assigned emergency CO Line is used to connect the ANI link unit The iPECS sends the station number four 4 digits to the unit as DTMF digits The ANI Link unit places a call to the emergency center over a connected CAMA trunk Caller Id and location information from the ANI Link unit database is sent to the emergency center in the proper format and the station is connected to the call This feature also provides a means to identifv a Power Failure signal from the ANI Link unit Tvpicallv an ANI Link unit will incorporate a normallv open contact that closes when power to the unit fails If a Power Failure signal is detected IPECS routes emergency calls via PSTN ISDN circuits other than those marked for emer
20. e External No Answer external calls not answered in the No Answer time forward Note calls to a busy station also forward after the No Answer time In addition calls can be directly forward to the users Voice Mail box using Call Forward Preset Operation System Operation of Preset Call Forward is automatic Conditions 1 A station receiving a forwarded call can transfer the call to the forwarding station 2 Calls cannot be forwarded to a station in DND and if attempted error tone is returned 3 Manual Forward has higher priority than Preset Forward and overrides any Preset Forward setting 4 Calls to a Preset Call Forward chain will progress as appropriate through the chain to the last station If a station in manual Call Forward or DND is encountered it is bypassed and the next station in the chain is signaled If the last station has entered DND CO IP calls revert to the previous station signaling until answered or abandoned 5 Internal Busy or No Answer will only operate when the internal call encounters a busy state or no answer respectively External Busy or External No Answer will only operate when the external call encounters a busy state or no answer respectively 6 Preset call forward status is not shown in the station s LCD display 7 A station in a Station Hunt Group ACD Circular or Terminal can be assigned to receive incoming hunt calls overriding anv Call Forward That is either the svstem reco
21. iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming SYSTEM 1 Paging Timeout Timer PGM 181 Btn 9 Related Features e Internal External amp All Call Page Hardware 3 10 3 SOS Paging Description The system allows of being recorded multiple VMIM messages for pre recorded paging Depending on circumstance user can use pre recorded messages for paging Recorded VMIM message is paged to a page zone at emergency Operation To assign VMIM SOS Paging at a flexible button perform the following Steps 1 Press the ITRANS PGMI button 2 Press the FLEX button to assign 3 Dial paging code 5xx 4 Dial Message number 001 070 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button To activate VMIM SOS paging 1 Press the assigned VMIM SOS Paging flexible button Condition e This feature can be only activated by pressing assigned flexible button in idle state e The VMIM message for SOS Paging can be recorded only at attendant station e Paging zone includes internal external and all call paging area e VMIM SOS paging is not restricted by VMIM Paging timer The whole VMIM SOS paging can be paged even though Paging Timeout timer expires Programming STATION 1 Page Access PGM 111 Btn 7 Related Features e VMIM VSF Paging Hardware e VSF and or VMIM 279 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 11 PUSH TO TALK PAGING Description Each iPECS Phone can b
22. 1 If ICLID routing is assigned for the CO IP Line the received Caller Id is compared to the ICLID Table for routing first If Caller Id does not match an entry in the ICLID Table the normal DID call processes are used 2 DID calls that encounter a busy signal are not answered in the DID DISA No Answer Timer or are received at a vacant or invalid number can be routed to the Attendant a tone Station group or VMIM VSF announcement When the Attendant receives such calls the call is appropriately identified by the Attendant iPECS Phone display 3 Fora station that is part of a non pilot Station Hunt group DID calls will follow the group hunt process if the Station is busy or does not answer the call 291 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 DID calls are subject to Group Call Pick up and Directed Call Pick up 5 If a VMIM VSF announcement is defined as the destination in the Flexible DID Destination Table a Caller Controlled Routing Table for the announcement can be defined iPECS can be configured to drop disconnect the call after playing the recorded announcement Programming STATION BOARD CO IP SYSTEM TABLES Related Features VMIM VSF Auto Attendant Directed Call Pick Up Group Call Pick Up IP Trunking IP Address Dialing Hardware DID BRI or PRI Module M A WN A GA M ADH AD A SIP User ID Table PGM 111 Btn 19 Station SIP Attributes 2 PGM 126 We
23. Call Coverage Delay is implemented by covered station Call Cover Delay Ring delay count by Member Call Coverage Delay is implemented by covering station Call Cover Delay Ring delay count Call Coverage For Wakeup Ring OFF Wakeup Ring to covered station is not covered ON Wakeup Ring to covered station is covered Conditions 1 2 An iPECS Phone user may cover for an SLT or other stations However since a Flex button is required an SLT cannot provide coverage for other stations When off hook or in DND the covering station will only receive a visual indication of the call from the LED of the CALL COVERAGE button and display no off hook ring is provided The CALL COVERAGE button will provide an appearance for CO IP lines that do not appear on the covering station except for Private Lines To cover for Private Lines When a covered station receives a call the covering station will receive the following display CALL FOR STA xxxx FROM yyyy time the covering station must have an appearance and be allowed access to the Private Line Call Coverage attributes can be assigned either by the covered station user or in the system database Link Paired Station does not receive call coverage ring on both the original and paired station since they have their own flexible button and call coverage feature is not implemented on same station but different flexible buttons for same covered s
24. LCR Least Cost Routing SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Auto Service Mode Control Automatic System Time Synchronization Automatic System Daylight Savings Time Day Night Timed Scenario Ring Mode Hardware 389 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 20 IP ATTENDANT Description The IP Attendant is a Windows based PC application that provides a visualization of the Attendant functionality to simplify Attendant control of features and functions including displays of call user and system status For further information on IP Attendant refer to the IP Attendant Installation and User Guide Operation System Attendant Operation of the IP Attendant is provided in the IP Attendant Installation and User Guide Conditions 1 IP Attendant requires installation of a system Lock key System Management Appliances Controls gt Lock Key Install Programming SYSTEM 1 Attendant Assignment PGM 164 2 Station User Login PGM 443 Related Features Hardware 390 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 7 SLT 7 1 BROKER CALL Description Broker Call allows an SLT user to engage in two 2 calls alternating between the two parties so that the conversation with each party is private There are two types of Broker Call Transfer and Camped On Operation SLT To activate a Transfer Broker Call 1 Make or receive an interc
25. Station Attribute PGM 113 e Reset mailbox password 3 Please enter the mailbox number Press 1 to confirm or to cancel and go back to administration main The password for station is defaulted to be empty Authorization Code Table PGM 227 Station Password Station password is used for mailbox access in iPECS LIK e Record Mailbox greeting 4 Please enter the mailbox number to listen press 1 to record press 2 to delete press 3 Press to cancel and go back to administration main e Record a broadcast message 5 Please enter the mailbox number 01 10 to listen press 1 to record press 2 to delete press 3 to send press 4 Press to cancel and go back to administration main e Record Mailbox Name 6 Please enter the mailbox number to listen press 1 to record press 2 to delete press 3 Press to cancel and go back to administration main Conditions 1 There are no limits on the number of mailboxes that can be marked as administrators 2 Station Attribute PGM 127 Administrator Mailbox ON OFF 225 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 This can be available for station 4 The broadcast message is the shared message System provides broadcast message first regardless message retrieve option 5 A station can delete broadcast message without confirmation 6 Only administrator can delete a recorded broadcast me
26. as programmed for the station Operation VSF outgoing mailbox destination call will be routed automatically Conditions 1 When a set a unavailable destination as a outgoing mailbox destination Call will be routed to the Attendant Programming STATION 1 STATION ATTRIBUTES PGM114 BTN19 Related Features Hardware 245 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 82 REMOTE CONTROL WITH MOBILE EXTENSION Description Mobile extension user can change the mobile extension settings remotely Operation 1 The mobile extension user dials his DID number with mobile phone Then the system will check the CLID answer the call and the user will receive internal dial tone 2 He can enter the remote control menu with the code remote MEX control code PGM109 Flex16 and then confirmation tone will be provided 3 He can select the desirable menu 4 He hears the dial tone Step 2 Remote control menu 1 Activate Mobile extension 2 Deactivate Mobile extension 3 Fwd to VSF VM group 4 Cancel Fwd to VSF VM group 5 ACD Agent Duty OFF 6 ACD Agent Duty ON Conditions 1 In menu 1 Activate Mobile extension PGM Authority PGM236 F1 should Enable 2 In menu 3 Fwd to VSF VM group VSF VM hunt group PGM190 should be existed Call fwd admin PGM111 F2 should be ON VSF Access admin PGM113 F2 should be Enable 3 In menu 5 ACD Agent Duty OFF
27. the reason of Duty OFF is 1 4 Remote MEX Control code PGM109 F 16 should not be started with Programming NUMBERING PLAN 1 Remote MEX Control PGM109 Btn 16 Related Features Hardware 246 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 83 PREFIX DIALING TABLE Description PGM 206 Prefix Dialing Table With this table three features can be supported 1 Analog CO Call Charge with NPR metering 2 SIP Direct dialing with no wait inter digit timer 3 ISDN Prefix Call ISDN enblock Dialing with Prefix Call Setup If first some digits up to 8 digits of outgoing dial number are matched with Prefix Code of each table this table can start work By each Co line PGM 142 F20 Table ID 0 6 can be set This table ID PGM 142 F20 is associated with PGM 206 each table ID Operation Analog CO Call Charge with NPR metering 1 Outgoing Call is established with analog Co line 2 Outgoing digits are matched with prefix code 3 If Call Charge Timer is set to proper value ex 30 sec call metering pulse is calculated one time per this timer 4 For example If Call charge timer is 30 sec Call duration is 5 minute and SMDR Cost Per Metering Pulse is 1 5 then Call Cost is 1 5 10 15 SIP Direct dialing with no wait inter digit timer 1 Outgoing Call is established with SIP Co line 2 Outgoing digits are matched with prefix code 3 If total di
28. 1 Press the FWD button when it is flashing The FWD button will be extinguished 189 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Conditions 1 If both of served and diverted to stations are located in the same system the networking path will be cleared That is the forwarded call will be setup as intercom call 2 System does not check the status of diverted to station that is in DND CFW or Empty Programming SYSTEM 1 Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 2 Networking Supplementary Attribute PGM 321 BTN 1 3 Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 4 Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 2 70 2 10 Net Call Forward No Answer Description It is possible for a user to forward his station remotely when the station does not answer within the CFW NO ANS Timer The forwarded destination can be over the network Engineering notice Currently iPECS system supports both rerouting and join method by admin programming Operation To activate Net Call Forward 1 Press the SPEAKER button and the FWD button 2 Dial Net Call Forward code 3 and dial the station number of another system The FWD button will be flashing and a confirmation tone will be provided if allowed 3 Dial the station number that is set Net Call Forward to a station of another node The call is routed to a forwarded station when the called station does not answer within a No Answer timer and the f
29. 2 ACD DATABASE 3 ACD DUTY 3 Dial ACD Dbase Code 2 4 Select database item scrolling with the VOL UP VOL DWN button Overflow Destination station Net station 1 group 2 system speed dial 3 Overflow Time xxx seconds Wrap Up Time xxx seconds Password up to 12 digits 5 Enter new data 6 Press the SAVE button Conditions 1 The Supervisor must be assigned as a Supervisor for the ACD Group and be logged into the group to access the Group Status display information Programming NUMBERING PLAN 1 ACD Group Status Code PGM 107 Btn 7 STATION GROUPS 1 ACD Group PGM 191 2 ACD Group Supervisor PGM 191 Btn 18 Related Features e Station Groups Hardware e iPECS Phone 2 5 11 6 Agent Status Control Description An ACD Supervisor can view and control the status of Agents in the group 36 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation Supervisor iPECS Phone To assign a GROUP STATUS button at the Supervisor 1 PGM FLEX 576 Group Number SAVE To view control Agent Status 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the GROUP STATUS button 1 ACD STATUS 2 ACD DATABASE 3 ACD DUTY 3 Dial 3 Agent Code the LCD menu will update 1 DUTY STATUS 2 DUTY ON OFF DUTY PRINT To view Agent Status 1 Dial 1 Agent Status Code AC
30. 2 Dial 59 the Conference Room entry code 3 Dial the Conference Room Number 4 Dial the Conference Room password To delete a Conference Room 1 Lift the handset Dial 561 SLT Programming code Dial 54 the delete Conference Room code Dial the Conference Room number 1 9 Dial the Conference Room password oa Ff WwW ND Momentarily press the hook switch receive confirmation tone Conditions 1 Once established a Conference Room will remain opened until the Room is deleted 71 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 The Conference Room feature employs the Multi party Conference Interface Module MCIM which must be installed for proper operation 3 IPECS Phontage and UCS Client may also create delete and join a Conference Room For operation refer to the iPECS Phontage or UCS Client User Guide Programming Related Features e Multi Partv Voice Conference e Automatic Speaker Select e Hold Recall e Unsupervised Conference Hardware e MCIM Multi party Conference gateway Module 2 23 2 Multi Party Voice Conference Description The system allows multiple internal and external parties to be connected on a call conference An unlimited number of 3 party conferences may be established using iPECS Phones In addition each MCIM Multi party Conference Interface Module up to 32 parties with the g 711 or g 729 codec and 24 with the g 723 codec may be connecte
31. 2 48 IP FAX RELAY T 38 SUPPORT cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 127 249 IP TRANS CODING Egger 128 2 50 LNR LAST NUMBER REDIAL cccceceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeees 130 2 51 LCR LEAST COST ROUTING L ss nnnnnnenzznnnnnnnnnnznnnnnnnznz 132 2 52 LINKED STATION PAIRS ii iii eege Eege Ego 134 2 53 LBC LOUD BELL CONTROL iii i i wk 136 2 54 MOBILE EXTENSION iii a ecncnas 137 2 55 MULTIPLE LANGUAGE SUPPORTEREN 139 2 56 MULTIPLE VOICE MAILBOX SUPPORTEREN 141 2 57 MOH MUSIC ON HOLD ses sennnennnnzznnnnnnenenzzznnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 142 2 58 NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ssennnnnnzennnzzznnznz 144 2 59 NETWORK SECURITY amp PRIORITY see 145 2 60 PRE DEFINED 8 CUSTOM TEXT DISPLAV MESSAGES 146 2 60 1 DND operation in internal call to pre selected station 149 2 61 REDUNDANT SYSTEM PROCESSOR ees EEN 151 2 62 REGISTRATION amp FRACTIONAL MODULE TABLES 153 2 63 RINGING LINE PREFERENCE cccccceeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 155 2 64 SPEED DIAL seess i ee 156 2 64 1 Display Security EE EE 156 2 64 2 Speed Dial Pause Insertion EEN 156 2 04 3 Siatiori Speed Hp E 157 2 64 4 System Speed Dial L 160 2 64 5 System Speed Zone Groups sl eennnennnzznnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnznnn 163 2 65 STATION CALL COVERAGE nn nnnnnnnnnnnnznnnnnnennnnnnn enza 164 2 66 STATION GROUP Sii iii iet 166 2 67 RING GROUPS INDICATION 00 nnnnnnnnnnnnnznnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnzz 169 2 68 SMDR STATION MESSAGE DET
32. CNIP When a user makes a net call and a name of station is programmed in the Station Name field PGM 74 the system includes the name of calling party to the called party between systems Operation 1 A Net Call is arrived a station with LCD display While ringing the CNI will be displayed if they are included in the Setup message Conditions Programming SYSTEM 1 Network CNIP COLP Enable PGM 320 BTN 3 BTN 4 2 70 2 4 Call Completion Description There are two kinds of call completion as follows Completion of Calls to Busy Subscribers CCBS After calling a user in another system using basic call and encountering a busy tone A station user can be notified when the busy destination of another system becomes idle If the user wants to make a call to the destination on that notification the call can be reinitiated to the destination of another system again Completion of Calls on No Reply CCNR After calling a user in another system using basic call and encountering no reply The caller can be notified when the destination becomes an idle status after some actions If the caller wants to make a call to the destination the call can be reinitiated to the destination again Operation To make CCBS Call Back 1 Dial the station of another system that is a busy 2 Press the CALLBK button while a busy tone is provided The call is cleared after a confirmation tone 185 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp
33. CO Call Drop DID Call Waiting Speed Access Alarm VSF Access DND FWD Paging CO Line Access CO Ring Assign etc If one station of a Linked pair is busy the other station of the linked pair is also considered as busy thus use of the linked station to place a call is not supported A station can be linked to another station without registration to the system This allows a station to be linked without affecting the overall capacity of the system In this case only an iPECS phone Phontage or SLT attached to an SLTM2 can be used as the unregistered linked station In other cases the linked station must be registered with the system reducing the system capacity by one IP ATD can be linked pair only Slave MAC linked pair using PGM 443 SIP cannot be linked pair Linked pair stations cannot connect with each other between Master and Slave but ring for indication 134 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 10 Linked pair cannot transfer a call with each other But if Master or slave transfer to Slave or Master and on hook you can recall and hold the call in slave or Master Programming SYSTEM 1 Linked Station Pairs PGM 124 Related Features e Intercom Caller Controlled ICM Signaling Hardware 135 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 53 LBC LOUD BELL CONTROL Description The iPECS hardware is equipped with relay
34. DST When DST is enabled the system will adjust the system time forward one 1 hour at the DST Start time and back one 1 hour at the DST End time The system time is sent for display to all devices and terminals and is the basis of the system various time based features Walking COS Wake up Alarm etc Operation System Operation of this feature is automatic Conditions 1 The DST Start and End times are set through the Web Admin interface only 2 The interval between the DST Start and End times must be at least 7 days Programming SYSTEM 1 System Time PGM 178 Btn 1 2 System Date PGM 178 Btn 2 3 DST Enable PGM 178 Btn 3 4 DST Start amp End Time Web only Related Features e Auto Service Mode Control e Automatic System Time Synchronization e System Clock Set Hardware 43 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 10 AUTOMATIC SYSTEM TIME SYNCHRONIZATION Description When enabled the system automatically determines and sets the time of day employing Network Time Protocol NTP or ISDN time messages When using NTP the system at ten 10 minute intervals requests the time from the specified NTP time server and receives GMT time This feature allows the System Time to synchronize with the NTP time server automatically If the time deviates more then two 2 seconds the system clock is adjusted to match the NTP server When using ISDN the system receives the time o
35. Dial 7 while on an iPECS call 2 Dial the desired extension the call is transferred and the mobile phone returns to idle NOTE The mobile may reconnect by dialing 137 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 System Incoming DID calls are sent to active mobile phones automatically Conditions 1 When the mobile phone places an external call through iPECS the CLI of the corresponding station is used The Mobile Extension features are supported via system digital T1 and ISDN lines only Message Wait and Callback cannot be activated to a mobile phone The Mobile Extension feature is not supported over a distributed networked environment When an incoming ISDN DID call is received the system will access an ISDN line and place a call to the mobile phone Thus an ISDN line must be available for the system to notify the mobile user of the incoming call Hold and Transfer Recalls to the mobile phone are sent to mobile phone and the associated station ACD Circular and Terminal Hunt Group calls can be routed to the active Mobile Extension Programming SYSTEM 1 Mobile Extension Table PGM 236 Related Features DND Do Not Disturb Station Message Wait Call Back Attendant Recall Distributed Control Network Station User Programming amp Codes Hardware iPECS Phone 138 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5
36. Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 30 DIAL PULSE TO TONE SWITCHOVER Description On a pulse dial CO line the user can request the system to change the signaling mode from pulse to DTMF This allows the user to access outside facilities that require DTMF signals such as banking services voice mail etc Operation To switch from pulse to DTMF while on a pulse CO line 1 Dial signaling changed to DTMF Conditions 1 In a Speed Dial the will automatically insert a pause before dialing the remaining digits 2 This command is only recognized for analog pulse dial CO lines Dial pulse to tone switchover is not available in the Redial features 4 When is the first digit of a dialed number the Display Security feature is enabled and not Pulse to tone switchover 5 For VoIP calls pulse dialing is not available thus switchover is not required or supported oO Programming CO IP 1 CO Line Type PGM 141 Btn 4 2 CO Line Signal Type PGM 141 Btn 5 Related Features e Speed Dial e Display Security Hardware 87 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 31 DIALING RESTRICTIONS 2 31 1 Class of Service Description Dialing privileges can be assigned for each station DISA line and Authorization Code The dialing privileges are the result of the interaction of the Station and CO Class of Service COS assignments as shown in the foll
37. For SMDR if the first dialed digit s match the programmed LD code or the number of dialed digits exceeds the LD digit count the call is considered an LD call When behind a PBX LD determination is made only if a PBX Trunk Access code is dialed as the first digit s 2 Except for DISA calls the duration of ring for an incoming call is provided in the Dialed number field 3 A header including the assigned Customer Site Id is output after two blank lines and is repeated every 66 line 4 The SMDR output is a simple ASCII stream of up to 80 characters per line 5 When enabled SMDR call record timing begins after the SMDR Start Timer expires and ends at call completion 6 For security if an Authorization code is entered as the Account code the call record will show STA P and the station number or SYS P and the Authorization code bin number in place of the Account code 7 For incoming calls the NUM l and NUM II fields will display the assigned data item Ring Service time CLI or CPN For outgoing calls the NUM field will always display the dialed number user or system Programming SYSTEM SMDR Attributes PGM 177 Field PGM 177 Btn 20 Field Il PGM 177 Btn 22 Print Serial No PGM 177 Btn 23 SMDR DISC Cause PGM 177 Btn 24 5 SMDR ICM SAVE PGM177 Btn 24 3 SMDR ICM PRINT PGM177 Btn 24 4 NOOR WD gt Related Features Call Cost Display Lost Call Recording Traf
38. ON w Ka EI Door Open Enade M Kap Oungoing Mailbox Destination Tra a SIS VSF MSG Date Time Ton ae Ka E VSF MSG Delete Message i OFF EAR VM Password Check Ton ze RI g Barge In Mode I Disable e E EI SLT Flash Mode Flash Transfer EJ E Line Release Cost Display OFF Kap LDT Table index REH 2 If Call Back To CO is disabled you cannot operate it and you can see the error display Please Set Call Back Enable in Progamming 3 If it s not adaptable COS you can see as following CO is not TOLL FREE 4 If there is no available Co you can see the error message There is no available CO Call From Number 5 If there is no adaptable Co you can see the error message There is no available Digital CO or LCO with LoopSupervisionTmr Programming 1 Call Back To CO PGM 113 Btn 24 Btn 11 Related Features Hardware 254 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 88 PERSONAL GROUP Description Several stations can share same station number That means Personal Group is extended feature of Linked Pair A Personal Group is composed with a master station and several member stations A master station and all member stations share master station s number By using this shared number almost features Call To xxx Call From xxx SMDR Message Wait can be activated But some features can be chosen by PGM 261 attribute about a
39. Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Conditions 1 2 3 To use CO transit out service the sub system user must seize the CO line explicitly The original station s COS is applied for toll restriction Outside caller hears busy tone when a networking path is not available during transit out Inthe main system the attendant must have the CO access authority about the public connection of figure For CO transit out any code will be available using NET routing table PGM 324 However if there is a conflict between NET routing table and system numbering plan system numbering plan has high priority If you want to use some code for CO transit out then its type should be PSTN PGM 324 BTN1 You can determine that your code is repeated or not by PGM324 BTN7 You must decide that a CO line is connected to PSTN or Network interval at PGM 322 BTNA Main svstem can request a password to sub system user to apply COS to transit out call at PGM 324 BTN 12 10 Sub system can decide to display dialed digits or not in SMDR because it can contain password PGM 324 BTN 13 Programming SYSTEM 1 Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 BTN 4 2 Networking Routing Table PGM324 2 70 2 14 BLF Presentation Description Stations on one node are able to program a busy lamp appearance of extension on another node The Busy Lamp Field BLF key can also be used to call the remote extension The BLF presentation c
40. PGM button 2 Dial 0128 the CO IP Hourly Traffic report code 3 Select Analysis Period 1 75 4 Press the SAVE button Conditions Programming SYSTEM 1 RS 232 Port Settings PGM 174 2 Serial Port Function Selections PGM 175 Related Features e SMDR Station Message Detail Recording e ACD Statistics Report Hardware e device to capture reports 204 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 72 UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER UNA Description UNA allows a user to be alerted over an external loud bell and answer defined CO IP calls by dialing a UNA code While primarily intended for alternate answering during the Night service mode UNA will also function in other modes providing Universal Answer in all service modes Calls will appear on the CO IP appearance or a POOL or LOOP button An External Control Contact can be assigned to activate an external Loud Bell to alert users of incoming calls iPECS Phones may be assigned a Flex button as a UNA button Operation iPECS Phone To assign a Flex button as a UNA button 1 PGM FLEX 567 SAVE To access an incoming UNA call 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Dial 567 the UNA feature code the oldest UNA call is connected Or 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the UNA button the oldest UNA call is connected SLT To access an inc
41. Programming STATION 1 Speaker Headset Ring Mode PGM 111 Btn 8 2 Speakerphone Headset PGM 111 Btn 9 113 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features e Speakerphone e Paging Hardware 114 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 42 HOLD 2 42 1 Hold Preference Description Hold Preference defines either Exclusive Hold or System Hold as the preferred hold state which is activated on the first depression of the HOLD button The selection is based on the assigned Hold Preference in the system database Operation iPECS Phone To activate the Preferred Hold while on a call 1 Press the HOLD button the connected party is placed in the preferred hold state Conditions 1 A transferred call is placed in the Exclusive hold state at the receiving station regardless of the assigned Hold Preference 2 Hold Preference is not available to an SLT or non iPECS VolP terminals Programming SYSTEM 1 Hold Preference PGM 160 Btn 7 Related Features e Call Transfer CO IP e Exclusive Hold e System Hold Hardware e iPECS Phone 2 42 2 Hold Recall Description When a user places a CO IP call on hold a hold timer is activated If the timer expires the held call will recall the station for the l Hold Recall time If the call remains unanswered the Attendant also receives recall for the Attendant Recall time and if the call is
42. Registration after 15 Registration you can program related attributes in SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 Registration Timer Usage ON Registration Timer default or more than 10 minute recommended or before 18 Registration you can set the related attributes in SIP Data SIP Phone Provisioning 212 for LG Ericsson SIP Phones refer to SIP Phone Provisioning 400 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 Registration Timer has meaning only when Registration Timer Usage is ON 6 Shorter timer will take more traffic on network 7 For Keep Alive usage we recommend Keep Alive Usage ON the OPTIONS message if a SIP Phone does not support OPTIONS message then you can implement a portion of Keep Alive by this Re Registration In that case set the Registration Timer to 60 seconds we recommend Status Monitoring Keep Alive and Talking Monitoring Session Timer 1 Status Monitoring Keep Alive Role When a SIP Phone is unplugged or disconnected from network system can recognize that and make the Extension be disconnected status Keep Alive Usage SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 Keep Alive Usage ON Keep Alive Timer SIP Data SIP Attributes 210 Check Message Send Timer 30 seconds Keep Alive message Retry Count SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 Retry Cou
43. Supported Call Features by Numbering are e Internal Page Zones Internal All Call Page Meet Me Page External Page Zone External All Call Page All Call Page SMDR Account Code Enter SLT Last Number Redial Do Not Disturb DND Call Forward Speed Dial Program SLT Speed Dial Access DND FWD Cancel Alarm Reset Group Call Pick Up 409 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 e Universal Night Answer Account Code With Bin Walking COS Call Park Locations Station Group Pilot Number Station User VSF Features Access Call Coverage Ring Direct Call Pick Up Access CO Group Access Individual CO IP Access Held Individual CO IP Access CO In First CO Group Attendant Call Door Open ENTER INTO CONF ROOM ENTER INTO CONF GROUP STATION ICR PICKUP GROUP PICK UP EMERGENCY PAGE Conditions 1 If you can utilize SIP Phone s programmable Dial Digit Map you can make immediate sending out dials w o press SEND button or key lt Refer to below gt Digit Map for Call Setup in SIP Phone you can program Digit Map according to System Numbering Plan Example in case of LIP8002 88xx SIP Phone type xX T 0 xx xxx 1xxx 2xxx 3xxx xxxx Explanation 0 dial 0 for attendant call you can specify other single digit if you want it to be sent immediately when press the digit without ending by 1XXX 2xxx 3xxx extension numbering you can specify other 2
44. The ISDN must support the Call Deflection Supplementary Service as defined by the ETS300 202 206 207 standard protocol 2 ISDN lines that support Call Deflection must be assigned in the system database PGM 143 Btn 7 Programming CO IP 1 ISDN SS CD PGM 143 Btn 7 Related Features e ISDN Supplementary Services 307 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Hardware e ISDN line e iPECS Phone 4 16 2 ISDN Malicious Call Id Request Description When the ISDN supports the Malicious Caller Id supplementary service iPECS can request the CLID from the ISDN The CLID is saved and output in the SMDR call record Malicious Caller Id is activated during an ISDN call and requires a MCID REQUEST Flex button to access the feature Operation iPECS Phone To program an MCID REQUEST button 1 PGM FLEX 0 SAVE To request MCID while on an incoming ISDN call 1 Press the MCID REQUEST button Conditions 1 The ISDN must support the Malicious Caller Id Supplementary Service as defined by the EN300 130 standard protocol 2 Ifthe MCID request is successful the SMDR call record will include the CLID returned from the ISDN and the characters MT If the request fails the characters MF are included in the record 3 If the system is programmed to save SMDR records the MCID is stored in the system memory as part of the call record Programming CO IP 1 MCID Re
45. Use MEX Out band Signaling Yes No 3 Displaying internal station number If we display internal station numbers for internal calls the feature feels more integrated and gets easier to use This is a special case and only applies to when the mobile calls an internal station or when an internal station calls the mobile M 3 UIE ee Corl Pee lien LIGA r he SIP TRUNK CO 001 024 UP Sch 126044 97403 amp WP 20 When LIP 200 calls MEX 105 it should display 200 When MEX 105 calls LIP 200 it should display 105 Conditions 1 There is no linked hard phone in system 2 Need SIP Extension Copyright Programming 1 Registration System ID amp Numbering Plans PGM 101 Virtual Registration Device ID STA VMEX SIP MAC Address automatic virtual assigned Data Station Number Replace 426 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 create new VMEX Station Number a new or unused station number Replace uncheck replace non VMEX station to VMEX type Station Number a previous used station number should be in disconnected or Out Of Service state you can force a station Out Of Service state in PGM 103 Click STA check SVC and save Replace check H Disconnected I Wm HEN Disconnected l aani 2 Unregister VMEX SIP Data PGM 215 check a station or stations and implement delete butt
46. Virtual SIP should be checked Beers wee veraces LA wat avant GE se AR PS ISA Genf veg b s get Sa f you wast to use wt MAC Si rerz when you register Gavice Pt Fee pe f pease check ha check box in tort of MAC Ad was input box 2 Replace a normal SIP CO lines to VCOL the slot should be in Out Of Service state you can force that to Out Of Service state in PGM 103 by click CO Gateway check SVC and save 432 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 SIP Data PGM 133 set Virtual SIP Channel Mode to Yes state is set to activated automatically RTP Diversion Method is automatically set to Non Recursing CO VoIP Mode in PGM 141 is set to SIP Only automatically c f RTP Diversion Method was added in PGM 133 But currently it is only for VCOL If we do not need this visible then will remove or make this display only later set DTMF Type in PGM 133 to one of Outband signaling Outband signaling only not INBAND and 2833 Li Synem servew 3 Order Sea SVC ve Logical Nam Type DEV ID MAC Address WP Address MET ARP flegistar Version CPU Remark 1 8 YOR lio _ feoanaataoaso ia2 jeb 18084 LO on Sing Si EA eent LE wo e m me t T mami dr ee Cr oT iew n 2 ia fos esoe Www IL OFF swat m MESRI Find Snow ridden tem re CO G
47. as required Conditions 1 Howler Tone is sent after a period of about 30 seconds of error tone 2 Lock out occurs when howler tone starts Programming STATION 1 Howling Tone To Stn PGM 111 Btn 5 Related Features e Intercom Lock Out Hardware 393 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 7 3 SLT MESSAGE WAIT INDICATION Description All SLT devices will receive a Stutter dial tone as an audible Message Wait Indication In addition industry standard Message Waiting telephones may be connected to the system Software will cause the lamp to flash when a messaging is waiting Operation System The system switches the 90 VDC lamp On and Off for assigned SLTs indicating a Message Wait Conditions 1 The system switches a 90 VDC supply On and Off to flash the SLT s neon lamp 2 Although the SLT Battery Feed is removed during the 90 VDC On cycle the system will recognize an SLT Off hook event 3 The SLT must incorporate a 90 VDC neon lamp that is connected directly across the tip and ring of the voice network Programming STATION 1 Station Type PGM 110 Btn 1 Related Features e Message Wait Call Back Hardware e SLT w 90 VDC Neon lamp 394 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 7 4 SLT NAME ENTRY Description A SLT user has the capability to program the user name so that a calling user with an LCD can see the name
48. e Message Retrieval e Remote Message Retrieval e Message Retrieval Options 217 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Hardware e VSF and or VMIM 2 73 3 8 Call Forward from VM Description External users can activate or deactivate Call Forward for their station Pressing 7 while retrieving messages will return the Mailbox Set Forward prompt Operation To activate Call Forward while in the VM 1 Press 7 for Mailbox set forward the Mailbox Set Forward prompt is received 2 Dial 1 and receive the Password Entry prompt Please enter the number to forward to 3 Dial Station Number as follows To forward to another station dial the station number e To forward calls Off net dial 7 and enter station speed number If the station Speed bin is valid the confirmation announcement forwarded to station xxx or forwarded to speed bin number yyyy is played To deactivate Call Forward 1 Press 7 for Mailbox set forward the Mail Box Set Forward prompt is received 2 Dial 2 and receive the Station forwarding is canceled prompt To return to the Main menu 1 Dial 9 and receive the Mailbox Settings prompt Conditions 1 If the user is external the user must begin dialing within and dial subsequent digits within the VSF Inter Digit Timer If not the call is released 2 This Mailbox Set Fo
49. iPECS Phone To assign a Flex button as an ALARM STOP button to terminate the Alarm Signal PGM FLEX 565 SAVE To terminate an Alarm Signal while idle 1 Dial the Flex Numbering Plan code 565 confirmation tone is received and the Alarm Signal is terminated If the alarm condition is cleared the system will automatically rearm the alarm monitoring Or 1 Press the ALARM STOP button Conditions 1 The Alarm contacts must be dry no voltage or current source connected 2 Only an iPECS Phone may be assigned to receive Alarm Door Bell signals 3 An iPECS Phone with LCD assigned to receive Alarm Door Bell signals will show ALARM or DOOR BELL as appropriate Programming SYSTEM 1 Alarm Enable PGM 163 Btn 1 2 Alarm Contact Tvpe PGM 163 Btn 2 3 Alarm Doorbell Mode PGM 163 Btn 3 4 Alarm Signal Mode PGM 163 Btn 4 STATION 1 Alarm Door Bell Attribute PGM 113 Btn 8 Related Features e Door Open iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Hardware e iPECS Phone External contact connected to Alarm input of MFIM refer to iPECS Hardware Description amp Installation Manual iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 3 AUTHORIZATION CODES PASSWORD Description Authorization Codes provide a means to control access to Off Premise Call Forward Walking COS or DISA and may be required for outgoing CO IP
50. not reported to the far end user Calling Line Identification Restriction and Connected Line Identification Restriction may be enabled in the system database or by CLIR and COLR Flex buttons 302 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation System Operation of this feature is automatic iPECS Phone To program CLIR button 1 PGM FLEX PGM 81 SAVE To program COLR button 1 PGM FLEX PGM 82 SAVE To activate CLIR or COLR before placing or answering an ISDN call 1 Press the CLIR or COLR Flex button Conditions 1 This feature may not be available in the specific ISDN service area or may be a subscription service Programming STATION 1 CLIP LCD Display PGM 114 Btn 1 2 COLP LCD Display PGM 114 Btn 2 CO IP 1 COLP Table Index PGM 143 Btn 1 2 Type of Calling Number PGM 143 Btn 4 ISDN ICLID 1 CLIP Print to Serial Port PGM 200 Btn 2 Related Features Hardware e ISDN gateway Module 4 15 3 Keypad Facility Description The ISDN Keypad Facility Information Element IE may enable the user to activate certain ISDN services e g Off Net Forward To access this facility the station must be enabled and have a Flex button for KEYPAD FACILITY When activated the digits dialed by a user are sent in the Keypad Facility IE instead of the Called Party Number IE 303 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Ope
51. rang for 2 minutes and 3 seconds STA CO TIME START DIAL CLI CPN COST ACCOUNT DIAL CLI CPN NUM II NUM 1 CODE 101 02 00 00 15 05 02 09 35 R100 RING 00 49 e Incoming call on CO Line 02 on May 15 2002 at 9 35 am forward from station 101 to station 100 and rang for 49 seconds STA CO TIME START DIAL CLI CPN COST ACCOUNT DIAL CLI CPN NUM II NUM 1 CODE 174 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 104 05 00 00 16 05 02 11 06 G621 RING 01 32 e Incoming call on CO Line 05 on May 16 2002 at 11 06 am routed to station 104 of Station Group 620 and rang for 1 minute and 49 seconds STA CO TIME START DIAL CLI CPN COST ACCOUNT DIAL CLI CPN NUM II NUM 1 CODE 621 17 00 00 16 05 02 14 03 G621 RING 00 39 e Incoming call on CO Line 17 on May 16 2002 at 2 03 pm routed to Station Group 621 and rang for 39 seconds STA CO TIME START DIAL CL CPN COST ACCOUNT DIAL CLI CPN NUM II NUM 1 CODE 100 01 03 32 16 05 02 15 30 H100 03 02 e Call on CO Line 1 on May 16 2002 at 3 30 pm placed on hold by station 100 for 3 minutes and 2 seconds had total duration of 3 minutes and 32 seconds STA CO TIME START DIAL CLI CPN COST ACCOUNT DIAL CLI CPN NUM II NUM 1 CODE 129 23 00 4 18 05 02 08 40 H100 RING 5 00 33 e Call on CO Line 23 on May 18 2002 at 8 40 am was transferred by station 100 to station 129 was on hold for 33 seconds The output for the Lost Call summary count report is shown in the figure below Lost c
52. 136 183 MAP 3 Flex 1 48 Station 184 231 MAP 4 Flex 1 48 Station 232 279 MAP 5 Flex 1 48 Station 280 327 MAP 6 Flex 1 48 CO 001 048 MAP 7 Flex 1 48 CO 049 096 MAP 8 Flex 1 48 CO 097 144 MAP 9 Flex 1 48 CO 145 192 Programming STATION 1 Station Type PGM 110 Btn 1 2 DSS DLS Map PGM 110 Btn 2 3 Flexible Button Assignment PGM 115 378 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features e Attendant Positions e Station Flexible Buttons Hardware 379 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 12 DISABLE OUTGOING CO IP ACCESS Description The System Attendant can place CO IP lines out of service disabling outgoing calls on the CO IP path This is normally done should an undetected fault interrupt service on a CO IP path Incoming calls continue to be processed normally Operation System Attendant To disable enable Outgoing CO IP access toggle 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 072 the Attendant Station Program code 3 Press the CO button of the line s to be disabled confirmation tone is heard and the status for the selected line s is changed Conditions 1 If the desired CO IP line is in use the System Attendant may still disable the CO IP line The feature will take effect after the desired CO IP line goes to idle 2 Once the line is disabled all Attendant appearances for th
53. 236 iPECS checks the number after 9999 and detects that it is an external number iPECS sends an outgoing Invite A to the Public user Incoming Invite To lt sip 999908920533 tdc se gt From lt sip 70111111 se pgw1 ipt ip tele dk 5060 user phone gt 425 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 9999 is a prefix with 3 to 5 digits that can be chosen freely by the customer When a call is placed from the mobile phone the To header format is 9999 dialed number It does not matter what kind of number the mobile user dials A Outgoing Invite Normal Invite with the same format as if it was LIP 105 who made a call to the Public user Analyzing the called party number When we have removed 9999 from the To header we have to detect what kind of number the remaining digits are Is it an internal number station or group number feature code or external number With feature code mean the codes used for Remote control for Mobile Extension in iPECS described in SE LIC 08056 The calling party number could be check like this 1 Is it a station group number If YES setup a call to that station group If NO continue 2 Is it a feature code If YES enable disable that feature If NO continue 3 If none of the above it is an external number Setup an external call Example of new admin programming Pgm 133 SIP MEX Out band Prefix 1 to 8 digits to define the out band prefix Pgm 133
54. 3 the current announcement is played followed by the Press to record prompt oan A O N 6 Press the SPEED button during playback to erase message Conditions 1 ACD group announcements are recorded in the VSF or VMIM Up to seventy 70 Announcements are available for group announcement recordings Announcements 71 and 72 are reserved for MOH and Multi Language selection announcements respectively 2 The CIQ Message must be recorded in the VMIM VSF 3 When equipped to support multiple languages the Language selection announcement is played prior to a guaranteed announcement 4 To define a guaranteed announcement assign 0 seconds to the 15t announcement control timer Programming STATION GROUPS 1 ACD Group PGM 191 2 ACD ICLID Routing PGM 191 Btn 21 3 CIQ Mention PGM191 Btn 24 21 Related Features e VMIM VSF Auto Attendant e ACD Caller Controlled ICLID Routing e Multiple Language Support Hardware 2 5 3 Auto ACD DND Unavailable Service Description An Agent who does not answer a call offered from an ACD group during the ACD No Answer timer is placed in a No response unavailable status called ACD DND In this state the Agent will not receive ACD calls from the group The status is maintained until the agent manually returns to available status or if the Auto ACD DND Reason code is set to 0 after the ACD DND Wrap timer the Agent returns to available status The Agent On Off Duty code
55. 6 2 55 MULTIPLE LANGUAGE SUPPORT Description With the VSF or VMIM iPECS can support six 6 languages simultaneously Prompts in the desired languages are loaded into the VMIM VSF memory along with the Language Selection prompts To assure the proper language is employed the Language Selection prompts is played when an incoming call is assigned to be answered by a DID DISA Auto Attd or station hunt group announcement The Language Selection prompts are played in multiple phrases one in each of the equipped languages with a request for the caller to input a digit to select the appropriate language The system then employs the defined announcement DID DISA etc recorded for the selected language Operation System System automatically plays the Language Selection prompts and plays prompts in the selected language To record a VMIM VSF Multi Language Selection prompts 1 Press the PGM button Dial 06 the VMIM VSF Record code Dial the VMIM VSF device Sequence number Dial the VMIM VSF Multi Language selection Announcement number 72 a A O N Dial the Language number only required with multi language support The current announcement is played followed by the Press to record prompt 6 Dial f 7 After the beep tone record message 8 Press the SAVE button to stop recording and save the message Conditions 1 The Language Selection prompts must be recorded as announcement n
56. 6 Programming SYSTEM 1 CO Dial Tone Detect PGM 160 Btn 3 Related Features e CO Line Flash e Dial by Name e Display Security e Keypad Facility e LNR Last Number Redial e Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover e Save Number Redial SNR e Speed Dial Pause Insertion e System Speed Dial e Flex Button Direct Speed Dial Assignment Hardware 2 64 4 System Speed Dial Description Commonly dialed numbers can be stored by the System Attendant or by the Administrator in Web Admin for easy access by stations allowed use of System Speed Dial bins With the iPECS Micro iPECS 50 and 100 up to 800 System Speed Dial numbers may be stored With iPECS 300 models up to 3000 System Speed Dial numbers are available With iPECS 600 1200 models up to 6000 12000 System Speed Dial numbers are available Each Speed Dial number can be up to 48 characters in length and may include special instruction codes Special instruction codes available are w as 1 digit Activate Display Security Flash as 1 digit Activate dial tone detect F Insert a pause dialing command not 15t digit Switch from Pulse to DTMF dialing MSG CALLBK Send as ISDN Keypad Facility IE HOLD Insert a Pulse to tone switch over iPECS Phone users may assign a Flex button for One Touch access to a specific System Speed Dial bin 160 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation iPECS Phone To assign a Flex button as a SY
57. 70 2 18 Paging to Networked System Description A Station User can initialize a page announcement to other systems by dialing a pre programmed number or flex button just as if it were a page announcement within the same system Operation 1 Enter the Network Numbering plan code to the Network Numbering Plan Table PGM324 as Net a call in caller system 2 Enter the Network Paging number and select the page type and destination from the Network Feature Code Table PGM325 of the called system 3 Lift the Handset or press the SPEAKER button the System will provides a dial tone 4 Dial the Network Paging number of the other System OR 5 Press the pre programmed NET DSS button containing the Network Paging number of the other System 196 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 The Called party System will receive a digit stream sent by the Calling party it will be i analyzed using the Network Feature Code Table to determine the appropriate destination If the destination is right the Called system will distribute the page announcement to the Stations The NETWORK CO button LED will be extinguished when the Net Page Call is cleared Conditions 1 2 Network Page code must be programmed in the Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 in the Caller System Network Page code and page destination must be programmed in the Network Page Table PGM 325 in the Called s
58. 8 Related Features e Message Wait Call Back Hardware e iPECS Phone 275 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 10 PAGING 3 10 1 Internal External amp All Call Page Description A station which is permitted to access page facilities can connect and transmit voice announcements to any or all of the systems Internal External Page zones Stations are grouped into zones to receive pages to the zone Stations not assigned to any zone will not receive a page including All Call pages A page warning tone if assigned will be provided to the Page Zone s prior to the audio connection The user is allowed to continue the page for the specified Page Time out timer after which the user is disconnected and the Page Zone s is returned to idle The default Page Zone dial codes are as follows iPECS Micro iPECS 100S iPECS 300 iPECS 1200 iPECS 50 iPECS 600 Internal Page Zones 501 510 501 510 501 535 301 400 Internal All Call Page 543 543 543 543 External Page Zones 545 545 546 545 546 545 546 External All Call Page 548 548 548 548 All Call Page 549 549 549 549 iPECS Micro have same default Page Zone dial codes with iPECS 50 except External Page iPECS Micro does not have external port Flexible buttons of an iPECS Phone may be assigned to access a Page Zone as a PAGE ZONE button Operation iPECS Phone To assign a Flex button as a PAGE ZONE button 1 PGM FLEX Page
59. ARP to Slave every one second and Slave can detect Master alive In this case Slave can be deactive LAN1 for protect dual active Programming NUMBERING PLAN LAN2 Master IP Address PGM 102 Btn 16 LAN2 Slave Address PGM 102 Btn 17 CPU Redundancy PGM 161 Btn 20 Change Active MFIM by Power Fail PGM 161 Btn 21 3 IP WATCH timer PGM 181 Btn 14 SYSTEM Related Features 151 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Hardware e Main and back up MFIMs see the iPECS Description and Installation Manual section 4 4 2 152 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 62 REGISTRATION amp FRACTIONAL MODULE TABLES Description Normally local iPECS devices can register with the system only when the Registration Switch 3 Dip switch on the MFIM is On In this state the system will allow any local iPECS device to register providing a convenient plug amp play initial installation After initial installation the Registration Switch is placed in the Off position disabling registration of additional local device To eliminate the potential for unintended device registration particularly where multiple systems exist on the same LAN the system can be programmed to allow local device registration employing MAC addresses Using the defined MAC address registration the system allows devices with matching MAC addresses to register regardless of th
60. CALL PICK UP button Operation iPECS Phone To assign a GROUP CALL PICK UP button 1 PGM FLEX 566 SAVE To Pick up a call ringing at another station 1 Lift the handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Dial 566 the Group Call Pick up feature code Or 1 Press the GROUP CALL PICK UP button SLT To Pick up a call ringing at another station 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 566 the Group Call Pick up code Conditions 1 To pick up a CO IP call the station must have an idle appearance button available 2 When several calls are ringing simultaneously Call Pick up will connect the oldest highest priority call Ringing Line Preference PGM 173 3 Queue callback and Private Line calls are not subject to Call Pick up and such attempts receive error tone 4 Handsfree announced intercom calls cannot be picked up by another station Only ringing intercom calls are subject to Call Pick up 55 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 When a station belongs to multiple groups calls to the group with the lowest number are answered first Programming STATION GROUPS 1 Station Group PGM 190 Btn 1 SVSTEM 1 Ringing Line Preference Prioritv PGM 173 Related Features e Intercom Signaling Mode e Ringing Line Preference e Directed Call Pick Up e Station Groups e Private Line Hardware 2 15 3 Pick Up Group Call Pick Up Description A station can answer
61. COS and is subject to the assigned COS of the Authorization Code The COS associated with the Authorization Code is applied after the code is entered for the next call Operation iPECS Phone To activate Walking COS 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 23 the Walking COS code 3 Dial the station number and Authorization code and System Authorization code or the code index and System Authorization code 4 Place call as normal SLT To activate Walking COS 1 Momentarily press the hook switch 2 Dial 561 the SLT Programming code 3 Dial 23 the Walking COS code 4 Dial the station number and Authorization code and System Authorization code or re the code index and System Authorization code 5 Place call as normal Conditions 1 The Station COS applied for Walking COS is the COS of the station associated with the Authorization code or for a System Authorization code COS1 2 Walking COS applies the COS for only one call Terminating the call returns the station to the assigned Station COS The user may reactivate Walking COS to place another call or use Flash to maintain the Walking COS 3 Use of Authorization codes varies based on the system nation code In some regions particularly the US and UK a System Authorization code may be required for DISA access Entering a Station code on a DISA line will fail in these areas In other regions a System Authorization code can
62. Call Forward Hardware 370 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 8 CALL FORWARD CO IP OFF NET Description The System Attendant can forward incoming CO IP calls to a remote Off Net location Calls are forward via a Speed Dial bin When a call is received the system will automatically place a call using the Speed Dial number dialing the number and connecting the incoming call in an Unsupervised conference Operation System Attendant To activate CO IP Off Net Call Forward 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button Press the FWD button Dial 5 the Off Net Forward feature code Dial CO IP access code to forward the incoming call a A O N Dial the Speed Dial bin to be used to place the outgoing call the LED of any Off Net forwarded CO IP button at the Attendant stations will flutter at a rate of 240 ipm To deactivate CO IP Off Net Call Forward 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the FWD button 3 Dial 5 Off Net Forward code 4 Dial CO IP access Code 5 Dial f Conditions 1 The System Attendant can forward any CO IP line CO IP Group or all CO IP calls using the appropriate CO IP dial access code In addition a Flex button assigned to a CO IP line or group may be forwarded using the Flex button The conditions of the Unsupervised conference feature apply The conditions of the Call Forward Of
63. DELAYED AUTO ATTENDANT 2 27 1 Ring Assigned Case Description An incoming CO IP call can be routed to the VMIM VSF Auto Attendant either immediately upon detection or after a delay of up to 30 seconds This allows other stations assigned immediate ring the opportunity to answer before the call is routed to the Auto Attendant Operation System Operation of this feature is automatic when assigned Conditions 1 When Delayed Auto Attendant Ring is assigned after the delay the call will no longer ring assigned stations and will only ring to the VMIM VSF Auto Attendant 2 If no delay is entered the call will ring to the VMIM VSF Auto Attendant immediately 3 To assign Delayed Attendant ring at least one station or Station Group must be assigned immediate ring 4 Ring is assigned to a VMIM VSF Auto Attendant announcement 01 70 as a station type with a delay from 00 to 30 seconds Programming CO IP 1 CO Station Ring Assignment PGM 144 Related Features e CO IP Ring Assignment Hardware 2 27 2 DISA Incoming Case Russia Only Description In case of DISA incoming call there are two Timers that is related with DISA Delay These timers can be set in PGM 142 Co line Base DISA Answer Timer When DISA incoming call is routed to a system after this time system is answered DISA Delay Timer When system is answered after this time VSF system announcement start to play 82 iPECS LIK Feat
64. Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 40 8 DIGITS Description We can support it more 4 digits for station number Station numbering should not conflict with numbering plan It is consist of prefix digits and add digits Prefix digits can have up to 4 digits and Add digits can have up to 4 digits If you set Prefix digit use ON you should consider it interface with application TAPI and Ez Attendant If you don t have TAPI and Ez Atd that support 8 digits for IPECS LIK system it didn t work Operation System Operation of 8 digits should be programmed in PGM 100 and 238 Conditions 1 PGM 100 B5 Prefix Usage If you set ON It s influenced all admin and operation for interface with 3 Party 2 PGM 238 8 digit tables 1 Prefix digits 81 Add Digits 3 5 digits use ex 81xxx 2 Prefix digits 8 Add Digits 4 5 digits use ex 8xxxx 3 Prefix digits 2345 Add Digits 4 8 digits use ex 2345xxxx Prefix digits cannot be conflicted with other numbering plan Programming 1 Prefix usage ON OFF PGM 100 2 Prefix digits PGM 238 Related Features e Station Numbering Plan Hardware 112 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 41 HEADSET COMPATIBILITY Description An industry standard headset can be connected to an iPECS Phone in place of or in addition to the handset The station is then programmed for Headset operation
65. Features e Direct Inward Dial DID Hardware e ISDN gateway Module 306 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 16 ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES In many cases the ISDN service provider offers enhanced services to which a user may subscribe The iPECS system allows access to these ISDN Supplementary Services implemented under the ETSI regime as described below 4 16 1 ISDN Call Deflection Description When the ISDN Supplementary Service Call Deflection is supported a user can forward incoming calls on the ISDN line directly through the ISDN without the need to establish a connection through the system When Call Deflection is used the system sends a call deflection request message with the telephone number to receive the call to the ISDN The ISDN then sends incoming calls to the desired telephone number In this case the system does not set up a CO line to CO line Unsupervised Conference connection for the call Operation iPECS Phone To activate ISDN Call Deflection to an external number 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button to receive dial tone 2 Press the FWD button 3 Dial Forward condition 1 4 f 4 Press SPEED button and desired bin number 5 Replace the handset return to idle To deactivate ISDN Call Deflection 1 Press flashing FWD button Call Forward will deactivate and the FWD button LED is off Conditions 1
66. For common provisioning for all of CONFTYPE SIP Extensions do not specify MAC address Registration Timer Re Registration Timer Local UDP Port SIP Phone default signaling UDP port Local TCP Port SIP Phone default signaling TCP port Local TLS Port SIP Phone default signaling TLS port Local RTP Port SIP Phone default RTP port start range Proxy Port SIP Server port for SIP Phones MFIM SIP Port number Transport Default signaling method CODEC 1 t priority 5 priority CODEC priority NTP Setting Need for TLS NTP Server Address NTP server IP address NTP Interval Interval NTP Time Zone Time Zone DST Usage Daylight Saving Time DSP Setting Speaker Volume Default volume level of SIP Phone Handset Volume Default volume level of SIP Phone Headset Volume Default volume level of SIP Phone MAX Handset Volume Default volume level of SIP Phone Digit Map Dial Tone Digit Second Dial Tone digit specification in SIP Phone Pause Timer Dial Pause timer in SIP Phone Digit Map Send setup to system numbering plan System Setting Feature Sync ON Do Not Disturb and Call Forward feature OFF synchronization with system when SIP Phone set the call feature in phone side 407 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Save save provisioning for the specified common CONFTYPE or specific SIP Extension with Private MAC View display all of saved provisioning information Cert extract cert data to syst
67. HOLD SAVE button when in an idle state then each Station s In Room Indication LED will illuminate 10 groups can be programmed Each group has at most 20 members excluding Supervisor Operation To program a flexible button as the In Room Indication button 1 Press the TRANS PGN button and the flexible button to be assigned 2 Dial the code TRANS PGM 9 Room NO bin no 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button To Active or Deactivate In Room Indication button 1 Check if Supervisor station is the idle state and In Room Indication button is programmed 2 Press In Room Indication button and press HOLD SAVE button Conditions 1 If Supervisor station is not Idle In Room Indication button does not work 2 If a station press the In Room Indication button but the station is not supervisor an error tone is heard 3 If HOLD SAVE button is not pressed within 5 seconds after In Room Indication button pressed the station goes back to the Idle state Programming SYSTEM 1 In Room Indication PGM 183 Related Features Hardware 124 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 46 IP BRIDGE MODE Description The Phontage and UCS client can automatically bridge the audio for a call to linked pair station When the Phontage or UCS client place a call in the bridged mode the iPECS Phone is connected to the call Operation To use the IP Bridge mode 1 Place a call
68. Help Response button which is required and be connected to the Agent s active call with the microphone muted The Supervisor hears the Agent and connected party and may join the conversation by pressing the MUTE button to activate the microphone Operation Agent iPECS Phone To request Supervisor assistance 1 Press the HELP button SLT 1 Hook flash and dial 574 the Agent Help code 2 Dial the desired ACD Group number Supervisor iPECS Phone To assign a HELP RESPONSE button 1 PGM FLEX 574 Group Number SAVE To respond to a Help request at the Supervisor Phone 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the flashing HELP RESPONSE button the Supervisor is connected to the active Agent call with the microphone muted the MUTE button LED is On 32 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 To converse with the Agent and connected party 1 Press the illuminated MUTE button Conditions 1 The Agent Help request is sent to the lowest numbered available Supervisor station for the associated ACD Group 2 If no Supervisor is available the Agent receives error tone 3 A Warning Tone if enabled will be sent to the Agent as the Supervisor is connected to the conversation 4 Only one active Help request is allowed at a time a second help request will cancel any active help request Programming NUMBERING PLAN 1
69. IP ring 4 Dial Ring Tone selection 1 8 ring tone is received To select the desired ring tone By Co line Base 1 Enter PGM 141 F16 2 Dial desired Ring tone 3 00 is Not used for Co line base 01 12 can be selected To download a Ring tone from the system to an iPECS Phone 1 Press the PGM button Dial 1 for Ring selection Dial 5 for Ring tone download Dial Ring tone storage bin 5 8 Dial Ring tone selection 0 9 tone is received Press the SAVE button oa P WwW NY Conditions 1 To employ one of the system Ring tones it must first be downloaded to a Ring tone storage bin in the iPECS Phone 2 The iPECS Phontage and UCS Client do not have access to the system Ring tones In the iPECS Phontage or UCS Client multiple tones are available and the user may load an wav file for use as a Ring tone 3 Any or all of the ten ring tones stored in the system can be replaced via the iPECS Web Maintenance Programming 95 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features Hardware e iPECS Phone 96 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 33 DND DO NOT DISTURB Description A station which is allowed Do Not Disturb can be placed in DND to block incoming ring for CO IP and Intercom calls transfers and paging announcements Operation iPECS Phone To activate DND 1
70. Inter zone connections are limited to zone maximum total inter zone connection number and maximum inter zone connection number between zones 239 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Zone maximum total inter zone connection number and maximum inter zone connection number can be set from 0 to maximum station capacity The default values of both numbers are O and it means there is no limit to inter zone connections Operation Operation of this feature is automatic based on zone maximum total inter zone connection number and maximum inter zone connection number between zones Conditions 1 2 If zone maximum total inter zone connection number is set to 0 zone total inter zone connection will not be limited If maximum inter zone connection number between zones is set to 0 inter zone connection between such zones will not be limited If zone maximum total inter zone connection number is set to non zero value and current zone total inter zone connection number is more than maximum value the connection will be released error tone will be played and the station related with the connection will display INTER CONN LIMIT OVER on the LCD If maximum inter zone connection number between zones is set to non zero value and current inter zone connection number between zones is more than maximum value the connection will be released error tone will be played and the station related wi
71. LG ERICSSON 2 IPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Revision History ISSUE DATE DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES 1 0 20 Mar 02 Initial Release 1 1 21 Aug 02 General Update 1 2 8 Nov 02 Update for Software version 1 1Bd 2 0 22 Sep 03 Update for release 2 software 2 1 16 Feb 03 Update for European release 2 software 2 2 29 Jul 04 Update for Software version 2 0Ai 2 3 12 Dec 04 Draft for version 3 Draft for 22 Feb 05 Update for iPECS S W Phase 3 3 0As base version 3 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 ISSUE DATE DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES 4 d2 24 Aug 06 Updates for iPECS release 4 software and LG Nortel logo General edits through out Changed formatting header footer etc for unified IPECS Manual appearance CLI based Call Routing for DID added reference to DID Lines in ICLID routing Flexible configuration for up to 600 ports covered in section 1 2 Hunt Group Mailbox referenced mailbox assignments in Station Hunt Groups Multiparty voice conferencing Up to 24 Parties in total added to Multi Party Conference Conference Room Added Conference Room Simplified Message retrieval added to Message Wait Call Back and restructured Muted Ring w Pre Selected Msg added amp restructured Pre amp Custom Display Messages T 38 Fax Relay added IP F
72. LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation System The system will interface with the External AA VM based on database assignments Conditions 1 Selection of SMDI or in band signaling can be alternated using the 274 Virtual Dip switch 2 Only one AA VM Group External VSF VMIM or Feature Server can be defined in the system Multiple definitions may cause erroneous system operation Programming STATION GROUPS 1 Station Group Assignment PGM 190 2 Station Group Attributes PGM 191 TABLES 1 Voice Mail Dialing Table PGM 234 DIP SWITCH 1 Virtual Dip Switch PGM 453 Btn 2 Related Features e AA VM Group e In band DTMF Signaling e Auto Call Recording e Two Way Record e VMIM VSF Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail Hardware e External AA VM system 2 38 4 Voice Mail Box Translation Description Stations can be assigned to employ a Voice mailbox number that is different from the station number When a call is routed to voice mail the system will identify the mailbox as the assigned VM box number in place of the station number The VM box number can be any 4 digit number 0001 to 9999 An entry of 0000 or blank sends the station number to the VM system Operation System Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Conditions 1 VM box translation applies to Feature Server and Adjunct In band and SMDI Voice mail systems 109 iPECS LIK Feature Description
73. Line or LCR access based on configuration of the iPECS database When users dial an Authorization Code that matches an Authorization Code stored in the database the system invokes the Station COS or the COS assigned to Authorization code Each Authorization code has separate Day Night mode COS assignments There are two types of Authorization Codes Station and System A Station Authorization Code is specifically related to a given station and intended for a single user The System Authorization Codes are intended for use by any station in the system The Station Authorization Codes includes the associated station number and the assigned code The structure of the System Authorization code can be set as either or the Authorization table index and the code digits The later allows duplicate codes to be employed using entry of table index to provide a unique identification of the entry The Administrator and Attendants are permitted to assign any Authorization code including codes for another station Normal users may only assign the Station Authorization code for the specific station Operation iPECS Phone To assign a Station Authorization Code 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 33 the Authorization Code Program Code 3 Dial the Station number 4 Dial the Authorization Code 1 to 12 digits 5 Press the SAVE button To enter an Authorization Code when second dial tone is received 1 Dial the station number
74. Local TCP Pon leoo Port 6 Local TLS Port oer Port 7 Local ATP port 23000 Port T8 Proxy Port lbo j Port 3 Transpon uor gt l Ee L ES Preffered Voice CODEC PRIO 10 Ist priority none e n 2nd priority none si 12 Ad prioritv rone sl E D Mthpriorty none gt KNETZI few Fl MI Setting l 15 NTP Server Address Max 32 Chars 16 NTPinteva JE 0 120Hour D NTP Timezone cmr oa0nseouL pes sl 18 OST Usage forr 8 ams 7 DSP Setting 19 Speaker Volume KH l 11 20 Handset Volume e j E HeadSet Volume 1 CONFTYPE select Phone Type Mandatory lt LG Ericsson WIT400H gt Currently MFIM tftp only does not proceed provisioning for WIT400H http only because of different method NOTE But WIT400H follows LIK system s default provisioning by itself automatically lt LG Ericsson LIP8002 LIP88xx gt MFIM proceed provisioning for LIP8002 LIP88xx lt Other 3 4 party SIP Extensions gt Does not proceed provisioning 405 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 Private Mac specify MAC address if provisioning target is only for one specific SIP extension Optional lt For What gt 1 D JO Om FW bh Re Registration Timer this will be useless if SIP Phone Attributes PGM 126 Registration Timer Usage is ON SIP Extension s Local UDP TCP TLS Port number Prox
75. Manual Issue 5 6 Programming STATION 1 Station COS PGM 116 CO IP 1 CO COS PGM 141 Btn 2 SYSTEM 1 DISA COS PGM 166 2 PBX Trunk Access Codes PGM 172 3 LD Digit Count PGM 177 Btn 4 4 LD Digit Code PGM 177 Btn 19 TABLES 1 Toll Restriction PGM 224 2 Authorization Codes Table PGM 227 Related Features e Authorization Codes Password e Class of Service e Direct Inward System Access DISA e Temporary Station COS Lock e Walking COS e Auto Service Mode Control e Day Night Timed Scenario Ring Mode Hardware 2 31 3 Temporary Station COS Lock Description A user or an Attendant can change the Station s Class of Service to COS 7 temporarily preventing unauthorized toll dialing from the station i e lock the station The station is still allowed to place internal calls and Emergency number calls Operation iPECS Phone To activate Temporary COS 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 21 the Temp COS code 3 Press the SAVE button To restore the assigned COS 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 22 the restore COS code 3 Dial Authorization Code station number and code 4 Press the SAVE button 91 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 SLT To activate Temporary COS 1 Momentarily press the hook switch 2 Dial 561 the SLT Programming code 3 Dial 21 the Temp COS code 4 Momentarilv press the hook switch To restor
76. Network each iPECS system maintains control over the devices registered to it The networked systems communicate allowing other networked systems access to resources over the network In addition other features and functions as detailed in the following sections of this manual are available to users in a distributed network environment The iPECS permits remote access to various resources through registered gateway Modules and terminals In addition iPECS will request access to resources of remote systems The user dialed number is analyzed and the call routed according to the Net numbering table Should the main path fail to respond the iPECS routes the call employing the alternative Speed Dial route assigned iPECS supports two 2 standard protocols QSIG over ISDN and H 450 over IP for the basic networking functions and the proprietary iPECS protocol for the advanced networking features QSIG employs ISDN PRI channels only with support for ESTI standards ETS 300 237 238 256 257 260 26 1 36 1 362 363 364 Operation Operation of Distributed Networking is automatic when configured amp defined Conditions 1 To use the networking features the software lock key installation is required Two types of software lock key relate to the networking protocols One is for QSIG based networking protocol and another is for VOIP based networking protocol Each iPECS system has a unique software lock key To get the software lock key contact the
77. Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 The busy station goes to Idle the originator receives a call back ring 4 When the originator answers to the call back ring a new call will be activated to the calling station Conditions 1 Stand alone IP Phone that supports H 450 can activate the Call Completion feature 2 Astation can leave or have only one callback message and a new request will be left message wait indication message on busy station 3 A voice message cannot be left even though the VMIM VSF is installed in a local system 4 When the originator does not answer the call back ring within net timer the call will be cleared 5 There are two modes One is connection mode and the other is connectionless mode This can be selectable at PGM 320 BTN 8 Programming SYSTEM 1 Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 2 Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 3 Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 2 70 2 5 Call Offer Description A busy user on one node is given notification that another call is waiting from another node It is similar to a Camp On function Operation To activate Call Offer 1 Dial a busy station number of another system The caller hears a busy tone 2 Press the CAMP ON button or 7 during hearing a busy tone 3 The busy station receives an off hook muted ring 4 The calling station hears a ring back tone instead of a busy tone To answer the Call Offer 1 Press the flashing CO line button wh
78. PS Ga h A DN Related Features Account Code Auto Service Mode Control Direct Inward Svstem Access DISA CO IP Line Groups CO IP Access Temporarv Station COS Lock Walking COS Call Forward Station User Programming amp Codes Hardware iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 4 AUTO CALL RELEASE Description CO IP or intercom calls except Hands free Answerback will be released automatically if the user does not complete dialing or for intercom calls the called party does not answer after a pre determined time Operation System Auto Call Release of Intercom calls If a station places an intercom call and the called station does not answer in the Intercom Call Release Time the call is terminated and the calling user receives error tone Auto Call Release of CO IP calls If a station seizes an idle CO IP Line and does not dial within the CO IP Call Automatic Release Time the call is terminated and the user will receive error tone Conditions 1 If the Automatic Call Release Timer is set to 0 Auto Call Release is disabled 2 When the handset is used to place a call the user will receive error tone for 30 seconds followed by 30 seconds of Howler tone and the station is placed in a fault mode If on hook dialing is used the station receives error tone for one 1 second and returns to idle automatically Programming STATION 1 Howling Tone to
79. Press the SAVE button To enter a Custom Message 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 053 the Custom Message program code 3 Dial desired Message code 11 20 148 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 Enter the Message contents up to 24 characters 5 Press the SAVE button confirmation tone is received the new Custom Message is stored and the station returns to idle Conditions 1 Only the System Attendant or Administrator can assign the contents of Custom Messages 11 20 2 The alphanumeric characters are displayed as they are entered refer to Station Speed Dial for entry procedures 3 Display Message is cancelled if the user activates DND or Call Forward 4 Custom Text Display Messages and Display Message status are stored in non volatile memory to protect against loss during power failure 5 The calling station must be an iPECS or LG Ericsson digital phone with display to receive the message 6 SLTs are notified of an active Display Message with stutter dial tone iPECS Phones will have a flashing FWD button when there is an active Text Display Message 7 Activating a Text Display Message does not affect normal operation of the station 8 Pre defined Messages 01 to 04 and 06 to 08 permit the user to input auxiliary information such as time date or number 9 The Attendant station can activate a Text Display Messages for other stations However thi
80. Prime Line When the user lifts the handset or presses the SPEAKER button the system will act as if the user had pre selected the button prior to going off hook 2 Selection of another Flex button or Feature button just prior to an off hook event will override the Prime Line assignment 3 SLT can use the Flex Button Feature of Idle Line Selection with a Speed Bin Number 4 When Delayed Prime Line is set the user must wait taking no action until the Prime Line is accessed The user receives ICM dial tone during this period and may dial any valid numbering plan digit s or select a Flex button or feature button 5 If the Prime Line Delay Timer is greater than Dial tone timer the Delayed Prime Line will not activate It will be necessary to reduce the delay timer or extend the Dial tone timer Programming STATION 1 Prime Line setting PGM 113 Btn 7 2 Idle Line Selection PGM 121 SYSTEM 1 Prime Line Delay Timer PGM 182 Btn 6 339 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features e Speakerphone e Intercom Call ICM Call e Station Flexible Buttons Hardware e iPECS Phone 340 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 20 RING TONE DOWNLOAD Description The user can select one of 14 Ring tones so that the iPECS Phone ring can be distinguished from other nearby phones Eight tones are stored in the iPECS Phone permanent memory The first fo
81. Program Codes available each password level 177 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation Detailed operation of Admin access and assigning access authority for each level is given in the iPECS Admin amp Maintenance Manual Conditions 1 Admin Access Authority is defined only in the Web Admin it cannot be defined when using Keyset Admin 2 Admin Access Authority applies to all Admin access whether accessed via an iPECS Phone ISDN or IP channels Programming STATION 1 Admin Access PGM 113 Btn 1 SVSTEM 1 Admin Access Authority Web only 2 System Password PGM 162 Related Features e Keyset Administration e Web Administration Hardware 2 69 3 Web Administration Description The system database is accessed and modified via an iPECS Phone the LAN interface or an ISDN BRI PRI line Both the LAN and ISDN access the system s Web server which delivers the database as a set of Web pages to the user s Web browser Under the proper conditions both also allow for remote access to the system database For remote access with the LAN interface the system must be assigned a remotely accessible IP address The IP address should be fixed either as a public IP address or through a NAPT server with port forwarding The browser should be pointed to the system s IP address and the TCP port assigned in the system database For the ISDN BRI PRI a PPP Point to Point Protocol connec
82. Server Address L P Address Tr Secondary Domain Ip l Max 32 Chars 4 VCOL attributes Everything is same as a normal SIP CO line channel 433 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 in PGM 133 input Proxy Domain and other attributes 5 RTP Connection RTP is Non Recursing by default and it is forced to be vanm ramer varens ORAE O r Feon Address Domain Serer Doman pe r Firewall IP Aggly ON s r Diversion Recursing Recursing r DU Answer Response T assatta a r r P l Proxy Registration Timer isoo r Proxy Server UOP Pon oes l Pon F Prony Server TCP Poa Soe j Poa D Proxy Server TLS Poet kost Boat F fugissien UID Range if Max GOD Envios r DE Type eene RELAY mi r Fall Over Usage ON e 6 DTMF Outband signaling only DTMF Type in PGM 133 is INFO DTMF RELAY and this is called CISCO type 1 vuan manes vunom ANEA me r From Addeess Doman Sever Dep Am aw r Eege Apply Tore S r Diversion Recursing Recursing r DW Answer Response j 183 Ms M r RTP Diversion Method r Virtual SIP Channel Mode Yes m ei Proxy Registration Timer 3200 r Prexy Server UOP Peet Seat Pon F Proxy Server TCP Por East Por f U Prony Server TLS Port SCH Port r Max 80 Ectries r 7 DSP implementation for VCOL same as SIP extension VOIP RTP relay channel wil
83. System Max number of Serial DSS Max number of LSS 18 Each station can have serial DSS usage authority option If disabled serial DSS configuration of the station is initialized and DSS is not installed to that station Programming STATION 1 Serial DSS Usage PGM 111 Btn21 2 Flex Button Assign PGM 115 3 Serial LSS Label Edit PGM 129 Related Features Hardware 361 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 ATTENDANTS 6 1 ACTIVE CPU MFIM DISPLAY Description When the system is equipped for CPU Redundancy the System Attendant can determine and change the active and standby CPU Operation System Attendant To view the active MFIM 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 078 the Attendant Station Program code the active CPU is displayed To Change Standby MFIM to Active MFIM 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 078 the Attendant Station Program code 3 Dial to change standby MFIM to active MFIM Conditions 1 The system must be equipped with and properly programmed PGM 161 for Redundant Processor operation for the Attendant to display or change the active MFIM 2 The System Attendant can assign a Flex button to indicate when the back up MFIM is active When the Flex button is assigned as PGM 078 the LED of the flex button will turn on indicating the back up MFIM is active Programming SYSTEM 1 CPU Redundancy Use PGM 161 Btn 20 Relate
84. Time Date Operation System Attendant To set the system clock 1 Press the PGM button Dial 041 the Attendant Station Program code Dial six 6 digits for the Date MM DD YY or SAVE to skip the Date Dial four 4 digits for the Time HH MM or SAVE to skip the Time setup Press the SAVE button confirmation tone is heard and Attendant station returns to idle status a A Go N To set the system clock through ISDN message 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 046 the Attendant Station Program code 3 Dial 1 to set DATE TIME using ISDN message 4 Press the SAVE button confirmation tone is heard and Attendant station returns to idle status Conditions 1 The time is entered as a 24 hour military clock 24 hour mode 2 If an NTP server is assigned the system will check the time every ten 10 minutes If the system time is more than 10 seconds off of the NTP time the system time is reset This will override the Attendant setting Programming SYSTEM Network Time Date PGM 161 Btn 12 System Attendant PGM 164 Btn 1 System Time PGM 178 Btn 1 System Date PGM 178 Btn 2 DST Enable PGM 178 Btn 3 DST Start amp End Time Web only NTP Active PGM 195 Btn 1 NTP Sever address Web only Std system time local Time Zone Web only OMAN DA PS Go M gt 388 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features
85. UCS Client See Phontage or UCS Client Guide Conditions 1 Voice messages are stored in the VMIM VSF and must be expressly deleted Deleting messages from the soft phone hard drive does not delete the message from the VMIM VSF memory 2 In Admin VSF is used as the single reference for a parameter that applies to both the VSF and the VMIM 3 It is not possible to backup VSF Messages to Phontage PC when Phontage is connected Remotely in R NAPT mode Programming STATION 1 VSF Back up Station PGM 112 Btn 22 2 VSF Back up Delete PGM 112 Btn 23 Related Features e VMIM VSF Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail Hardware e VSF and or VMIM 2 73 3 7 Voice Mailbox Settings Description The user can program the Mailbox settings for their mailbox including a security password and a greeting When a user presses 8 while retrieving messages the Mailbox Setting prompt To edit your greeting press one to edit you password press two To return to main menu press nine is played 216 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation To program Mailbox settings while in the Voice Mailbox 1 Press 8 for Mailbox settings the Mailbox Setting prompt is received for password 1 Dial 7 and receive the Password Entry prompt Please enter your new password and press pound when finished 2 Dial new password 3 Press ff and receive the Ree
86. WAIT amp BROKER CALL Description When SIP Phone receives second call wait user can switch talking to each other There are a few kinds of call wait and according to the type of call wait operation of switching talk is different Operation Receive 2 call 1 In Case of SIP Phone has no Call Wait feature or Call Wait is disabled If caller is from CO line then the call will be rerouted by system setting automatically If caller is from a Station then the caller will hear busy tone During busy tone the user can press for Camp On call or f for Voice Over The SIP Phone user who receives this 2 call will hear notification tone from system The SIP Phone user who receives this 274 can make hold for 1 call talking and switch to 2 call for talking by press HOLD button twice 2 In Case of SIP Phone has Call Wait feature and Call Wait is enabled The 2 call is accepted by the SIP Phone and user who receives this 274 call will hear notification tone from Phone itself The caller from CO or Station will hear ringback tone or coloring The SIP Phone user who receives this 275 can make hold for 1 call talking and switch to 2 4 call for talking by a 3rd party SIP Phone press HOLD button twice b LG Ericsson WIT400H SIP Phone press HOLD button once c LG Ericsson LIP88xx and LIP8002 SIP Phone press Up or Down of Navigation button Hold 1 call and Make 2 9 call 1 SIP Phone
87. a Speed Dial number to permit access from the Dial by Name directory 7 If a Speed Dial number contains a Dial Tone Detect command Flash as the first entry in the bin and dial tone detect is enabled for the CO line the system must detect dial tone before dialing the Speed Dial number Programming STATION 1 Speed Dial Access PGM 112 Btn 8 SYSTEM 1 CO Dial Tone Detect PGM 160 Btn 3 TABLES 1 System Speed Zone PGM 232 Related Features CO Line Flash Dial by Name Display Security Keypad Facility 162 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 e LNR Last Number Redial e Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover e Save Number Redial SNR e Speed Dial Pause Insertion e System Speed Dial e System Speed Zone Groups Hardware 2 64 5 System Speed Zone Groups Description System Speed Dial bins can be divided in to zones or groups iPECS systems have 10 zones available except for the iPECS 600 1200 which has twenty fifty zones To access a Speed Dial bin assigned to a zone the station must be allowed access to the Speed Dial Zone In addition each zone can be assigned to apply COS dialing restrictions to the Speed Dial numbers in the zone When assigned the system will apply the Station and CO IP COS to calls using Speed Dial numbers in a COS enabled zone Operation Refer to System Speed Dial for operation Conditions 1 The conditions of System Speed Dial apply to System Sp
88. a Zone Placing devices into Zones simplifies management allowing definition of common characteristics to the devices within the zone Zone attributes include Nation code Language Page area Time zone GMT or system Holiday ring modes RTP relay RTP Relay group Operation Zone operation is automatic once configured Conditions 1 Zone attributes which may affect ringing such as Holiday and Vacation settings have lower priority than other ring assignments such as Tenancy group ring mode established for DID lines Zone Attributes do not provide adjustment of time for DST It is recommended to assign CO IP lines and stations of a Tenant group in the same Device Zone Wake up time is based on the time displayed in the station s LCD Programming ZONE DATA Device Zone Number PGM436 Web only Device Zone Attributes PGM 437 Web Only Zone Access amp Page Relay PGM 438 Web only Zone Attributes PGM 439 Web only Zone RTP Relay Group PGM 440 Web only Inter zone Attributes PGM 441 Web only Zone Holiday Assignment PGM 444 NOOR WD gt Related Features Centralized Control TNET Hardware 238 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 78 ZONE CALL AND CONNECTION NUMBER LIMIT 2 78 1 Zone Outgoing CO call Number Limit Description Every system has the limited CO lines and all devices are sharing to use CO lines The number of CO lines may be s
89. amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 34 DOOR OPEN Description The iPECS hardware is equipped with relays that activate External Control Contacts The contacts can be assigned to one of several functions including a Door Open Contact When used as a Door Open Contact the contact is connected to a door lock release mechanism When assigned stations receive the Door Bell signal the user may dial the Door Open code to activate the contact iPECS Phone users may assign a Flex button as a DOOR OPEN button Operation iPECS Phone To assign a DOOR OPEN button 1 PGM FLEX Door Open code 1 2 3 or 4 SAVE To activate the relay contact 1 Lift handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Dial Door Open code 1 2 3 or 4 3 Hang up to return to idle Or 1 Lift handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Press the DOOR OPEN button 3 Hang up to return to idle Conditions 1 The number of relay contacts available varies based on the system size Refer to Table 1 2 1 for the number of available contacts 2 The Door Open feature dial code is based on the assigned External Contact as below External Contact 1 1 External Contact 2 2 External Contact 3 3 External Contact 4 ff 4 3 The contacts are rated at 1 amp 24 VDC 4 Astation will receive error tone if not allowed access to Door Open PGM 113 Btn 25 Programming
90. amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming STATION 1 Voice Mail Id PGM 113 Btn 14 STATION GROUPS 1 Station Group Assignment PGM 190 2 Station Group Attributes PGM 191 TABLES 1 Voice Mail Dialing Table PGM 234 Related Features e AA VM Group e SMDI Simplified Msg Desk Interface e Two Way Record e VMIM VSF Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail Hardware 110 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 39 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN Description User access to the iPECS system resources and features is accomplished through feature codes or iPECS Phone buttons The Administrator selects from one of the eight 8 different standard numbering plans and if desired assigns codes for individual functions in the Flexible Numbering Plan The feature codes are defined in the system s Flexible Numbering Plan refer to Appendix section 4 2 of the iPECS Admin and Programming Manual Operation System System implements feature activation based on the Flexible Numbering Plan Conditions 1 Feature codes can be one to three digits in length 2 During programming conflicts in the Numbering Plan are not allowed The existing non conflicting Numbering Plan is used until correctly updated Programming SYSTEM ID 1 System Id PGM 100 Btn 4 NUMBERING 1 Flexible Station Numbering Plan PGM 105 2 Flexible Numbering Plan PGM 106 109 Related Features Hardware 111 iPECS LIK
91. any of the special Speed Dial instructions IMSG CALLBK FLASH display security etc Programming Related Features e Station Speed Dial Hardware e LIP 7016D 7024D 7024LD 8012D 8024D and 8040L Phone 326 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 11 FLEXIBLE LED FLASH RATES Description The flash rates used with the various Flex buttons on the iPECS phone can be adjusted on a system wide basis to meet the customer s needs Up to 29 different functions can be assigned any one of 15 different flash rates Operation System System implements flash rates automatically based on database entries Conditions 1 Available Flash rates and functions which can be assigned are given in the iPECS Admin amp Programming Manual Programming SYSTEM 1 Button LED Flash Rates PGM 170 Btn 1 29 Related Features Hardware e iPECS Phone 327 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 12 GROUP LISTENING Description All iPECS Phones have a built in speaker If allowed users may employ the speaker to monitor a Call while using the handset to converse with the outside party This enables a group of people in the room to listen to both parties in the conversation Operation iPECS Phone While on a call using the handset 1 Press the SPEAKER button speaker activates the speakerphone microphone will be muted while the handset is
92. because of so often updated address by NAT mapping implementation Resolution 1 Enable the Keep Alive option for the SIP Station s that are on NAT environment Implementation 1 MFIM will send OPTIONS message so often in 30 seconds to assist to maintain the address of SIP Phone s WAN Resolution 2 set static NAT address mapping by port forwarding For example 1 to 1 static NAT address assignment by port forwarding in NAT switch Implementation 2 SIP Phone s WAN address will not be changed 1 For Voice and Video RTP Data Encryption To implement SRTP VOIM channel is required for SRTP packet relay You should equipped LIK VOIP G W Usage for example LG Ericsson SIP Phone SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 SRTP Usage ON SIP Phone Self Programming Phone s Web Programming SRTP Usage ON Encryption Key Method for example LG Ericsson SIP Phone SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 15t CRYPTO select one of listed SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 2d CRYPTO select one of listed SIP Phone Self Programming Phone s Web Programming 15t CRYPTO select one of listed SIP Phone Self Programming Phone s Web Programming 274 CRYPTO select one of listed if the SIP Phone support 20d CRYPTO option For other 34 party SIP Phone you need to install SRTP Encryption Method on that Phone at first More technical information may be require
93. cannot be the VMIM VSF group Programming CO IP 1 CO Preset Forward Forward timer PGM 147 Btn 1 2 CO Preset Forward Ring Table Index PGM 147 Btn 2 3 CO Preset Forward VMID PGM 147 Btn 3 ISDN amp ICLID 1 ICLID Ring Assignment Table PGM 204 Related Features e Call Forward e ICLID Call Routing Hardware 286 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 5 CO IP RING ASSIGNMENT Description Each station in the system can be programmed to provide an audible signal when the system detects an incoming call on specified CO IP lines Separate ring assignments are made for Day Night and Timed Ring operation mode In addition the audible signal at the station can be delayed by 1 to 9 ring cycles allowing other stations to answer the call first Operation System Operation of this feature is automatic Conditions 1 Separate assignments are made for stations to ring in the Day Night and or Timed Ring mode 2 Audible alerting for an incoming VoIP call is based only on the derived IP Address 3 A busy station receives muted ring or Call Waiting tones as appropriate for the station s Off hook ring assignment 4 The system Ring mode can be selected manually or automatically In the Automatic mode Day Night selection is determined based on the Automatic Ring Mode Selection table The Attendant has manual control over the Ring mode selection 5 The LCD of the Attendant stati
94. circuitry used to support trans coding converting codecs for incoming VoIP calls to devices such as the MFIM VoIP channels the VSF channels and the Feature Server which have no built in codec The VOIMs will trans code the incoming voice codec g 711 g 723 g 729 to the system codec and reverse the process for the outgoing packets When the external VoIP connection can only support g 729 and the system codec is g 723 the DSP must implement a complex trans coding operation which requires 2 DSP channels In all other cases trans coding only requires a single channel per call Remote IP Phone 3 d Party IP Phone Operation System System flow with trans coding Conditions 1 The system codec toward the VOIM can be changed anytime within an IP call 2 The VOIM DSP can generate and detect in band DTMF and Call Progress tones in support of DISA functionality 3 For complex trans coding g 723 g 729 the VOIM DSP will require 2 channels 4 If there are no available channels when trans coding is required the VOIM gateway will release call control Programming Related Features e System Networking 128 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 e Remote Device Zone Management Hardware e VOIMB8 or VOIM24 129 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 50 LNR LAST NUMBER REDIAL Description The last number dialed is stored up to 48
95. completed adding parties momentarily press hook switch twice in 2 seconds all parties are connected Conditions 1 2 The CONF button remains illuminated at the initiators phone for the duration of the conference There is no limit on the number of 3 way conferences the system will support with iPECS Phones With the MCIM the system can support conferences of more than 3 parties Each MCIM supports 32 conference channels with the g 711 or g 729 codec or 24 with the g 723 codec and can support multiple conferences with a total maximum number of 32 or 24 users If all MCIM channels are busy when a request for a channel is received the user will receive error tone and the display will indicate that no Conference channels are available If the system receives a disconnect signal and no internal parties remain in the conference the conference is terminated and all parties are disconnected If an internal party is still connected when a disconnect signal is received the connection to remaining parties is maintained The normal Hold Recall process is applied to a conference on hold using the Unsupervised Conference recall Timer for recall timing If while setting up a conference system error tone is received the initiator must press the CONF button SLT must hook flash to regain Intercom dial tone Astation that is busy in DND or other non idle state cannot be added to a conference The MCIM is also emp
96. digit without ending by 1XxXX 2xxx 3xxx extension numbering you can specify other 2 or 3 or 4 or more digits starting with a specific prefix digit or digits xxi xxx xxxx dial the other 2 3 or 4 digits and press to send xxxx dial the other more than 4 digits and press ff to send Digit Map for 2nd Dial Tone Play self dial tone by SIP Phone Example in case of LIP8002 88xx SIP Phone type 9 9 is CO access code in the first CO group System MFIM Programming 1 Registration 1 2 A SIP Phone will be registered as an Extension of LIK system Check Extension Number System ID amp Numbering Plans Flexible Station Number 105 You can use an Extension Number that is not assigned by other Extension or an empty Number As example below you can use 1050 because it is not yet assigned by other Extension or 1051 because it is unused and empty number 1050 3 Station Number IP Address MAC Address New Station Number 1050 Just check f extension number is avaiable Or you can change or arange numbers to get a new extension number you wish to use by new reaisteration Input Station User Login Table 443 ID Mandatorv An unique string or Extension Number This should be same as SIP Phone s Authorization ID value Password Optional A string If you want to make authentication be implemented when user
97. digits in the station s Last Number Redial buffer The user may request the system redial the last dialed number without the need to dial the number For iPECS Phones with displays the last 10 numbers are stored in the LNR buffer The user may view the numbers using the VOL UP VOL DOWN button and select the number to dial from the list Operation iPECS Phone To use Last Number Redial using the Redial button 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the REDIAL button 3 Press the VOL UP VOL DOWN button to highlight the desired number 4 Press SAVE or REDIAL to dial the number highlighted To use Last Number Redial using the LIP 8000 series soft buttons 1 Press the DIR soft button Press the SPEED soft button Dial Use the Navigation button to select the desired number Press the HOLD SAVE button to place the call ak WON SLT To use Last Number Redial 1 Liftthe handset 2 Dial 552 the Last Number Redial code Conditions 1 For iPECS Phones with display the redial buffer will store duplicate numbers unless dialed consecutivelv 2 When the CO IP line used for the original call is busv the svstem will select an idle line from the same CO IP line Group to place the call 3 Using Last Number Redial will cancel Automatic Called Number Redial if active 4 TheLNR buffer is not stored in non volatile memorv and is erased if power to the svstem is lost
98. does not applied with this feature 4 This feature is applied not only Station Manual Call Forward but also Preset Call Forward PGM120 It is recommended hunt group is set last call profile destination Call Profile timer can be set from 10 sec to 60 sec 7 First Call Profile timer is always 0 sec regardless of saved value A user can confirm this in station web admin Station ICR Overview 8 Call Profile timer can be set from 10 sec to 60 sec oO on Programming STATION 1 Call Forward PGM 111 Btn 2 2 Station Call Forward No Answer Timer PGM 123 Btn 1 SYSTEM 1 System Call Forward No Answer Timer PGM 181 Btn 1 332 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features e Call Forward e Station ICR Hardware e iPECS Phone 333 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 15 INTERCOM SIGNALING MODE Description Each iPECS Phone can select the signaling mode used for incoming ICM calls while the station is idle There are three signaling modes available H Call announcing with Handsfree answerback When an ICM call is received the user receives splash tone followed by the ICM caller s voice The user may respond to the caller without the need to Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button P Call announcing with Privacy When an ICM call is received the user receives splash tone followed by the IC
99. each entry unique The system will use the lowest matching entry 132 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 When Direct CO LCR is used on an ISDN line an ISDN information message with the Called party Info Element which includes only the numbering plan and numbering type is sent to the ISDN to maintain the ISDN connection while the user finishes dialing and the system modifies the digits For Direct CO LCR the number of digits for the LDT Table should be programmed considering the dial tone time out of the network Since a CO IP path is connected Direct CO LCR does not support the Alternative DMT index which allows the system to select a second or alternative CO IP path to place the call Ifthe LCR CO group is not assigned the system will not seize a CO line call and make internal call If the LCR CO group is assigned as the unused group the system it will seize a CO line according to the station attributes Programming TABLES 1 LCR Assignment PGM 220 2 LCRLDT Table PGM 221 3 LCR DMT Table PGM 222 4 LCR Table Initialization PGM 223 Related Features CO IP Access CO IP Line Groups ISDN Integrated Service Digital Network Station Flexible Buttons Hardware 133 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 52 LINKED STATION PAIRS Description A station can be logically linked to a primary station so that
100. entry will be added This value will be 15 Related Features Hardware 2 73 7 Administrator Mailbox Description This feature provides a mailbox that has administrative interface via telephone commands to perform common tasks associated with the VM In addition administrator mailboxes may be used to record a broadcast message which is delivered to all mailboxes in a same tenancy group 224 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation Stations programming will have a field to mark the mailbox with administrative options If a mailbox is marked as an administrator the main prompt will offer to access administrative options press six Main Menu to access administrative options press six After pressing 6 the options that can be performed from the mailbox are Administrator Mailbox To add a mailbox press 1 To delete a mailbox press 2 To reset a mailbox password press 3 To record a mailbox greeting press 4 To record a broadcast message press 5 To record a mailbox name press 6 e Add mailbox 1 Please enter the mailbox number Enter COS 1 5 Press 1 to confirm or to cancel and go back to administration main When confirmed the VMIB Access is set ON Station Attribute PGM 113 e Delete mailbox 2 Please enter the mailbox number Press 1 to confirm or to cancel and go back to administration main When confirmed the VMIB Access is set OFF
101. follow the terminal replacement procedure outlined in section 1 of the iPECS Series Admin amp Maintenance Manual Programming TABLES 1 Station IP Address PGM 103 Btn 2 Related Features Hardware e iPECS Phone 349 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 26 STATION USER PROGRAMMING amp CODES Description iPECS Phone users can program an array of functions and features access status information and assign special features codes to Flex buttons The Station User Program Codes used for these purposes are fixed as listed below Code 10 11x 12x 13 14x 15x 19 21 22 23 24 25 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 41 42 51 52 53 54 57 61 62 67 Description Enblock Dial Intercom Differential Ring CO IP Differential Ring ICM Signaling Mode Call Coverage Attribute Station Ring Download Ear Mic Headset Knock down Station COS Restore Station COS Walking COS ICR Scenario LIP Phone Statistics Station Msg Wait Retrieve CLI IP Msg Wait Retrieve Register Authorization Code DID Call Wait Exec Sec MWI Send SMS message Register Mobile Extension Activate Mobile Extension Register Mobile Ext CLI Set Wake Up Time Erase Wake Up Time Custom Pre selected Msg Register Custom Msg 00 Create Conference Room Delete Conference Room Call Log Display button Headset Speakerphone mode Select Headset Ring type Call Coverage button Entries 1 8 1 8 1 H 2
102. from the Phontage or UCS client The Phontage or UCS client must be in the Bridged mode 2 The call must be connected by lifting the handset of the linked iPECS Phone Conditions 1 The Phontage or UCS client must be used locally to the bridged iPECS Phone 2 Bridged operation must be selected at the Phontage or UCS client 3 The Phontage or UCS Phone must be linked to the associated iPECS Phone 4 Bridging is not available from the iPECS Phone to the Phontage or UCS client Programming Related Features e Linked Station Pairs Hardware 125 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 47 IP SYSTEM DECT Description iPECS supports office building mobility employing Digital European Cordless Technology DECT LG Ericsson s DECT Base stations GDC 400B connect to the Wireless Telephone Interface Module WTIM The WTIM manages up to eight 8 base stations and up to 3 WTIMs may be linked to provide a DECT coverage zone with transparent handover Within the Zone DECT handsets GDC 400H can roam and maintain an uninterrupted communications link to iPECS features and resources through the base station to the WTIM Additional zones can be created to the maximum number of WTIMs allowed for the system see Table 1 2 1 For further information on installation and operation of the IP System DECT solution refer to the IP System DECT Manual Operation DECT operation is automatic when configur
103. goes on hook the active call is disconnected and the held call recalls to the SLT 391 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 During a Camp On Broker Call if the active party disconnects from the SLT the SLT user receives error tone The SLT user may momentarily press the hook switch to retrieve the held party or go on hook and receive recall 6 If the SLT user presses the hook switch twice in less than 2 seconds a 3 way conference is established 7 If after a hook switch Flash the user takes no action for the dial tone timer the SLT will receive error tone If the SLT goes to an on hook state the SLT will receive recall ring automatically Programming Related Features e Message Wait Call Back e Call Waiting Camp On e Exclusive Hold e Call Transfer e Conference Hardware 392 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 7 2 HOWLER TONE Description When an SLT station goes off hook and does not initiate dialing in the Dial tone timer duration delays dialing between digits in excess of the inter digit time or stays off hook at the completion of activating a feature or program the station will receive howler tone as an error indication and the call attempt will be abandoned In order to complete the call the user must return to the on hook state and restart the call Operation System The system will deliver howler tone automatically
104. iPECS Phone To login 1 Dial 572 the ACD Supervisor Login code or press the Flex button 2 Dial the ACD group number 3 Dial supervisor Id code 0000 9999 To Logout 1 Dial 573 the ACD Supervisor Logout code or press the Logout Flex button 2 Dial the ACD group number 3 Dial supervisor Id code 0000 9999 Conditions 1 The system will output a Login Logout message when a Supervisor logs in or out 2 The Supervisor Id can be any 4 digit number 0000 9999 3 iPECS system does not verify the Supervisor Id codes other than requiring four digits are entered 4 Any Agent Id may be used to login through stations not assigned as a Hot Desk 5 The ACD Supervisor can have an ACD Group Status button for each group to indicate Group activity 31 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming NUMBERING PLAN 1 Supervisor Login code PGM 107 Btn 3 2 Supervisor Logout code PGM 107 Btn 4 STATION GROUPS 1 ACD Groups PGM191 2 ACD Group Supervisor PGM 191 Btn 18 Related Features e Automatic Call Distribution e Hot Desk Hardware e iPECS Phone 2 5 11 2 Supervisor Help Response Description An Agent may request assistance from a Supervisor using the ACD Group Help Code default 574 or HELP button The Supervisor is then notified of the Help request in the iPECS Phone display and a flashing HELP RESPONSE button The Supervisor can respond using the
105. instead of the station number Operation SLT To register the name at the SLT 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 561 the SLT Programming code confirmation tone is heard 3 Dial 74 the SLT Name Program Code 4 Enter name refer to Station Speed Dial Alphanumeric Chart 5 Momentarily depress the hook switch receive confirmation tone To delete the name at the SLT 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 561 the SLT Programming code confirmation tone is heard 3 Dial 74 the SLT Name Program Code 4 Momentarily depress the hook switch receive confirmation tone Conditions Programming Related Features e Dial by Name e Station Speed Dial Hardware 395 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 7 5 TRANSFER CLI TO SLT Description A SLT phone can be received CLI from internal caller instead of station number by programming when it s transferring Operation SLT To transfer to SLT when it s CO call 1 An User answers a call from CO with CLI 2 The User is transferring to another SLT 3 The SLT can see CLI of CO instead of station number Conditions 1 If this function works well the system should be set ORI in ADM 114 B18 Programming STATION 1 Transfer CLI to SLT PGM 114 Btn 18 Related Features Hardware 396 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 7 6 SLT FLASH MODE Description SL
106. of DND station is flashing Programming SYSTEM 1 Networking Supplementary Attribute PGM 321 2 TCP UDP Port Assign BTN 2 3 3 BLF manager IP Address Assign BTN 4 With BLF manger 4 Duration of BLF Status BTN 5 5 Networking Supplementary Attribute PGM 324 6 DEST MFIM IP Address BTN 6 Without BLF manager 7 DEST MFIM IP Port BTN 7 Without BLF manager Application e BLF Manager software 2 70 2 15 Do Not Disturb DND Description A call to a station in DND mode can be denied though it is arrived from a station of other systems The calling party will be heard a busy tone Operation 1 Go to DND mode at a station 2 From a station of other system dial the station number in DND mode The caller hears a busy tone with LCD display through the network The DND station does not receive any ring signal 194 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Conditions 1 When a station is in DND mode the NET DSS of DND station is flashing if BLF manager is activated Programming 2 70 2 16 CAS Attendant Call Description The attendant call from any node can be routed to the centralized attendant This call will be queued when all centralized attendants are busy Operation 1 Assign Net DSS to the attendant except system attendant in PGM 164 2 System attendant press ATD DND button 3 Dial attendant code at any station in the system then the call will be routed to t
107. off hook Conditions 1 While using the speakerphone lifting the handset will turn off the speakerphone To activate Group Listening the SPEAKER button must be pressed while the handset is off hook 2 While in Group Listening Mode pressing the MUTE button will cause the TX path from the handset to be muted However the distant end is still heard over both the handset receiver and the station speaker 3 If full soeakerphone operation is desired and available while in Group Listening Mode simply place the handset on hook Programming STATION 1 Group Listening PGM 113 Btn 3 Related Features e Speakerphone e Mute Hardware e iPECS Phone 328 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 13 STATION INDIVIDUAL CALL ROUTING ICR Description Station ICR is an extension of Call Forward where the user establishes a routing scenario Each of the ten scenarios defines rules to route incoming calls based on Time Day of week Date and Caller ID to a destination defined by the User Each scenario is assigned a priority of 0 to 9 When an incoming call is received at the station the System will search the ICR scenarios entered by the User then the call will routed according to the destination in the highest priority matching scenario Operation iPECS Phone To create a scenario 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 24 the ICR menu or log on to the Station Web portal 3 Selec
108. or P mode 1 Press the MSG CALLBK button confirmation tone received 2 Hang up Message Wait activated To leave a Message Wait while receiving DND tone 1 Press the MSG CALLBK button confirmation tone received 2 Hang up Message Wait activated To leave a Call Back queue for a station while receiving busy 1 Press the MSG CALLBK button the user receives confirmation tone 2 Hang up return to idle To respond to a Call back recall when the busy station is available the system calls back 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Previously busy station is called To retrieve Station Messages Waiting 1 Press MSG CALLBK button Either the message contents summary will be shown as below or the Station Messages Waiting will be listed see step 3 below STCL VS VMFS MS 001 001 005 006 001 004 2 Dial 1 to select ST Station Message Wait 1 ST Station Message Wait 2 CL CLI Message Wait 3 VS VMIM VSF Message Wait 4 VM commercial Voice Mail P FS Feature server 6 MS SMS message wait 3 Press the VOL UP VOL DOWN button to scroll through the Station Messages L I To return a call for the current Station Message 1 Press the SAVE button To delete the first Message Wait from the list 1 Press button the list is updated removing the first station number in the list
109. parameter that applies to both the VSF and the VMIM 5 If you set auto save next message ON it s saved automatically after hearing the new message Programming SYSTEM 1 AUTO SAVE NEXT MSG PGM 161 Btn 24 11 Related Features e Message Retrieval e Remote Message Retrieval e Voice Mailbox Settings e Class of Service Hardware e VSF and or VMIM 2 73 3 5 E Mail Notification Description With the VSF or VMIM the system stores the voice message and sends an e mail to the e mail address associated with the station as notification of the new e mail The voice message can be attached to the e mail as a wav file 214 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation System System automatically sends e mail to notify user of new voice message Conditions 1 The voice message is stored in the VMIM VSF as well as being attached to the e mail The voice message must be expressly deleted from the VMIM VSF even if the e mail is deleted The e mail is sent to the address assigned for the station with the sender address defined for the VMIM VSF Note the latter is required as many e mail servers will reject anonymous e mails The e mail address for the VMIM VSF and the station is defined under the Web Admin In Admin VSF is used as the single reference for a parameter that applies to both the VSF and the VMIM The Voice message can be attached to the e mail n
110. remove SIP Packet Trace ts fsipm Jl add tr fsipm remove remove all of Trace trall H remove all type of trace td remove all of devices Trace Direction pv II to view trace direction ps to set trace direction Conditions Programming Related Features Hardware 421 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 15 DSS BLF BUSY LAMP FIELD Description BLF feature is supported with LG SIP Phone SIP 88xx Operation To set DSS BLF feature in SIP 88xx 1 Enter the SIP 88xx Web administration 2 Enter the Button Assignment menu 3 Select DSS BLF and set the BLF number 4 Press CHANGE button To call directly using DSS BLF button 1 Press the DSS BLF 1003 button that you call to directly 2 The LED of button 1003 will blink 3 If station 1003 answers the call the LED of DSS BLF will be on To pick up call for DSS BLF button 1 The LED of DSS BLF 1003 will blink while station 1003 is receiving call 2 By pressing DSS BLF 1003 call will be picked up Conditions 1 DSS BLF can just show 3 status Idle LED off Ringing LED blink and Busy LED on 2 It just show the status related with call For DND and other features the LED will be off Programming Related Features Hardware e None 422 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 16 SIP VIDEO CALL Description Vi
111. selection 4 WAKE UP TIME select 1 2 as below 1 SET WAKE UP TIME 2 WAKE UP DISABLE Next top level Menu selection 5 MESSAGE 6 HEADSET Under selection 5 MESSAGE select 1 2 as below 1 SET PRE CUST MSG 2 PGM CUSTOM MSG 3 ACTIVE CONF ROOM 4 DEACTIVE CONF ROOM 5 MONITOR CONF_GROUP 1 SET PRE CUST MSG der selection 6 HEADSET select 1 2 as below 1 HEADSET OR SPK MODE 2 HEADSET RING MODE Next top level Menu selection 7 SUPPLEMENTARY SYSTEM U J 353 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Under selection 7 SUPPLEMENTARY select 0 9 as below 1 LCD DISPLAY LANGUAGE 2 MFIM E VERSION 3 BGM 4 REGISTER STA NAME 5 DISP PHONE IP ADDR 6 CHANGE PHONE IP ADDR 7 DISP MAC ADDR 8 CHANGE MODE 9 STA MSG WAIT RETR DISP ADD ON PACKAGE Under selection SYSTEM access Admin HI ENTER ADMIN 7 FORCED FWD TO DEST 8 REGISTER BLUETOOTH 9 BLUETOOTH USAGE 0 HOTDESK LOGIN HOTDESK LOGOUT iPECS Phone To assign a Station User Program Code to a Flex button 1 Press the PGM button the Station User Program Menu is displayed Operation 2 Press the desired Flex button
112. the Unsupervised Conference state To reenter the Unsupervised conference 1 Press the flashing CONF button Conf Party To extend the Unsupervised Conference from a connected party 1 Dial 2 Dial the Timer extension multiplier 1 9 Conditions 1 The Unsupervised Conference Timer also applies to an external call placed by a DISA user 2 An Unsupervised conference will be terminated if the system receives a disconnect signal or the Unsupervised Conference Timer expires 3 An Unsupervised Conference will not recall the user 74 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming NUMBERING 1 Unsupervised Conference Timer Extension Code PGM 109 Btn 3 STATION 1 Off Net Forward PGM 111 Btn 14 SYSTEM 1 CO to CO UC Time Extension PGM 160 Btn 12 2 Unsupervised Conference Timer PGM 182 Btn 5 Related Features e Direct Inward System Access DISA e Multi Partv Voice Conference Hardware e iPECS Phone to establish Unsupervised Conference e MCIM required to support conferences with more than 3 parties 2 23 4 Conference Group Description Stations and external contacts can be arranged in groups so that a user may create a conference with all members of the group through a single call Each conference group can have up to 32 members that can be a station or an external telephone number Conference groups are assigned in the iPECS User Portal Station Web Admin by ass
113. the Station Web Admin with the proper password Authentication code 5 If there are insufficient MCIM channels available when initiating the conference group call the initiator receives error tone 6 Two way record can be used to record the Conference Group call Programming Related Features e Multi Partv Voice Conference e Conference Room e System Admin Programming Hardware e MCIM 2 23 5 Conference Member VIEW amp DELETE in Add_On_Conference Description In Add_On_Conference Conference supervisor can see the conference member and remove the member from conference Operation 1 Conference supervisor press VIEW soft button in conference 2 LCD displays the first member If member is a station STA XXX display If member is a co line telephone number of caller called party in the co line display 3 Conference supervisor can see other members by pressing Volume up down button Next member if Volume down button previous member if Volume up button 4 If press DELETE soft button the current member will be removed from conference 77 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 If press BACK soft button conference supervisor will be back to normal conference state LCD of supervisor in conference CONFERENCE 09 SEP 10 03 32 am CONF VIEW MUTE Press VIEW soft button MEMBER 01 STA 101 BACK DELETE Press VOLUME U
114. the central MFIM 2 In TNET Centralized Miscellaneous functions Relay support MOH BGM Alarms and External Page are not supported but all terminals in the TNET can make and receive pages 3 When NAPT or other firewall functions are implemented packet relay for RTP packets is required Packet relay requires VoIP channels for each simultaneous call desired 4 The local MFIM will take over operation of registered devices if the central controlling MFIM does not respond to three consecutive poll attempts over a 10 second period The central MFIM will gain control automatically upon return of the WAN connection 5 iPECS can be installed behind a NAPT however Fixed Nat port forwarding is required for the host to be reachable by remote devices 181 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 Up to 50 local MFIMs can operate in local mode as part of a TNET if cetral MFIM is MFIM1200 Otherwise Up to 15 local MFIMs can operate in local mode as part of a TNET Up to 30 VSF VMIM could be used in MFIM1200 7 You can set TNET enable ON OFF for using TNET in local MFIM Programming TNET 1 TNET Basic Attributes PGM 330 2 TNET Central MFIM Attributes PGM 331 3 TNET Local MFIM PGM 332 4 Fail over PSTN Attributes Related Features e Remote Device Zone Management Hardware e Remote MFIM to support Local Survivability 2 70 2 Distributed Control Network Description In the Distributed Control
115. the two stations function as a single station When linked the two stations effectively act as a single station with the station attributes of the primary station The status of one station is reflected in the status of the other and features activated at one are active at the other All internal or external calls to a linked pair station will ring both stations All features available to the primary station are available and controllable by the secondary station one station may activate Call Forward and the other may cancel the forward The displays of the linked stations will display the status of the linked pair When one is busy the display of the linked station will be as shown below IN USE AT LINK STA Operation System Operation of Linked pairs is automatic when defined Conditions 1 2 CO Any combination of iPECS Phones and SLTs may be assigned as Linked pairs However a DSS Console may not be assigned as a linked pair station Intercom calls to the Linked stations always signal in the Tone ring mode and cannot be changed using the Caller Controlled ICM Signaling feature Linked pair stations are treated as having a single station number for all features including LCD displays station programming ADMIN access ACD statistics SMDR etc The station attributes of the Secondary station will follow attributes of the Primary station i e Day Night COS CO Warning Tone CO Auto Hold
116. toggles the Agent duty status On and Off The station may be assigned an ACD ON OFF DUTY GROUP button to set the active Agent duty status The ACD ON OFF DUTY GROUP button LED will flash to indicate an unavailable status 22 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation Agent iPECS Phone To assign a ACD ON OFF DUTY GROUP button PGM FLEX 571 Agent On Off Duty code optional ACD group number SAVE To return to available status 1 Dial 571 Agent On Off Duty Code 2 Dial ACD group number Or 1 Press ACD ON OFF DUTY GROUP button SLT To return to available status 1 Lift handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Dial 571 Agent On Off Duty Code 3 Dial ACD group number Conditions 1 The system will output an Agent Available message with a Reason code when an Agent changes availability status 2 While Unavailable the supervisor s flex button LED assigned for the station number of the agent will flash at the DND rate and the supervisor may call the station Programming NUMBERING PLAN 1 Agent On Off Duty Code PGM107 Btn 2 STATION 1 Auto ACD DND Reason code PGM 113 Btn 15 STATION GROUPS 1 ACD Group PGM 191 2 ACD No Answer Timer PGM 191 Btn 24 22 Related Features e Agent On Off Duty w Reason Code Hardware 2 5 4 Calls In Queue routing Description When a caller is queued to an ACD Group various announce
117. tones are automatically blocked when Data Line Security is assigned Conditions 1 Stations or an Attendant attempting to Camp On or Override a station with Data Line Security will receive error tone 2 When Data Line Security is enabled the system will not apply audio gain to the call Programming STATION 1 Data Line Security PGM 111 Btn 4 Related Features e Call Waiting Camp On e DND Override e Intrusion Hardware 80 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 26 DELAYED CO IP RING Description Ring signals for an incoming CO IP call can be sent to stations immediately upon detection or after an assigned ring cycle delay The delay can be up to 9 system ring cycles thus allowing other stations to answer the call Operation System Delay Ring operation is automatic when assigned Conditions 1 Delay Ring can be assigned for a station or Station Group 2 If no delay is entered when programming Ring assignments the station will receive immediate ring 3 Private Lines may be assigned with delayed ring 4 If no station or Station Group is assigned for immediate ring the call will ring immediately at the first available Attendant Programming CO IP 1 CO Station Ring Assignment PGM 144 Related Features e Private Line e Station Groups e CO IP Ring Assignment Hardware 81 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 27
118. will abandon retry if no tone or answer is detected within the Tone Detect time ACNR Retry Count Count determines the number of times system will retry before ACNR is automatically cancelled The call will be placed on the same path as originally used If the path is busy an available CO IP line in the same group will be seized The ACNR Retry Counter decrements by one when the system completes the dialed number When the ACNR Pause Timer expires if the station is in a busy state the ACNR Delay Timer is invoked Upon completion of dialing the system will monitor the call for progress signals To preserve ACNR feature in activated state SLT user does not go On Hook While ACNR dialing or waiting state if SLT user goes On Hook then SLT ACNR is deactivated automatically During ACNR dialing SLT cannot receive any new call Programming SYSTEM NUMBERING PLAN ACNR Delay Timer PGM 180 Btn 8 ACNR Pause Timer PGM 180 Btn 9 ACNR Retry Counter PGM 180 Btn 10 ACNR Tone Detect Timer PGM 180 Btn 11 SLT ACNR Code PGM 109 Btn 18 58 AON Related Features LNR Last Number Redial Speakerphone Mute Hardware iPECS Phone 316 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 3 AUTO RELEASE OF SPEAKER Description After completion of certain features the SPEAKER button turns off automatically returning the iPECS Phone to idle Operat
119. 0 01 16 MFIM1200 32 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To set Day Timed Night Ring Scenario Mode automatically Auto Service Mode Control 1 Press PGM button PGM button LED flashes 60 ipm SPEAKER LED lights steady 2 Dial the Attendant Station Program code 8 to toggle between manual and Auto Mode control Conditions 1 Only Attendants can change Day Timed Night Scenario Ring Mode for the system manually and program the Auto Ring Mode Selection Table 2 Stations receive incoming ring for CO lines based on the database assignments and the system mode Day Night Timed Scenario when the call arrives 3 When Auto Ring Selection Table is programmed the ring COS and CO IP access mode are changed automatically based on the times assigned in the table 4 The System Attendant always has manual control of the system mode by enabling disabling the Auto Service Mode Control 5 If you want to set manually Scenario mode in attendant you should program Scenario group of System call routing table PGM 251 Programming CO IP 1 CO Line Ring Assignment PGM 144 SVSTEM 1 External Control Contact PGM 168 374 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 TABLES 1 Auto Ring Mode Selection Table PGM 233 2 System Call Routing PGM 251 Related Features e System Clock Set e CO IP Ring Assignment e LBC Loud Bell Control e Dialing Restrictions e Auto Service Mode Control e Sy
120. 00 23 digits 100 23 digits Total station speed 1000 1000 1000 4000 8000 24000 Last Number Redial 10 23 digits 10 23 digits 10 23 digits 10 23 digits 10 23 digits 10 23 digits Save Number Groups 1 23 digits 1 23 digits 1 23 digits 1 23 digits 1 23 digits 1 23 digits Redial DSS Consoles Station i 9 S 9 9 ki SMDR buffer 5000 5000 5000 10000 15000 30000 CO Line Groups 20 20 20 72 72 200 SEH 12 40 40 48 48 100 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Table 1 2 1 System Capacity Chart R r iPECS 100 iPECS 300 iPECS 600 iPECS 1200 Item iPECS Micro iPECS 50 MFIM100 MFIM300 MFIM600 l MFIM1200 Station amp Hunt 26 50 70 70 70 200 Group Members Pickup Group 20 20 30 100 150 200 Pickup Group 26 50 70 300 600 1200 Member Conf Grps System 20 20 20 40 80 160 Station 25 25 35 150 300 600 Executive Secretary 10 10 10 36 36 100 pairs Authorization Codes Station 26 50 70 300 600 1200 System 474 450 430 700 1400 2800 Total 500 500 500 1000 2000 4000 7 280 245 280 245 210 175 210 175 SS minutes minutes minutes minutes na ES 4 channels 6 channels 6 channels 6 channels VMIM n a 9 hrs 9 hrs 9 hrs 9 hrs max x 6 9 hrs max x 30 MCIM 1 2 2 4 8 30 WTIM 16 16 16 32 32 32 VoIP channels 5 std Sid 4 8 6 std 6 std n
121. 1 2 3 Press the TRANS PGM button Dial 0 4 5 Dial the station range that was to be alerted If a single station is to receive alarm enter instead of a second station Press the HOLD SAVE button Conditions 1 2 9 When register or erase wake up time from a Digital station it can use VOL UP and VOL DOWN buttons to scroll between wake up times When register wake up time from a Digital station it can use button to scroll between wake up types When register wake up time from Attendant Station wake up information will be saved in a free wake up entry for each station from station range If one station has not any free wake up entry then the wake up time from Attendant Station will not be saved When erase wake up time from Attendant Station all wake up information will be erased When PGM161 New 5 Wake Up Usage changed from OFF ON or from ON OFF all wake up times for all stations are erased and current wake up times are canceled When wake up time is active in current day a star will signalize near clock displayed on Digital station LCD If there is no wake up time enabled in current day then there is no signalization on Digital station LCD After finalizing wake up call wake up time is not be automatically erased Including wake up time with YY MM DD type A wake up time can be erased only manually After finalizing wake up call with a
122. 1 PGM FLEX 564 1 SAVE To screen a call in the Ring mode 1 Press the flashing AME button the caller s voice is broadcast over the station speaker and stored in the Voice Mailbox To stop the voice broadcast and leave the caller in Voice Mail 1 Press the illuminated SPEAKER button To talk with the caller and record the conversation in Voice Mail 1 Press the illuminated MUTE button To answer the call and cancel the voice message 1 Press the illuminated AME button the caller is connected and the Voice Mail disconnected Conditions e AME is supported only on an iPECS Phone and an AME Flex button must be assigned on the phone 313 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 e lf the user answers the call using the AME button the caller is connected in the normal manner the Voice Mail is disconnected and with the VMIM VSF any message recorded by the caller is not stored Programming NUMBERING 1 AME Feature PGM 109 Btn 2 Related Features e External Auto Attendant Voice Mail e VMIM VSF Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail Hardware e iPECS Phone 314 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 9 2 AUTO CALLED NUMBER REDIAL ACNR Description This feature allows a station user to request and have the system retry a busy or no answer external call until the call is connected or the feature is ca
123. 1 If an Attendant or Secretary of an Executive Secretary pair presses the ATD INTRUSION button while receiving DND tone the system will activate DND Override 2 The conditions of the Conference feature apply Programming STATION 1 Override Privilege PGM 113 Btn 4 SYSTEM 1 Privacy PGM 161 Btn 3 2 Privacy Warning Tone PGM 161 Btn 4 Related Features Hardware 386 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 18 LCD DISPLAY FORMAT CONTROL Description The System Attendant can select the format of the time and date provided to the LCD of all iPECS Phones in the system The System Attendant can select toggle between two formats for both time and date The formats are Date Month day year or Year month date Time 12 hour or 24 hour military Operation System Attendant To Change LCD Date Format toggle 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 042 the Date Display Format program code To Change LCD Time Format toggle 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 043 the Time Display Format program code Conditions Programming SYSTEM 1 System Attendant PGM 164 Btn 1 2 LCD Date Display Mode PGM 169 Btn 1 3 LCD Time Display Mode PGM 169 Btn 2 Related Features e Attendant Positions Hardware 387 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 19 SYSTEM CLOCK SET Description The System Attendant can set the system
124. 1 SET PRE CUSTOM MSG enter station range amp Msg 00 20 2 DND FWD MSG CANCEL enter station range 3 CUSTOM DISP MSG REG enter Msg 11 20 4 Monitor Conference Room 5 Delete Conference Room 6 REC VSF ANNCEMENT enter VMIM VSF sequence number 001 999 7 SUPPLEMENTARY 1 REG STATION NAME enter station number 2 ISOLATE CO FAULT 3 AUTO D N T PGM select enable disable 4 EXT PORT 1 BGM EN DI select 0 2 5 EXT PORT 2 BGM EN DI select 0 2 6 LCD Display Language select language 7 PTT Login station range enter station range Operation Attendant To activate an Attendant Station Program Code feature or function 1 Press the PGM button the Attendant Station Program Menu is displayed 2 Dial O to access the Attendant Station Program codes 367 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 Enter desired code or use the VOL UP VOL DOWN button to display the desired menu item and enter the desired code 4 Dial additional inputs if required Condition Programming SYSTEM 1 System Attendant PGM 164 Btn 1 2 Main Attendants Assignment PGM 164 Btn 2 4 5 Related Features e SMDR Station Message Detail Recording e Traffic Analysis e Temporary Station COS Lock e Authorization Codes Password e System Clock Set e Pre defined amp Custom Text Display Messages e VMIM VSF Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail e Dial by Name e Auto Servi
125. 193 2 70 2 15 Do Not Disturb DND 194 2 70 2 16 CAS Attendant Call Lena rnnrnn 195 2 70 2 17 Centralized Voice Mail L nterna 195 2 70 2 18 Paging to Networked System e eeennnnnnnnnnnnnnzznzzzi 196 2 11 TRAFFIC ANALV SIS ie od 198 2 71 1 Traffic Analysis Attendant 2 nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenn nn nnnnna 200 2 71 2 Traffic Analysis Call REpOnS aii chcidackemisiseiee en uactenis 201 2 71 3 Traffic Analysis Re EE 202 2 71 4 Traffic Analysis CO IP Reports nn nnnnnnnn nn mezza 203 2 72 UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER UNA 0 eeennnnnnnzznnnnzzznnennn 205 2 73 VMIM VSF INTEGRATED AUTO ATTD VOICE MAIL 206 Ee Ga VMIMIWSE EE 206 2 73 2 VMIM VSF Auto Attendant E 206 2 73 3 VMIM VSF Voice Mail ccccccccceceeeceeececeeeeeececesaeeeeeeeessauaeeeeeeees 209 2 73 3 1 Message Storage L cece eee e eee e eee e eee e eee e teed rnnn nn nn nn nr n rna nr n nn 209 2 73 3 2 Message E EE 210 2 73 3 3 Remote Message Retrieval L nr 212 2 73 3 4 Message Retrieval Options nr 213 2 73 3 5 E Mail Notification L nn r nn ttanta 214 2 73 3 6 Voice Mail Back Up Station nn 216 2 73 3 7 Voice Mailbox Settings l Kuesiiieii ta iti san bida ina Bauer a a 216 2 73 3 8 Call Forward from VM Lane nnnr ern nn nn nr nn nn na 218 2 73 3 9 Outbound Message Notification nn 219 e Systemi VOICE MeMO WEE 220 2 3 5 G0mpany Directoy EE 222 2 73 6 Record VM Greeting using CCR nn 223 2 73 7 Administrato
126. 251 Web only 2 Station lcm Group PGM 125 3 CO tenency group PGM 141 B10 Related Features Hardware 242 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 80 CO CALL REROUTING Description System can reroute incoming call to CO If called number matched with compare digits of Table 252 the call are routed to Rerouting number Operation 1 2 3 Wu Enable Co Call Rerouting ON and Save T net FoPstn Table 333 is reduced and created new Col Call Rerouting table If Compare CO Group is not assigned All incoming calls are compared with Compare digits If Compare Co group is 1 and incoming call is co group 2 it doesn t work If Compare digits are 45477 called number should be 454xx xx is any two digits Item CO Rerouting Number if co access code is 9 and tel number is 1234567 91234567 Item CO Rerouting Number if individual co numbering code is 88 co is 5 and tel number is 1234567 880051234567 Item CO Rerouting Number if co group numbering code is 8 co group is 3 and tel number is 1234567 8031234567 9 If you want to reroute Net number Rerouting Type should be set NET Type 10 If you want to reroute internal station Rerouting Type should be set DISA Type Example Index Incoming Compare Code CO Code Telnumber Routing Type CO group 0 1 454 88005123456 N A 1 2 456 801123456 N A 2 1 42 555 9123456 N A 3 5 353 80112345
127. 3 Dial the desired Station User Program Code and additional inputs that may be required 4 Press the SAVE button To activate a Station User Program Code feature or function 1 Press the PGM button the Station User Program Menu is displayed 2 If desired use the VOL UP VOL DOWN to display the desired menu item or dial the desired Station User Program Code and additional inputs as required Programming 354 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Conditions Related Features e Station Flexible Buttons e Temporary Station COS Lock e Walking COS e Station Message Wait Call Back e CLI Message Wait e Wake Up Alarm e Pre defined amp Custom Text Display Messages e Headset Compatibility e Attendant Station Program Codes Hardware e iPECS Phone w Display 355 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 27 TWO WAY RECORD Description An iPECS Phone user can record any active conversation to the station user s mailbox or to hard disk drive of an iPECS Phontage or UCS Client All calls including incoming outgoing internal external conference conference rooms and conference group calls can be recorded A RECORD button must be assigned to access this feature Operation iPECS Phone To assign a flexible button as a RECORD button 1 PGM FLEX PGM 80 recording destination optional SAVE To activate Two Way Record while
128. 4 4 2 2 The Lithium battery is not field replaceable Programming Related Features Hardware 45 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 12 CALL FORWARD Description Users may have selected incoming calls re routed to other stations local or networked station groups the VMIM VSF or over a system CO IP line Off Net The user selects the type and condition under which calls will forward by entering a Call Forward code as follows Code 0 Remote Call Forward forwards all calls to the station except recalls activated from a remote station Call Forward Follow me Code 1 Unconditional all calls to the station except recalls are forwarded internally or externally immediately upon receipt Code 2 Busy if the station is busy forwards all calls except recalls to the selected station Code 3 No Answer forwards all calls except recalls to the selected station when the station does not answer within the No Answer timer Code 4 Busy No Answer forwards calls if the selected station is busy or does not answer within the No Answer timer Code 5 Attendant Off Premise forwards incoming CO IP calls to an outside number Code 6 Off Net Unconditional all calls to the station except recalls are forwarded internally or externally only SLT Code 7 Off Net Busy forwards all calls except recalls to the selected station when station is busy only SLT Code 8 Off Net No Answer f
129. 6 NET Type 4 5 401 DISA Type Index 0 If Incoming CO digits are matched digit 454 and CO group 1 seize CO 5 and send digit 123456 Index 1 If it s matched digit 456 and CO group 2 seize CO group 1 and send digit 123456 Index 2 If it s matched digit 42 555 and CO group 1 seize First Co and send digit 123456 Index 3 If it s matched digit 353 and CO group 5 seize CO group 1 and send digit 123456 in case of transit out of Networking call Index 4 If it s matched digit 401 and CO group 5 work as DISA Conditions 1 Caution If Co call rerouting table is used Fop table 333 is reduced And so if you don t like to do it you should not choice 252 table 243 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 Tnet Fop table 333 and Rerouting table 252 is reduced as following by system capacity 50A B 100 300 600 1200 Programming SYSTEM Related Features Hardware Fop table 333 Rerouting table 252 100 20 80 200 30 170 300 50 250 600 100 500 1 CO Call Rerouting PGM252 Web only 2 Tnet Fop Table 333 244 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 81 OUTGOING MAILBOX DESTINATION Description If a CO IP incoming Caller dials O when listening to a station s VSF mailbox greeting the call is routed according to the Outgoing Mailbox Destination
130. 61 Session Initiation protocol draft standard iPECS VoIP channels support other SIP related RFCs including RFC 2617 HTTP Authentication Basic amp Digest RFC 3515 Refer Method RFC 3264 Offer Answer Model RFC 3265 SIP Basic Call Flow Examples RFC 3891 SIP Replaces Header Using the SIP database assignments the system will register and authenticate with the SIP proxy server permitting the system to interoperate employing SIP to establish manage and terminate real time voice sessions with external parties Operation System Operation of SIP Service is automatic Conditions Programming STATION 1 SIP User ID Table PGM111 Btn 19 2 SIP User ID Attributes PGM 126 Web only BOARD 1 SIP CO Attributes PGM 133 Web only CO IP 1 CO IP Line Group PGM 141 Btn 1 2 CO VoIP Mode PGM 141 Btn 11 Related Features e System Networking e H 323 v4 Service 298 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Hardware e VOIMB8 or VOIM24 299 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 14 IP WAN DIALING AFTER ANSWER Description The iPECS system permits sending and receiving DTMF signals after connecting to an external VoIP party The DTMF signal can be DTMF tone Text String or DTMF protocol H 323 specification based on the system programming Operation System Operation is automatic based on the system database Conditions 1 The conne
131. 8 Exception Table D Exception Table D No restriction No LD calls amp No restriction Table C 9 Exception Table E Exception Table E No restriction No LD calls amp No restriction Table C 10 Exception Table D Exception Table D No restriction No LD calls amp No restriction amp E amp E Table C 11 Exception Table Exception Table No restriction No LD calls amp No restriction A B D amp E A B D amp E Table C PBX Dialing Codes Four 4 one or two digit PBX Trunk Access Codes can be defined in the system database When dialed as the first digit s these codes signal the system to apply the appropriate COS If not dialed the call is treated as an internal PBX call and dialing is not restricted Exception Tables Each Exception Table permits entry of 50 Allow codes and 50 Deny codes Each code can contain up to 20 digits including digits 0 9 as a wild card any digit and 7 as the end of entry mark Reference the previous charts for application of the Exception Tables Exception Table process As digits are dialed they are compared to entries in the appropriate Exception Table Based on the Allow and Deny entries the system applies the following rules to allow or deny the call Rule 1 If a table has no entries no restrictions are applied Rule 2 If there are only Deny entries restrictions are provided as Deny only Rule 3 If there are only Allow entries restrictions are provided as Allow
132. 9 To delete a Conference Room 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 055 3 Dial Room number 1 9 iPECS Phone To set up a Conference Room 1 Press the PGM button Dial 53 to create a Conference Room Dial the desired Conference Room number 1 9 If desired enter a password for the Conference Room must be exactly 5 digits Press SAVE button to establish the Room a A O N 70 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 To join a Conference Room 1 Dial 59 the Conference Room entry code 2 Dial the Conference Room Number 3 Dial the Conference Room password To delete a Conference Room 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 54 the delete Conference Room code 3 Dial the Conference Room number 1 9 4 Dial the Conference Room password 5 Press SAVE button to delete the Conference Room To transfer a call to a Conference Room 1 Press the TRANS button Dial 59 the Conference Room entry code Dial the Conference Room Number Dial the Conference Room password oa A O N Hang up to complete the transfer SLT To set up a Conference Room 1 Lift the handset Dial 561 SLT Programming code Dial 53 the Create Conference Room code Dial the desired Conference Room number 1 9 a A W N Dial the Conference Room password 6 Momentarily press the hook switch To join a Conference Room 1 Lift the handset
133. ACC Contact lt sip 46752468004468920505 195 84 135 11 5060 gt 424 iPECS LIK Feature Des cription amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 The incoming and the outgoing Invite looks as they do today except for two prefix that are added to the outgoing invite Prefix 1 Red is always added to the To header This prefix is fixed and used by all customers Prefix 2 Blue is always added to the From and Contact header This prefix is a trunk ID and each trunk has a unique prefix Example of new admin programming The prefixes are only used in case of mobile extension and should therefore be related to the MEX programming in pgm 133 Mobile Range Default Extension Call From Contact ID EXT EXT P Asserted Identit ORG EXT y Remote Party ID Fixed Table EXT Diversion Not Use EXT Not Use ORG Fixed To Prefix 24 characters From Contact 24 characters Prefix 2 Outgoing call from MEX to internal station or external number Outgoing call requires that iPECS can detect out band signaling and analyze that number to decide if it is an external call internal call or some other command Py 1 2 B 1 m E IA Vay Ey bily kri aa PoE MEX 105 calls the Public user 08920533 and an Invite B9 is sent to iPECS iPECS detects that it is a MEX call by finding the prefix 9999 in the To header iPECS checks if the number in the From header exists in MEX table pgm
134. ACD Group Help Code PGM 107 Btn 5 STATION GROUPS 1 ACD Groups PGM 191 2 ACD Group Supervisor PGM 191 Btn 18 3 ACD Warning Tone PGM 191 Btn 12 Related Features e Automatic Call Distribution e Agent Help Request Hardware e iPECS Phone 2 5 11 3 Agent Call Monitor Description Agent Call Monitor permits an active Supervisor to monitor an Agents call in progress for training purposes or to assist the Agent When used the Supervisor is connected to the call with the microphone muted the MUTE button LED is On If ACD Warning Tone is enabled a Warning Tone is provided to the Agent s call indicating the Supervisor has entered the call The Supervisor hears the Agent and connected party and may join the conversation by pressing the MUTE button to activate the microphone The Supervisor station must be assigned an AGENT MONITOR button to activate the Agent Call Monitor feature 33 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation Supervisor iPECS Phone To assign an AGENT MONITOR button 1 PGM FLEX 577 Group Number SAVE To enter an active Agent call from the Supervisor phone 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Call the desired Agent and receive busy tone 3 Press the AGENT MONITOR button the Supervisor is connected to the active Agent call with the microphone muted the MUTE button LED is On To converse with the Agent and connect
135. AIL RECORDING 170 2 06 1CallCOStDISDIAY enee 170 2 68 2 SMDR Call RecordS EE 171 2 68 3 Lost Call Recording L 174 2 69 SYSTEM ADMIN PROGRAMMING ee EEN 177 2 69 1 Keyset Administration 1120 ismi menti 177 2 69 2 Multi Level Admin ACCESS s nn 177 2 69 3 Web Administration WEE 178 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 269 4 Web User EN ET EE 179 2 70 SYSTEM NETWORKING tteececceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 181 2 70 1 Centralized Control TNET si ia ie e iu 181 2 70 2 Distributed Control Network 182 A si NEE Call A e B A TAE E AEA TENTENE 183 2 70 2 2 Net Transfer 0000 seen nnnnnnnnnnnzznnnnnnnnnin inn a aea a aia iaai lainaan 184 2 70 2 3 Identification Service nn n nr nn 185 2 70 2 4 Call Completion nn rna rr rna n terran tant 185 2 1025 Call Ofr ches ii e a i AEREE NS EES 186 2 70 2 6 Net Conference ena nennnnnnnnnn anna nrnnrn nn nn nn nn nanna 187 2 70 2 7 Message Waiting Indication MWI Le eennnnnnnnnnennzznznznzi 187 2 70 2 8 Net Call Forward Unconditional nn 188 2 70 2 9 Net Call Forward Busy L sussssseminninnzzjnninnenzonanijntiperenadinranzenzizentnnsent 189 2 70 2 10 Net Call Forward No Answer Lena nn nn nn nnn 190 2 70 2 11 Net Call Forward Busy No Answer Lewn nnnnnznzznzzni 191 Ze O22 CO Transit Ii EE 192 2 70 2 13 CO Transit Out L nn peere neida E e pE nn nanna 192 2 70 2 14 BLF Presentation
136. ARIO RING MODE 00 374 6 11 DSS CONSOLES tii i aee i ddaa aeti ainnean 376 6 12 DISABLE OUTGOING CO IP ACCESS en 380 6 13 DND OVERRIDE iii ae 381 6 14 EMERGENCY CALL ATTENDANT ALERT 382 6 15 EZ ATTENDANT ii tess isrann e ac cccese tect aeedemczeeae 384 6 16 FEATURE CANCEL i i i seuns AEREAS ipei aaan 385 6 17 INTRUSION WEE 386 6 18 LCD DISPLAY FORMAT CONTROL en 387 6 19 SYSTEM CLOCK SET i 388 6 20 IP ATTENDANT i i cassette cee ee 390 f eli B p AN 391 1 1 BROKER CALL sic iii i EES iata aeneo Eerie 391 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 7 22 HOWLER TONE eege 393 7 3 SLT MESSAGE WAIT INDICATION seren nee nnennnenn 394 TA SET NAME ENTRY ee ERC 395 7 5 TRANSFER CLI TO SLT steiert 396 7 6 SLT FLASH MODE ida 397 6 SIP EXtGnSiOn EE 398 8 1 REGISTRATION RE 398 8 2 PROVISIONING a i acc hecstee Asse cicsteeeecciateen sees 405 8 3 MAKE hg eegener eege 409 BA CALL ANSWER iii iret ete ee 411 8 5 GALE HOLD EE 412 8 6 CALL TRANSFER EE 413 8 7 CALL FORWARD E 414 8 8 DO NOT DISTURB DND sssssssssssnsunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 415 8 9 CONFERENCE eet 416 8 10 CALL WAIT amp BROKER CALL m eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 417 Bi CALL EE 418 8 12 MCIM REQUIREMENT FOR SIP PHONE naasian 419 8 13 VOIP OR VOIM8 24 REQUIREMENT FOR SIP PHONE 420 8 14 CALL TRACE OF SIP EXTENSION FOR DEBUGGING 421 8 15 DSS BLF BUSY LAMP FIELD sse nn
137. AX T 38 Day Night Mode applied between groups added reference and rewrote ICM Tenancy ACD sections previously section 2 5 to 2 20 restructured ACD sections now section 2 5 1 2 5 12 Multi level Admin access restructured admin with Multi level section Programmable Admin TCP port restructured Web Admin amp added programmable tcp port Web User manual multi lingual added Web User Manual section with Multi lingual support Network Security amp Priority added new section with VLAN Diffserv IPSec and SRTP Transparent Networking added Centralized Networking with Fail over amp Remote Gateways Hunt Group Station Forward added condition for Hunt group recognition of forward state System Processor Redundancy added section for standby MFIM600 Call Recording added unconditional Call recording feature IP Trunking added SIP and H 323 with GK routed call VSF section revised to VMIM VSF added VMIM description VMIM e mail notification added VMIM Back up station added VMIM multi language support MOH added VMIM VSF MOH Authorization codes added new operation for system codes 7 table index code Mobile Ext enhanced mobile receives hunt calls and support for Attd Recall 4 d3 30 Sep 07 Updates for iPECS release 4 software General edits for errata Emergency Call Attendant Alert Automatic Daylight Savings Time DST Adjustment Direct Inward Dialing DID Automatic System Time Synchronization Dist
138. CO IP line buttons can access the CO IP lines assigned to group 00 Private Lines 4 The system will select a CO IP line from a group based on the Round Robin or Last Choice determined by database assignments Programming STATION 1 CO PGM PGM 112 Btn 6 CO IP 1 CO Line Group PGM 141 Btn 1 SVSTEM 1 CO Line Choice PGM 160 Btn 4 Related Features Hardware 285 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 4 CO IP LINE PRESET FORWARD Description Each CO IP Line can be assigned a Ring No Answer Preset Forward destination An incoming call on the CO IP line will be routed to the defined ring destination At expiration of the CO IP Line Preset No Answer Forward timer the call is forward to the defined Preset Forward destination which is an index to the ICLID Ring Assignment Table The destination can be a station or station group including an adjunct Voice Mail When the call is forwarded to an adjunct Voice Mail group a predefined Voice Mail Id VMID will be sent to the VM system to identify the Mailbox to receive the call Operation System Operation of this feature is automatic Conditions 1 CO IP line Preset Forward is disabled for calls initially routed to a station group 2 CO IP line Preset Forward will override Call Forward No Answer at a station 3 CO IP line Preset Forward is disabled if the Preset Forward Timer is set to 0 4 The CO IP line Preset Forward destination
139. CO button for the Private line However calls on a Private line can be forward to the Voice Mail permitting a voice mail to be recorded 5 IP channels cannot be assigned as Private lines Programming STATION 1 Flex Button Assignment PGM 115 CO IP 1 CO IP Line Group PGM 141 Btn 1 Related Features e Hold e Call Forward e Executive Secretarv Forward e Call Forward Preset 309 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Hardware e iPECS Phone 310 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 18 MULTIPLE CLI Description This feature provides flexibility for CLI service In PGM 114 CLI Station Number PGM 114 F6 can be programmed Station CLI 2 Station CLI 5 will be newly made By using these new CLIs a specific CLI can be provided to the called party The name CLI Station Number will be changed to Station CLI 1 In PGM 143 Station CLI Type CLI can be chosen between Station CLI 1 to Station CLI 5 It will be newly made Station CLI 1 means Original CLI Station Number PGM 114 F6 is used Station CLI 2 Station CLI 5 means newly added CLI Station Numbers are used In PGM 143 CLIP table index CLIP can be chosen The range is available from 00 50 In case of CLIP table index 00 to 49 then normal CLI making way is applied In case of CLIP table index 50 then ONLY Station CLI Station Number PGM 114 F6 can be s
140. Call Cost Display Hardware e ISDN gateway Module 301 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 15 2 Calling Called Party Identification Description The iPECS system receives calling party identification in the ISDN call Set up message CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation The answering party identification which may be different from the called party is received in the ISDN connect message COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation When provided the LCD of iPECS Phones displays the identification which is included in call records The received identification may be sent to a selected serial port iPECS Phone Display LINE RINGING CLI 03438502821 CLI Serial output record at ring start AA BBBBBBBBCCC record at ring stop AA BBBBBBBBCCC DDDDDDDDD EEE gt FFF record at answer AA BBBBBBBBCCC DDDDDDDDD EEE gt FFF Where AA ISDN CO line number BB B Line Identification received CCC Called station DD D Speed Dial name EEE Speed Dial bin number FFF Answering station The system will also compare the identification to the Speed Dial bins If a match exists the Name of the Speed Dial bin may be displayed in place of the number CO IP Name display The system will send calling and answering party identification in the appropriate messages to the ISDN based on the database Identification messages may be restricted
141. D STATUS XXX TOTAL CALLS XXX 2 Press VOL UP or VOL DWN for Number of ACD calls served Number of unanswered ACD Calls Average ring time before answer Average ACD call service time after answer 3 Press the key for a next agent selection Or To control Agent duty status 1 Dial 3 ACD Agent Duty Code 2 Dial 2 for Duty ON OFF 3 Dial 0 or 1 Off Duty 1 On Duty Conditions 1 The Supervisor must be assigned as a Supervisor for the ACD Group and be logged into the group to access the Group Status display information Programming NUMBERING PLAN 1 ACD Group Status Code PGM 107 Btn 7 STATION GROUPS 1 ACD Group PGM 191 2 ACD Group Supervisor PGM 191 Btn 18 37 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features e Station Groups Hardware e iPECS Phone 2 5 12 ACD Statistics Report ACD reports can be requested bv the Supervisor and can be programmed for periodic output over the SMDR portor selected TCP port The svstem will provide reports for the ACD Group and Agent statistics as follows ACD Group Statistics Report e Group Number e Time stamp e Total calls e Number of unanswered calls e Average queue time e Longest queue time e Total number of calls placed in queue e Number of times calls experience all agents busy e Total time all agents were busy e Average ring time before answer e Av
142. DIAL 2 64 1 Display Security Description Station and System Speed Dial numbers may be programmed so that the digits are not displayed on the LCD of iPECS phones Operation To assign Display Security to a Speed Dial number 1 Dial as the first digit of the Speed Dial number Conditions 1 The number is displayed when programming the Speed Dial number 2 Display Security does not affect the SMDR output 3 Display Security is provided on all CO IP calls including calls that are transferred or recall 4 An in any digit position other than the first will activate Pulse to Tone Switchover Programming Related Features e Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover e Speed Dial Hardware 2 64 2 Speed Dial Pause Insertion Description A pause dialing command may be inserted in a Station or System Speed Dial number When encountered the system will stop dialing the Speed Dial number for the assigned pause duration Multiple pauses HOLD button depressions may be inserted into a Speed Dial number 156 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation System Pause operation is automatic when encountered see Station or System Speed Dial for pause entry Conditions 1 The timed pause is used only with analog CO lines Programming SYSTEM 1 Pause Timer PGM 181 Btn 10 Related Features e Station Speed Dial e System Speed Dial Hardware 2 64 3 Station Spe
143. E button is pressed the display will show LIFT THE HANDSET To complete the page the user must lift the handset within the predefined 5 second period or return to idle Programming STATION 1 Auto Speaker Select PGM 111 Btn 1 Related Features Hardware e iPECS Phone 318 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 5 BACK GROUND MUSIC Description An iPECS Phone can receive audio generally music from an internal or external source while itis idle Music from the source is received over the speaker and will be shut off during ringing pages or while the station is off hook Operation iPECS Phone To Receive Background Music 1 Press PGM button 2 Dial 73 to BGM code 3 Dial 00 10 to select hear and select the BGM 00 no BGM 01 Music 1 02 Music 2 03 VSF MOH 1 04 SLT MOH 1 05 SLT MOH 2 06 SLT MOH 3 07 SLT MOH 4 08 SLT MOH 5 09 VSF MOH 2 10 VSF MOH 3 4 Press SAVE to save your selection Attendant To Transmit BGM through an External Page Port from an Attendant 1 Press PGM button 2 Dial 074 or O75 the Attendant Station Program code for External Page Port 1 or 2 respectively 3 Dial 00 10 to select hear and select the BGM 00 no BGM 01 Music 1 02 Music 2 03 VSF MOH 1 04 SLT MOH 1 05 SLT MOH 2 06 SLT MOH 3 07 SLT MOH A 08 SLT MOH 5 09 VSF MO
144. ECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 8 DID CALL WAIT Description If DID call is incoming to a station that is already call connected this DID call is wait until the station is answering or the DID DISA no answer timer is expired To activate this feature the ADMIN field of DID call wait must be set enable If station has a flexible button of DID call wait then it can set this feature via flexible button Operation iPECS Phone To assign a DID CALL WAIT button 1 PGM FLEX PGM 34 SAVE To activate deactivate DID call wait from an iPECS Phone 1 Press the DID CALL WAIT button 2 Dial activate deactivate code 1 or O respectively Conditions 1 The DID call will follow the call routing defined in PGM code 167 after the expiration of the DID DISA no answer timer expires 2 The iPECS Phone must have an appearance button for the DID line 3 Assigning the ICLID Timer which enables ICLID routing for a DID line disables DID Call Wait Programming STATION 1 DID Call Wait PGM 113 Btn 9 CO IP LINE 1 ICLID Timer PGM 142 Btn 14 SVSTEM 1 DID DISA Destination PGM 167 2 DID DISA No Answer Timer PGM 181 Btn 2 Related Features e Direct Inward System Access DISA e Direct Inward Dial DID e ICLID Call Routing Hardware e iPECS Phone 323 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 9 DND ONE TIME DND
145. GO RING DETECT KEE 289 4 6 DIAL PULSE SIGNALING E 290 4 9 DIRECT INWARD DIAL DID L nnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnennnenennnnnezn 291 4 10 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS DISA 05 293 4 11 DIME SIGNAL SENDING iii iii se degen 295 4 12 IP ADDRESS DIALING ege NNN deed 296 4 13 IP TRUNKING iss ib ii pi a eeeEeee ege 297 E a We E EE 297 4 132 EE 298 4 14 IP WAN DIALING AFTER ANSWER see KENNEN 300 4 15 ISDN INTEGRATED SERVICE DIGITAL NETWORK 301 4 15 1 ISDN AOC Advice of Charge L 301 4 15 2 Calling Called Party Identification cece eee eeeeeeeeeeenennaaaees 302 vii iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 A 1053 eV PAG Re re EE 303 4 15 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN L nn 304 4 16 ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES seen 307 4 16 1 ISDN Call Deflection EE 307 4 16 2 ISDN Malicious Call Id Request 1 eremita 308 4 17 PRIVATE LINE ii 309 4 18 MULTIPLE G El iii i da 311 9 IPECS PHONE i i EE ee 313 5 1 ANSWERING MACHINE EMULATION en 313 5 2 AUTO CALLED NUMBER REDIAL ACNR 315 5 3 AUTO RELEASE OF SPEAKER en 317 5 4 AUTOMATIC SPEAKER SELECT en 318 9 5 BACK GROUND MUSIC iii tati 319 SEELEN REES 321 5 7 CO LINE NAME DISPLAY cece ceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeees 322 9 8 DID CAL WAIT RE 323 5 9 DND ONE TIME DND iii 324 5 10 FLEX BUTTON DIRECT SPEED DIAL ASSIGNMENT 326 5 11 FLEXIBLE LED FLASH RATES nn 327 5 12
146. GROUP LISTENING iii iii dadi aditi 328 5 13 STATION INDIVIDUAL CALL ROUTING ICR 329 5 14 CALL PROFILE ii a aae eke aree iao EAEEREN eta 331 5 15 INTERCOM SIGNALING MODE nn 334 SCHMELER 336 9 17 OFF HOOK SIGNALING iii ii idi 337 5 18 ON HOOK DIALING iii caa cee seceded scene 338 5 19 PRIME LINE IMMEDIATELV DELAVED 339 5 20 RING TONE DOWNLOAD A eeeeennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnna 341 5 21 SAVE NUMBER REDIAL SNR Lee 342 5 22 SILENT TEXT MESSAGE A ss ennnnnnnnnnnnnnnenenennn enza rna 344 5 23 SPEAKERPHONE iii ii iii iii secre ss eesectecceccceceticonctcaaocccees 345 vili iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 24 STATION FLEXIBLE BUTTONS nn 347 5 25 STATION RELOCATION iii 349 5 26 STATION USER PROGRAMMING amp CODES 350 9 27 TWO WAY RECORD ilii nenna 356 9 28 VOICE OVER iii e 358 5 29 SERIAL DSS ii si i a 360 E En E 362 6 1 ACTIVE CPU MFIM DISPLAY sseeneennnnnznnnnnnnnennnznnnnnnnnna 362 6 2 ALTERNATE ATTENDANT ssssseennznnzznnennzznnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 363 6 3 ATTENDANT POSITIONS see nnnnnnnnnnn nee nnn rna n ee 364 6 4 ATTENDANT RECALL i 365 6 5 ATTENDANT STATION PROGRAM CODES cee 366 6 6 CABINET ALARM ia i ki nnna 369 6 7 CALL FORWARD ATTENDANT 0 0 nnnnnnnnn en nnnnenna 370 6 8 CALL FORWARD CO IP OFF NET le ennnn nn 371 6 9 CALE QUEUING si 373 6 10 DAY NIGHT TIMED SCEN
147. Group Attributes PGM 191 3 Pickup Group PGM 192 Related Features Automatic Call Distribution External Auto Attendant Voice Mail Group Call Pick Up MOH Music On Hold VMIM VSF Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail Hardware 168 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 67 RING GROUPS INDICATION Description If a station call to Ring group and a member of the Ring group received the call the member can hear mute ring and see the flex button flashing which is the station caller And after that the member of Ring group can push the button and talk with the caller and talking internal call can be hold After completing the talk you can seize again holding station Operation iPECS Phone To assign a STATION NUMBER button of caller station at the called station 1 PGM FLEX calling Station number SAVE To hold and answer a calling station 1 A user is Talking with another station The other Caller call to Ring group The member of ring group can hear the mute ring and flashing the button of caller The user can press the button and talk with the caller who call to Ring group And the call of previous talking is holding oa P WwW NY The user can press ICM button or flex button for reconnecting with previous call Conditions 1 This operation should be operated only by programming Programming SYSTEM 1 Ring Group Indication PGM 161 B24 B16 Relate
148. H 2 10 VSF MOH 3 4 Press SAVE to save your selection 319 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Conditions 1 oO The speaker volume is adjustable at the station by using the VOL UP VOL DOWN key of the iPECS Phone BGM is delayed 1 second after a return to idle state Silence is provided if no BGM source is assigned For remote devices BGM must be locally provided BGM is not sent from an MFIM to remote devices IPECS Micro and iPECS 50 does not provide Music 2 VSF MOHs must be recorded properly VSF MOH2 and VSF MOH3 should be assigned prompt number in PGM 171 button 5 and 6 SLT MOHs must be connected properly and should be assigned station number in PGM 171 button 4 Programming SYSTEM BGM Type PGM 171 Btn 1 MUSIC Setting PGM 171 Btn 3 Assign SLT MOH Port PGM 171 Btn 4 VSF MOH2 PGM 171 Btn 5 VSF MOH3 PGM 171 Btn 6 aR WD Related Features MOH Music On Hold Internal External amp All Call Page Hardware BGM source properly connected to the MFIM refer to the iPECS Description and Installation Manual Section 4 4 2 320 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 6 CALL LOG DISPLAY Description Users of iPECS Phones with Soft keys can view a log of incoming outgoing and missed calls on the display A Flex button must be assigned as a CALL LOG button which allows easy acce
149. IM VSF Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail Conference Conference Group Multi Party Voice Conference Conference Room Auto Call Recording Hardware iPECS Phone VSF VMIM Feature Server or External SMDI based AA VM system Phontage or UCS Client 357 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 28 VOICE OVER Description This feature allows users of IPECS Phones off hook on a call CO IP or Intercom to receive a voice announcement through the handset receiver with the existing call The Voice Over is muted so as not to interfere with the existing conversation The called station user may then respond to the calling party using Camp On response or may use Silent Text Messaging to respond Operation iPECS Phone Placing a Voice Over OHVO while receiving busy 1 Dial or press a pre programmed OHVO button 2 After splash tone begin announcement Responding to a Voice Over announcement 1 Use Camp On response procedure or Silent Text Messaging or One Time DND SLT Placing a Voice Over OHVO while receiving busy 1 Dial ff 2 After splash tone begin announcement Responding to a Voice Over announcement 1 Use Camp On response procedure Conditions 1 When the called station responds via Camp On all conditions and options available to Camp On apply 2 OHVO may be used to notify the called party of a transferred call CO IP Line or Intercom by announcing
150. IP call transfers to the station immediately recall the initiator and recalls are routed directly to the Attendant Astation may have multiple LOOP and POOL buttons When all CO Lines in a group are busy any POOL buttons associate with the group will show busy otherwise POOL buttons will only display the status of an activate call POOL buttons will access a CO Line from the designated group using the Round Robin or Last Used method as assigned in the database The priority for the appearance of a CO call transfer is first a direct CO Line appearance CO IP button if not available a LOOP appearance is employed if not available a POOL appearance is used If there is no appearance available the transferring station recalls immediately Station User Program Codes are defined in section 5 24 Programming NUMBERING 1 Flexible Numbering Plan PGM 105 109 STATION 1 Flexible Button Assignment PGM 115 Related Features Flexible Numbering Plan Station User Programming amp Codes Hardware iPECS Phone 348 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 25 STATION RELOCATION Description The iPECS Phone once registered can be re located to any LAN port connected to the iPECS system without loss of any data or programming Operation This feature is automatically activated Conditions 1 If an iPECS Phone requires replacement the administrator must
151. LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 if the 9999 is incoming prefix then it is converted again to 08920533 and if 089 is nation and area code then the last invite will be 20533 c f If you need to modify manually by E164 type will change to see this attribute To Prefix add this in To header when invite to Mobile Phone From Contact Prefix add this in From and Contact header when invite to Mobile Phone Outband Prefix analize this for To header of invite from Mobile Phone Remove this prefix if it is matched Reject the invite if this prefix if it is not matched c f If you mean this as an authentication number per VMEX then I should move this to PGM 215 per VMEX Outband Usage currently reserved and will be for authorization ON OFF of incoming invite from Mobile Phone Nome Pon Firewall Em Type Prefix Outband Prefix Outband Usage 5060 Aen a now 5 RTP Connection VMEX is registered as a remote mode phone by default And there need one VOIP relay channel between VMEX and internal local mode station CO VSF VMIM or misc device If you want to force VMEX to local mode you can make that by set PGM 211 Device NAT Usage NOT NAT If then you need to establish all of routable IP configuration 429 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 VMEX RTP is non recursing
152. LL Description Unanswered or abandoned CO IP calls that remain unanswered for the Hold or Transfer Hold timer as appropriate will recall the station placing the call on hold If the call remains unanswered for the assigned Recall time the first available Attendant will also receive recall The Attendant and station will receive the recall signal for the Attendant Recall Timer period after which the system will disconnect and return the CO IP line to idle Operation System Attendant recall operation is automatic Conditions Programming SYSTEM 1 Attendant Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 1 2 Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 5 Related Features e Hold e Call Transfer Hardware 365 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 5 ATTENDANT STATION PROGRAM CODES Description Using the Attendant Station Program Codes the Attendant can print SMDR and Traffic reports on demand assign Authorization Codes control certain user features record VMIM VSF announcements enable disable Auto Service Mode Control etc Items are available using the Program Code directly or scrolling the multi level display menu The following indicates the menu displays including the digit for selecting the item the item description and further required entries The various levels of the display menu are indicated by indentation For additional information reference Appendix 4 3 of the iPECS Admin amp Programming
153. Lines Busy busy tone is received for 5 seconds before ICM Dial tone is again presented and the DISA caller may try another call LEDs associated with the DISA CO Line appearance will provide normal status indications at all stations except the Attendants The LED for the line at an Attendant will flutter at 240 ipm when busy An iPECS Phone user can only receive a DISA call with an available CO IP appearance button Programming CO IP SYSTEM TABLES DISA Account Code PGM 142 Btn 5 DISA IP Access PGM 142 Btn 11 DISA Service Attributes PGM 146 DISA Retry Counter PGM 160 Btn 5 DISA COS Assignment PGM 166 DID DISA Busy Destination PGM 167 Btn 1 DID DISA Error Destination PGM 167 Btn 2 DID DISA No Answer Timer PGM 181 Btn 2 Unsupervised Conference Timer PGM 182 Btn 5 CCR Audio Text Tables PGM 228 Auto Ring Mode Selection Table PGM 233 N A OO SS Ga MM A WD A Related Features VMIM VSF Auto Attendant Day Night Timed Scenario Ring Mode Dialing Restrictions Authorization Codes Password Unsupervised Conference VMIM VSF Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail Auto Service Mode Control Hardware 294 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 11 DTMF SIGNAL SENDING Description Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF signals are used with CO lines assigned for DTMF signaling The duration of the DTMF signal can be adjusted from 40 to 990 milliseconds Operati
154. M CALL ICM CALL l nee nenznnnn nn nn KEEN 258 3 3 INTERCOM CALL AOL Ds accicscstcceeee sree cer ttunicccencazeceeasivins 260 3 4 INTERCOM CALLER CONTROLLED ICM SIGNALING 261 3 5 INTERCOM LOCK OUT ee nn ENNER EEN 262 3 6 INTERCOM STEP e ME 263 vi iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 7 INTERCOM TENANCY GROUP ccccteecceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeees 264 3 8 INTERCOM TRANSFER iii i OI 266 3 9 MESSAGE WAIT CALL BACK Less nnneennnnnnennnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnzn 268 3 9 1 CLI Message Walt bil e ista ei tag A a i at 268 3 9 2 Short Message Service SMS 2 2 22 cccccceeeeeeeedeeeeeeeesseeeneceeceeeeeteeeene 270 3 9 3 Station Message Wait Call Back L nn 272 3 9 4 Message Wait Reminder Tone Lena 275 3 10 PAGING EE 276 3 10 1 Internal External amp All Call Page vena 276 3 10 2 Meet Me Page ANSWer c sccesecsestousvedevces dee susdvenideenSenndaeecabuusteenpe daniels 278 3 103 SOS IP AGING EE 279 3 11 PUSH TO TALK PAGING eee nennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnmnnnnnnnnnnn nn 280 9 12 BARGE IN EE 282 Wee 283 4 1 AUTO FAULT DETECTION AND RECOVERY 008 283 4 2 COLINE FLASH iii i i i ian 284 4 3 CO IP LINE GROUPS sisien Eege 285 4 4 CO IP LINE PRESET FORWARD e nennnnnnnnnnnnnnenznnnnnnznnnnzn 286 4 5 CO IP RING ASSIGNMENT llLl ss nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenzananznnznnnnnnznznzn 287 4 6 CO LINE RELEASE GUARD TIME ess nnnnnnnenzenznnnnznnanennn 288 47
155. M caller s voice To respond the user must lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button T Tone ringing An ICM call will cause the iPECS Phone to provide audible ICM ring tone The user must lift the handset or press SPEAKER button to answer An SLT always functions in the Tone ring mode Operation iPECS Phone To change ICM Signaling Mode 1 Press PGM button the SPEAKER button LED lights steady 2 Dial Station User Program code 13 confirmation tone is received 3 Dial the desired ICM Signaling Mode code 1 for H 2 for T or 3 for P 4 Press the SAVE button Conditions 1 Message Wait Callback Call Forward and Attendant Override will ring in the tone mode regardless of ICM Signaling Mode selected by the user 2 The ICM signaling Mode Selection does not affect Page announcements 3 The default ICM Signaling mode is Tone ring and the active mode is stored in battery protected memory Programming Related Features e Intercom Call ICM Call e Paging e Message Wait Call Back e Call Forward e DND Override 334 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 e Intrusion Hardware e iPECS Phone 335 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 16 MUTE Description An iPECS Phone can turn off audio transmission from the handset speakerphone or headset microphone Mic Mute Operation i
156. MM READ xx 6 If you review all history then the alarm will not provided when the station go to idle Programming STATION 1 Emergencv CO Group PGM 112 BTN 18 TABLES 1 Emergencv Code Table PGM 226 SVSTEM 1 EMR CALL ATD NOTIFY PGM 161 BTN 24 6 382 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Conditions Related Features e Alarm Signal Door Bell e Emergency Call E 911 caller location Support e Emergency Call Hardware 383 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 15 EZ ATTENDANT Description The ez Attendant is a Windows based PC application that provides a visualization of the Attendant functionality to simplify Attendant control of features and functions including displays of call user and system status ez Attendant operates in conjunction with the Attendant s iPECS Phone to simplify operation and expand features and functions available to the Attendant For further information on ez Attendant refer to the ez Attendant Installation and User Guide Operation System Attendant Operation of the ez Attendant is provided in the ez Attendant Installation and User Guide Conditions 1 iPECS ez Attendant requires installation of a system Lock key Programming SYSTEM 1 Attendant Assignment PGM 164 Related Features Hardware 384 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issu
157. Manual Note also some Program Codes are only available to the System Attendant or stations allowed access to the Attendant Program code 0 1 PRINT 1 SMDR 1 PRINT SMDR STA BASE station range input 2 DELETE STATION BASE station range input 3 DISPLY CALL CHARGE 4 ABORT PRINTING 5 PRINT LOST CALL 6 DELETE LOST CALL 2 TRAFFIC System attendant only 1 PRINT ALL SUMMARY enter Analysis time amp type 2 PRINT ALL PERIDICLLY enter Analysis time type amp Print time 3 ABORT PERIDIC PRINTING 4 PRINT ATD TRAFFIC enter Analysis time amp type 5 PRINT CALL SUMMARY 6 PRINT CALL HOUR 7 PRINT H W USAGE enter Analysis time amp type 8 PRINT CO SUMMARY enter Analysis time amp type 9 PRINT CO HOUR enter CO group number 2 COS 1 SET ICM ONLY MODE enter station range 2 RESTORE COS enter station range 3 AUTHORIZATION System Attendant only 1 REGISTER AUTHORIZATION enter station 366 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 ERASE AUTHORIZATION enter station 4 DATE AND TIME 1 LCD DATE TIME SET System Attendant only 2 LCD DATE MODE CHANGE System Attendant only 3 LCD TIME MODE CHANGE System Attendant only 4 ATD SET WAKE UP TIME enter station range 5 ATD WAKE UP DISABLE enter station range 6 Set Time from ISDN Message enter 1 on 0 off 7 ATD HOTDESK LOGIN 8 ATD HOTDESK LOGOUT 5 MESSAGE
158. N because it s set automatically if you assigned the Agent ID to the station Operation 1 IP Phone S100 without agent ID answered from IP phone S101 with agent ID A500 2 If S101 can conference 3 way S101 connects IPCR with the agent ID A500 3 If 101 cannot conference 3 way and there is MCIM S100 S101 and IPCR are connected with MCIM for 3 way conference 4 If you have flex button with two way record of E VM 620 and agent ID is ACR it s flashed during two way recording But it s ODR first time it s not flashed After pressing the flex button two way record it s flashed ACR is unconditionally recorded after connection and ODR is conditionally by user s choice 5 Even though it s ODR it can be recorded during talking If user don t press the two way recording button within talking it s erased 249 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Conditions 1 You can search the recorded using Web Admin of IPCR 2 IPCR server can be registered up to 10 servers in a system Programming 1 PGM 237 Agent ID Table 2 PGM 111 113 Set Hunt group number Ex VM of IPCR 3 PGM 190 Set Hunt group number and member of IPCR Related Features Hardware 2 85 3RD PARTY CALL RECORDING Description Svstem can record automaticallv or manuallv using 3rd party call recording server The Server can be registered to P5 5 system The station with agent ID is automa
159. NONE 2ND CRYPTO TONE 7 DSP implementation for VMEX same as normal SIP extension VOIP RTP relay channel will be utilized dynamically when need to serve MOH Ringback Busy Tone Paging and so on at least 1 8 to maximum 1 2 of number of concurrent SIP call WO1DINAZ L OFF Multicast l 18101013 L OFF Mulficast 430 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features Hardware 431 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 18 SIP VIRTUAL CO LINE VCOL Description Virtual channel without DSP usage for SIP trunk Voice and Video is direct between end sides Support only DTMF type Operation 1 Incoming call from SIP trunk to system Voice or Video call from external via SIP Virtual CO line 2 Make outbound call from system to SIP trunk Seize SIP Virtual CO line and make Voice or Video call to SIP trunk Conditions 1 Support only Outband DTMF type SIP Info Message 2 Tone detection is not supported Programming 1 Create new SIP Virtual CO lines VCOL System ID amp Numbering Plans PGM 101 Virtual Registration Device ID CO VOIM8 or VOIM24 you can specify number of channel by Max Port MAC Address check disable and it will be virtually created automatically Data Max port Virtual SIP ON or not Max Port number of channels you want to create for virtual SIP CO line channels
160. NSFER i iii i ae 59 2 14 I Qall Fransfen Station sis gene cet cesetesyeoaceseadeasins eke 59 2 17 2 Call Transfer TT 60 2 14 3 Gall Transfer Voice Mail Z 62 2 18 CALL WAITING CAMP ON srrnnnnenzznnnnnnnnnnzznnnnnnnnnnznnnnnnnmmzz 63 2 19 COMP ACCESS i cea ae accceaaceee ret 64 2 20 CO IP CALL TIME RESTRICTION sceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 66 2 21 CO IP CALL WARNING TONE TIMER ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeees 67 2 22 CONP QUEUING E 68 2 23 GONFERENGE EE 70 2 23 1 Conference ROOM EE 70 2 23 2 Multi Partv Voice Conference nn 72 2 23 3 Unsupervised Conference EE 74 2 23 4 Conference Group EE 75 2 23 5 Conference Member VIEW amp DELETE in Add On Conference 77 2 24 CUSTOMER SITE NAME i a ie Seba geuekteEE E ESKgEE Seege 79 2 25 DATA LINE SE URII Xi i ia i nnne 80 2 26 DELAYED COMP RING ae ee i pan 81 2 27 DELAYED AUTO ATTENDANT ssnnennnnzznnnnnnnznzznnnnnanmnnzzzz 82 2 21 WRINGSASSIGNE We 82 2 27 2 DISA Incoming Case Russia Only Lena 82 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 28 DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeenees 84 2 29 RRE CN EE 85 2 30 DIAL PULSE TO TONE SWITCHOVER ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeees 87 2 31 DIALING RESTRICTIONS lll l nnennnnennnnnnnnnnennnnennnnne nn mnn 88 2 91 I Llassot SEVICE sia o i a eas 88 2 31 2 Dav Timed amp Night Station CO 90 2 31 3 Temporary EE ln Nee 91 2 31 4 Wal
161. O line access code or presses a POOL or LOOP button to place a call the Loop LCR mode is accessed Dialed digits are compared to the Loop LCR codes in the LDT the system will seize a CO IP line from the assigned CO IP Group and sends digits from the DMT 3 Direct COLCR If the user selects a CO IP or CO IP GROUP button the Direct CO LCR mode is accessed If the user dialed number matches a Direct LCR code in the LDT and the seized CO IP line belongs to the assigned Direct CO LCR group the system will send digits modified based on the DMT Operation System Operation of LCR is automatic based on assignments in the system s LCR Tables Conditions 1 There are a total of 6 LCR access mode combinations that can be defined as below 1 LCR Access Mode 00 M00 LCR is disabled 2 LCR Access Mode 01 M01 Loop LCR access is active 3 LCR Access Mode 02 M02 Loop and Internal LCR access are active 4 LCR Access Mode 11 M11 Direct CO and Loop access are active 5 LCR Access Mode 12 M12 Direct CO Loop and Internal LCR access are active seize Co line according to the LCR attributes 6 LCR Access Mode 13 M13 Direct CO Loop and Internal LCR access are active seize CO line according to the station attributes 2 Multiple Leading digit table can be provided for each station CO line 3 Leading digit entries may be duplicated in the Leading Digit Table Using a different LDT Index will make
162. Operation iPECS Phone To save a dialed number while on a CO IP call 1 After dialing and before hanging up press the SAVE button To save a dialed number while on a CO IP call using the LIP 8000 menu 1 After dialing and before hanging up press the RIGHT NAVIGATION button 2 Locate and press the SAVE soft button To dial a saved number 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial To save a dialed number while on a CO IP call using the LIP 8000 menu 1 Press the DIR soft button 2 Press the SPEED soft button 3 Dial Conditions 1 The saved number can be a maximum of 48 digits 2 Dialing the saved number will automatically seize the CO IP line that was used for the original call If the CO IP line is busy a CO IP line from the same group will be selected and the saved number dialed If all CO IP lines from the group are busy the user will receive All Lines busy tone and may queue 3 If user presses the SAVE button after seizing a CO IP line without dialing the Save Number Redial buffer will be erased 4 If there is no CO IP button the call will be presented on a POOL or LOOP button 5 Save Number Redial is protected from power failure 6 Manually dialing a Flash during a CO call will cause only those digits after the Flash to be stored and re dialed as the Save Number Redial Programming 342 iPECS LIK Feature Descri
163. P 4 1 AUTO FAULT DETECTION AND RECOVERY Description If a CO line fault is reported from a PRI VoIP SIP gateway the iPECS places the CO Line in an Out Of Service state and places it in the Unused CO IP Group Upon receiving the CO Line recovery report the CO Line is automatically restored The fault is also reported to the iPECS NMS when configured Operation System Operation of Fault Detection and Recovery is automatic Conditions 1 The Unused CO Group contains CO line numbers that are not used or are temporally blocked Programming CO IP 1 CO Line Group PGM 141 Btn 1 Related Features e CO IP Line Groups Hardware 283 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 2 CO LINE FLASH Description Analog CO lines recognize a brief open or ground connection Flash as a request for new dial tone When used behind a PBX a Flash is often used to activate a PBX feature or call transfer Operation iPECS Phone While connected to an analog CO line 1 Press the FLASH button the system generates a flash on the CO line SLT While connected to an analog CO line 1 Momentarily depress the Hook switch 2 Dial 551 the Flash feature code Conditions 1 Stations may Flash ona CO Line defined for PABX operation and will experience COS dialing restrictions if a PABX Trunk access code is dialed 2 During a Flash the LED for the CO line b
164. P DONWI to see next member MEMBER 02 01223456789 BACK DELETE Press DELETE soft button to remove the current member from conference MEMBER 02 STA 104 BACK DELETE Press BACK soft button to go back to normal conference state CONFERENCE 09 SEP 10 03 32 am CONF VIEW MUTE Conditions 1 Only supervisor of Add_On_Conference can use this feature 2 Only keyset with 3 soft button can use this feature Programming Related Features e Multi Partv Voice Conference Hardware 78 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 24 CUSTOMER SITE NAME Description A Customer Name up to 23 characters may be entered into the system database The name is displayed on the SMDR and database outputs as well as during an Admin session Operation System Operation of this feature is automatic when a name is assigned Conditions Programming SYSTEM ID 1 Customer Site Name PGM 100 Btn 2 Related Features Hardware 79 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 25 DATA LINE SECURITY Description Data transmitted over analog CO lines is subject to distortion and errors if system tones such as Camp On and Override are applied during transmission To eliminate such errors stations that use analog data modems or Fax can be assigned to block incoming system tones Operation System System
165. P lines may be placed in a waiting state such that other stations in the system are able to access the CO IP line Stations must have access to the CO IP line in the system database to access the held call If the call remains on hold at expiration of the System Hold Recall Timer normal Hold Recall will apply Operation iPECS Phone To place a call on System Hold 1 Press the HOLD button To access a call from System Hold 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the CO IP line button Or 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Dial 8 the Held CO IP Call Access code 3 Dial the CO IP line number SLT To place a call on Exclusive Hold 1 Momentarily press the hook switch 2 Dial 560 the System Hold feature code To access a call from System Hold 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 8 the Held CO IP Call Access code 3 Dial the CO IP line number Conditions 1 When a CO IP line is placed on System Hold the button LED will flash at 30 ipm and wink at the holding station and will flash at all other stations 2 Acall on System Hold can be retrieved from any station allowed access to the CO IP line in the system database using the CO IP line button or the Held CO IP call access code 3 The LED of LOOP and POOL buttons will display the CO IP line status 118 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming
166. PECS Phone To Mute the Microphone 1 Press the MUTE button the MUTE button LED is on and the microphone Handset Speakerphone Headset is muted the connected party receives silence To activate the microphone 1 Press the illuminated MUTE button the MUTE button LED is off and the microphone is activated transmitting audio to the connected party Conditions 1 Changing from speakerphone to handset or vice versa during a mute condition will eliminate the mute status 2 Returning to idle or placing another CO IP or intercom call will change the mute status to its normal active microphone condition Programming STATION 1 Headset Ring PGM 111 Btn 8 2 Speakerphone PGM 111 Btn 9 Related Features e Speakerphone e Group Listening e Headset Compatibility Hardware e iPECS Phone 336 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 17 OFF HOOK SIGNALING Description When a station which is off hook receives a call or a CO IP call rings into the system for the off hook station the station will receive the assigned Off hook ring signal or for ICM calls a Camp On Voice Over Announcement or Off hook ring signal may be received The Off hook ring Signal may be either a muted normal ring signal or a single tone burst based on the system assignment This signal is delivered to the iPECS Phone speaker Operation System Operation of Off hook ring signals is automatical
167. Press the DND button the DND button LED illuminates To remove DND 1 Press the DND button the DND button LED extinguishes SLT To activate DND 1 Dial 553 the DND feature code stutter dial tone is received To remove DND 1 Dial 553 the DND feature code dial tone is received Conditions 1 Astation will receive error tone if not allowed access to DND 2 If DND is allowed pressing the DND button while ringing will activate One Time DND 3 Only the Secretary of and Executive Secretary Pair or an Attendant may override DND at the Executive s station An Attendant may cancel DND for other stations DND service is not available to Attendants Recalls for CO IP calls will override the DND feature A station in DND is out of service for all incoming calls including Station Group calls Astation in DND is bypassed by calls forwarded to the station If the last station in a Call Forward chain is in DND the call will ring to the previous station in the chain 9 When calling a station in DND the iPECS Phone display will indicate the DND status CONDO ON P Programming STATION 1 DND PGM 111 Btn 3 Related Features e Feature Cancel e Intrusion e Call Forward e DND Override 97 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 e Executive Secretarv Forward e Station Groups e DND One Time DND Hardware 98 iPECS LIK Feature Description
168. RVISOR BUTTON Description Each Digital station that have flexible button can make FORCED DISCONNECT button PGM Flex button PGM 7 HOLD SAVE In PGM 109 Flex23 New Numbering Plan Forced Seize Busy Stn Co is added By using this button in DKT or By using this Numbering Plan Code in SLT or DKT busy co line can be seized forcedly busy station can be intruded forcedly Operation To activate forced co line disconnect feature 1 Seize CO line 2 The user hears busy tone A In digital phone press Forced Disconnect button B In digital phone press TRANS PGM button and dial Forced Seize Busy Stn Co numbering plan code C In SLT do hook flash and dial Forced Seize Busy Stn Co numbering plan code 3 Busy line goes to idle state forcedly and the user hears a dial tone To activate forced intrusion to a busy station feature 1 Call to busy station 2 The user hears busy tone A In digital phone press Forced Disconnect button B In digital phone press TRANS PGM button and dial Forced Seize Busy Stn Co numbering plan code C In SLT do hook flash and dial Forced Seize Busy Stn Co numbering plan code 251 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 Busy station connected with the user forcedly Conditions 1 SLT user also can use this feature by dialing numbering plan 2 If the station was talking to other station or CO line th
169. Records Hardware e device to capture reports 199 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 71 1 Traffic Analysis Attendant Description The Attendant Traffic Report covers operational statistics for the Attendants The report outputs periodically or the Attendant requests output of the report for a defined Analysis period The following is a sample report and description of the report fields Site Name abc co Report Type Attendant Traffic Report Today Peak Date 06 05 02 08 34 No Hour Total Ans Abdn H Abd Held Avail Talk Held Noans Ans Type 100 13 00 104 82 22 3 0 18 10 12 14 21 01 23 00 52 00 23 Sys 101 13 00 90 72 15 1 0 11 12 43 30 12 00 54 00 23 00 21 Main Field Description ATD No Attendant Station Number Meas Hour Measurement Hour Hour data accumulation began Calls Total Total number of calls except group amp recalls routed to the Attendant Calls Ans Calls Answered Calls answered during the Analysis period Calls Abdn Calls Abandoned Calls abandoned before answer by the Attendant does not include calls abandoned while on hold Call Calls Abandoned from Hold Calls abandoned while on hold H Abdn Calls Held Number of calls placed on hold by the Attendant Time Avail Time Available Time attendant was available to handle new calls Time Talk Total time the Attendant was active on calls Time Held Time Attendant had calls on hold Time Time No Answer Average time call
170. SIP Phone 2 SIP Phone user press Call Forward button and dial destination number 3 The ringing call is forwarded to dialed destination Conditions 1 To follow up call forward for SIP Phone call forward authority should be ON in Station Programming 111 Programming Related Features Hardware 414 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 8 DO NOT DISTURB DND Description LIK System support Do Not Disturb DND by SIP Phone SIP Phone also can utilize Do Not Disturb Feature of System Operation DND setting Authority ON 1 System Admin Station Data Station Attributes 111 113 DND ON DND by SIP Phone 1 3 Party SIP Phone Self Programming 2 LG Ericsson SIP Phone Self Programming w o Provisioning or w Provisioning in which Feature Sync is OFF DND setting by System 1 3 Party SIP Phone Dial DND Feature Code SEND button 2 LG Ericsson SIP Phone Self Programming wl Provisioning in which Feature Sync is ON NOTE With Feature Sync ON DND setting by Self Programming will be notified to system and applied to system s station database By this proprietary implementation system can recognize DND setting of SIP Phone side Also the real DND operation is implemented by system Or Dial DND Feature Code SEND button One Time DND for a Ringing Call 1 Acall is ringing to a SIP Phone 2 SIP Phone user p
171. STEM SPEED DIAL button 1 PGM FLEX SPEED System Speed Dial bin number SAVE To dial using a System Speed Dial using a SPEED button 1 Lift handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the desired bin number iPECS Micro 8 50 amp 100 200 999 IPECS 300 2000 4999 iPECS 600 2000 7999 iIPECS 1200 20000 31999 To dial a Station Speed Dial number using the LIP 8000 series soft buttons 1 Press the DIR soft button 2 Press the SPEED soft button 3 Dial the desired bin number IPECS Micro 8 50 amp 100 200 999 IPECS 300 2000 4999 iPECS 600 2000 7999 iIPECS 1200 20000 31999 SLT To dial using a System Speed Dial 1 Lift handset 2 Dial 558 the SLT Speed Dial access code 3 Dial the desired bin number IPECS Micro 8 50 amp 100 200 999 IPECS 300 2000 4999 iPECS 600 2000 7999 iIPECS 1200 20000 31999 Attendant To program a System Speed Dial number 1 Press the PGM button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the Speed Dial bin number IPECS Micro 8 50 amp 100 200 999 IPECS 300 2000 4999 iPECS 600 2000 7999 4 Press the CO IP LOOP or POOL button or dial the CO IP line group access code 5 Dial the number to be stored 6 Press the SAVE button 7 If desired enter a name see alphanumeric entry chart under Station Speed Dial
172. SYSTEM Description iPECS NMS is a Web based application for monitoring and management of multiple iPECS systems using standard SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol iPECS NMS is an efficient convenient tool employing standards based protocols and a Web based architecture to permit administrators remote access to iPECS systems using any common Web browser iPECS NMS monitors multiple systems displaying real time detailed status information for the system devices and channels iPECS NMS maintains a log of alarm and fault events defined by the administrator and can alert administrators of potential service affecting faults In addition call statistics are maintained and can be reported with various tables and graphs Operation Operation of iPECS NMS is automatic once configured Administrative operations are covered in the iPECS NMS Manual Conditions 1 iPECS NMS is subject to the conditions outlined in the iPECS NMS Manual Programming SYSTEM 1 SNMP Attributes PGM 197 Web only Related Features e Diagnostic Maintenance Hardware 144 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 59 NETWORK SECURITY amp PRIORITY Description Each iPECS device gateway Module or Terminal supports several security and priority protocols iPECS devices incorporate a Web server which will deliver the Module Web Admin pages to a standard browser or the Module Admin may be accessed in the Terminal mo
173. SYSTEM 1 Hold Preference PGM 160 Btn 7 2 Attendant Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 1 3 l Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 5 4 System Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 6 Related Features e Call Transfer CO IP e Hold Preference e Hold Recall e Exclusive Hold Hardware 2 42 5 Automatic Hold Description While on an active CO IP call the system will place the call on hold automatically if the user presses the FLASH CONF DSS BLF or other feature buttons In addition the station can be programmed to support CO IP to CO IP Automatic Hold In this case pressing a CO IP button while on a CO IP call will place the active call on hold and access the selected CO IP line Operation iPECS Phone To use Automatic Hold while on an active CO IP call 1 Press the desired feature button or CO IP the active call is placed in the Preferred Hold state Conditions 1 CO IP lines placed on hold with Automatic Hold are placed in the assigned Preferred Hold 2 There is no limit on the number of calls that can be placed on hold using Automatic Hold Programming STATION 1 Automatic Hold PGM 112 Btn 2 SYSTEM 1 Hold Preference PGM 160 Btn 7 Related Features e Hold Preference e Hold Recall 119 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Hardware e iPECS Phone 120 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 43 HOT DESK Description iPECS Phones ca
174. Station PGM button PGM FLEX PGM 85 MSN digits SAVE CF MSN DIGITS SHOULD EXIST IN ONE OF MSN TABLE ENTRIES Using Station Flexible Button Programming 1 by Keyset Dial 6 MSN BUTTON for Type option input MSN digits and Save 2 by WebAdmin Type LOOP Value MSN digits Print option as an account Code of Call Record PGM177 PRINT MSN ON OFF Conditions 1 If the Called Party Number from the ISDN does not match an MSN Table entry the received digits are treated as defined for DID calls to determine an index to the Flexible DID Table 2 The MSN Table employs the CO Line entry as a quick look up reference If the CO line number is programmed in the MSN Table then only those entries with the CO line number are searched otherwise the entire MSN Table is searched for a match to the Called Party Number 3 When programs MSN loop button the MSN digits should be matched to one entries of MSN pool The button references an index of MSN entries 4 MSN loop button is overwritten by a individual CO line button if it is exist On the other hand MSN loop button is not overwritten by CO Group button Programming STATION 1 MSN Wait PGM 114 Btn 12 2 Flexible Button Assignment PGM 115 305 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 CO IP Lines 1 CO IP Attributes III PGM 143 ISDN ICLID 1 ISDN Attributes I PGM 200 2 MSN Table PGM 202 Related
175. Stn PGM 111 Btn 5 SYSTEM 1 CO Call Automatic Release Timer PGM 180 Btn 12 2 Intercom Call Automatic Release Timer PGM 182 Btn 4 Related Features e Howler Tone Hardware iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 5 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD Description iPECS ACD incorporates flexible incoming call routing real time agent monitoring and supervision and call record statistics as well as ACD Event messages for management reporting Calls route to an ACD group directly or otherwise including via call transfer CCR and ICLID routing 2 5 1 Agents 2 5 1 1 Agent Auto Connect Zap Tone Description Agents using a headset can have calls from enabled ACD groups connected to them automatically This feature removes the requirement for the agent to answer ACD calls manually The Agent receives a short tone Zap Tone if assigned and is then connected to the ACD caller Operation System When Zap tone is enabled operation of this feature is automatic Conditions 1 The station must be in the headset mode for this feature to operate Programming STATION GROUPS 1 ACD Group PGM 191 2 Zap Tone PGM 191 Btn 24 1 Related Features e Station Groups Hardware e iPECS Phone 2 5 1 2 Agent Id Login Logout Description Stations or 4 digit Agent Ids are assigned as members of an ACD group A station or Agent ID can be assigned to a maximum of two 2 ACD groups Each Agent h
176. T 3 P 1 2 5 8 00 19 6000 amp 7000 phones only Auth code Auth code Scenario Data Real time Packet Monitoring Auth Code 1 On 0 Off tel number 1 On 0 Off tel number Once Permanent amp Hour Min 00 20 Msg Room number 1 9 Room number 1 0 OH 1 S 1 S 2 H 3 Both 350 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 71 LCD Display Mode Domestic English 72 Sys version display 73 Select BGM source 0 2 74 User Name registration name 75 Displav Phone IP Address 76 Change IP Address Dot 77 Displav MAC IP Address 78 Change Mode 79 Displav Phone Version T Displav Kev numbers 80 RECORD button 81 ISDN CLIR button 82 ISDN COLR button 83 ACD DND button 84 ACCOUNT CODE button 85 LOOP button 86 INTRUSION button 87 ICM button iPECS phones only 88 CAMP ON button 89 ISDN KEYPAD FACILITY button 8 OHVO button 99 Push To Talk 0 Hot Desk Login Hot Desk Logout 7 Hunt Unconditional forced Call forward 8 Register Bluetooth device 9 Activate Bluetooth device 90 Speed button iPECS phones only 91 Conference button iPECS phones only 92 Callback button iPECS phones only 93 DND button iPECS phones only 94 Flash button iPECS phones only 95 Mute button iPECS phones only 96 Monitor button iPECS phones only 97 Redial button iPECS phones only 98 Call Forward button iPECS phones only 351 iPECS LIK F
177. T CODE buttons may be assigned in the system 3 If an Authorization Code is entered as the Account Code the SMDR record will show the station number or the bin number for a System Authorization Code rather than the user entered Authorization Code Programming NUMBERING 1 Flexible Numbering Plan PGM 106 Btn 8 Related Features e Authorization Codes Password e SMDR Station Message Detail Recording e Station Flexible Buttons Hardware iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 2 ALARM SIGNAL DOOR BELL Description The system can be configured to recognize the status of an external contact normally open or closed The system will signal assigned iPECS Phones when the contact activates This capability is commonly employed to provide remote Alarm or Door Bell signals to the user Assigned stations receive the Alarm Signal either a single tone burst repeated at 1 minute intervals or a continuous tone The Alarm Signal may be terminated at the user s phone by dialing the Alarm Stop code or if assigned pressing the ALARM STOP button To rearm the Alarm function the alarm condition must be cleared and the Alarm signal terminated When used as a Door Bell assigned iPECS Phones receive a single tone burst each time the external contact is activated and no reset is required Operation System At detection of contact operation the Alarm Door Bell signal is sent to assigned stations
178. T Flash works as following option 0 Flash Transfer Flash detected then the line is held and the line goes to waiting state 1 Flash Drop Flash detected and Line is disconnected 2 Flash Ignore Flash detected but Ignored 3 Hold Release Flash detected then the line is held and the line goes to waiting state And the SLT user goes on hook then the held line is disconnected not recalling Operation Conditions Programming 1 PGM 113 SLT Flash Mode Related Features Hardware 397 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 SIP EXTENSION 8 1 REGISTRATION Description iPECS LIK supports standard protocol equipped SIP Phone including series of LG Ericsson SIP Phone Extension Operation SIP Phone Self Programming Network Configuration 1 IP mode Static Fixed DHCP Subnet Mask Default gateway IP address IP address DNS IP address 6 Prifiling for Wireless an A W N SIP Server Configuration 1 Proxy IP address MFIM IP address Proxy IP port 5060 Domain MFIM IP address Registration ON Registration Timer 30 3600 second more than 10 minute recommended Local UDP TCP TLS port 5060 or other value 7 Signaling Transport Mode UDP or TCP or TLS Line User Configuration 1 SIP Account Display Name Optional Station Name this will be applied to MFIM Station Name User Name Mandatory Station Numb
179. TP packets must be relayed through a local VoIP channel A remote device may not be reachable when WAN access for the device is through a firewall or NAPT server In this case the remote devices are assigned a zone to manage RTP traffic between other devices connected in the TNET The zone defines when an individual device requires use of the local VoIP channel Zones are used to identify other group characteristics as outlined in section Remote Device Zone Management Remote sites may include an MFIM operating in the local mode as a live back up to the remote central system Under normal circumstances the central MFIM controls remote devices gateway Modules and terminals including any local MFIM VoIP channels However should the WAN connection between the central system and the remote devices fail the local MFIM will assume the call server responsibility for the local devices The local MFIM thus provides local survivability and based on configuration may provide PSTN back up service Fail over for internal calls that normally route over the WAN Under certain operating conditions this equipment cannot be relied upon to make emergency calls Alternative arrangements should be made for access to the emergency services Operation System Operation of Centralized Network is automatic when configured amp defined Conditions 1 Ina Centralized Network the maximum number of channels available is the maximum number of channels supported by
180. Zone number SAVE To make a page 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the desired paging code or press a PAGE ZONE button 3 If assigned after the Page Warning Tone make announcement 4 Replace the handset and go on hook To queue for a page when busy is received 1 Press the MSG CALLBK button 2 Replace the handset returning to idle 276 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 SLT To make a page 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the desired paging code 3 If assigned after the Page Warning Tone make announcement 4 Replace the handset go on hook To queue for a page when busy tone is received 1 Dial 556 the Call Back code 2 Replace the handset returning to idle Conditions 1 Stations which are denied access to paging will receive error tone when any Page Access code is dialed 2 Stations dialing a Page Code will be queued when any of the other Internal or External Page zones are busy 3 DTMF signals from stations are transmitted through the systems External Page port after access 4 If aniPECS Phone user attempts to page using the speakerphone pre selection will be activated and the display shows LIFT THE HANDSET TO PAGE 5 Stations in DND or busy will not receive Page announcements 6 Stations which are not included in any Internal Page Zone will not receive any page including All Call 7 For external paging an external amplif
181. a n a Redundancy No No Yes Yes Yes Yes SIP channels Same as Same as 200 100 Stations CO system port system port 100 200 500 lines Noles Note 1 The station and CO Line maximums are not simultaneously total ports cannot exceed the specified System Port capacity Note 2 For maximum RSGM connection ports calculation formula is ports available system station ports 2 there must be sufficient VoIP channels to support packet relay for RSGM rtp packets Note 3 Approximately 35 minutes 16 Mbytes of the VSF memory are used to provide basic system prompts the remaining memory can be used for announcements and voice message storage Values in parenthesis are the announcement and storage time available Note 4 Using G 711 codecs 8 VoIP channels are available Due to additional processing needs complex codecs reduce the available channels four 4 channels are available using G 723 or G 729 Note 5 Issue 0 1 2 Support up to 100 channels SIP extension CO trunk simultaneously Issue 3 Support up to 200 channels SIP extension CO trunk simultaneously iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Table 1 2 1 System Capacity Chart Item Capacity iPECS Mi iPECS 50 iPECS 100 iPECS iPECS 600 iPECS 1200 cro MFIM100 300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 MFIM300 VoIP 5 std Std 4 8 6 std 6 std n a n a channels 4 Redundancy No No Yes Yes Yes Yes SIP channels Sa
182. access code Dial the number to be stored Momentarily press the hook switch If desired enter a name see alphanumeric entry chart below 8 Momentarily press the hook switch Alphanumeric characters may be entered to name the Speed Dial number using the chart below Table 2 64 3 1 ALPHANUMERIC DIAL PAD ENTRIES Conditions 1 Accessing an empty Speed Dial bin will return error tone 2 A Speed Dial number can use a specific CO IP Line Group entered by the user If the assigned line is busy a line from the same group will be selected If all lines in the group are busy the user may queue for the next available line All Speed Dial numbers are stored in memory protected from power loss The CO IP line used for a Speed Dial is presented to a direct appearance on the iPECS Phone If there is no direct appearance at the station a POOL or LOOP button is used as the appearance for the line The user may pre select the CO IP line for a Speed Dial number overriding the CO IP line assignment in the Speed Dial bin Aname can be entered for a Speed Dial number to permit access from the Dial by Name directory If a Speed Dial number contains a Dial Tone Detect command Flash as the first entry in the bin and dial tone detect is enabled for the CO line the system must detect dial tone before dialing the Speed Dial number 159 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5
183. ages are available pressing 1 or 2 is an invalid operation and the user receives the Invalid Entry prompt or No Message prompt 2 If the dialed number is not recognized the Invalid Entry prompt is played After the second invalid entry the user is disconnected 3 The user may dial digits at any time during a voice mail playback system prompt or silence The user must dial a digit in response to a system prompt within the CCR Analysis timer or the system will disconnect and return error tone 4 Messages can be retrieved in either a FIFO First in First out or LIFO Last in First out order to meet the desire of each user 5 In Admin VSF is used as the single reference for a parameter that applies to both the VSF and the VMIM 6 If user set auto save new message and hear new message it s saved automatically Programming STATION 1 Retrieve Message Order PGM 113 Btn 13 2 Auto save new message PGM 161 Btn 24 11 Related Features e Message Retrieval Options e Remote Message Retrieval e Multiple Voice Mailbox Support Hardware e VSF and or VMIM 2 73 3 3 Remote Message Retrieval Description The system permits remote users access to their mailbox After accessing the VMIM VSF Voice Mail operation follows the local procedures Operation Remote Caller To access Voice Mailbox from a remote location 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the telephone number of a DISA assigned CO line assigned for
184. ages have been received in the associated mailbox 3 The Flex button cannot be assigned to access the mailbox of a networked station 4 An adjunct Voice Mail may not provide proper notification to the system of message status and thus the VMAILBOX button LED may not properly indicate new messages Programming Related Features e External Auto Attendant Voice Mail e VMIM VSF Voice Mail Hardware e iPECS Phone e External or VMIM VSF Voice Mail 141 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 57 MOH MUSIC ON HOLD Description When a call is placed in a hold state the system will deliver audio from the defined MOH source In this way the connected user can determine that the connection is still active The system has connections for up to two music sources The first BGM1 can be either internal or external source connected to either of the BGM1 inputs The second source BGM2 requires connection of an external source Either source BGM1 or BGM2 can be assigned to provide MOH In addition to the BGM1 amp 2 a message recorded in the VMIM VSF can be employed as MOH The Attendant records the VMIM VSF announcement for MOH and VSF MOH is assigned as the MOH source Separate messages can be recorded for each of the 3 languages supported by the system Also SLTM Port can be employed as MOH Maximum 5 SLTM port can be configured as a SLTM MOH Operation System Operation of MOH is
185. al mailboxes e Copv Urgent Only Copy Cascades only those messages marked urgent e Move Immediatelv Move Cascading begins immediately allowing storage of duplicate messages in several mailboxes e Move Urgent Only Move Cascades only those messages marked urgent Conditions 1 A mailbox can only have 1 cascade mailbox destination 2 Mailbox messages are retained in each mailbox Programming e Station Attribute PGM 127 e Cascade Mailbox mailbox number e Cascade type Disable Copv Immediatelv Copy Urgent Move Immediatelv Move Urgent Related Features Hardware 2 73 10 Class of Service Settings Description The system shall provide administrative options to create COS These COS can then be assigned to stations mailboxes on an individual basis This will allow these parameters Operation The system shall provide 5 COS settings 1 5 Each COS has the following items that can be programmed 1 Greeting length 00 99 seconds 60 seconds default 2 Message length 000 600 seconds 0 default 0 VSF User Max Rec Tmr PGM181 3 3 Number of messages 00 250 0 default 0 Number of message is the same as svstem capacitv 4 Retention time 00 99 days 0 days default From Time Set PGM191 1 227 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 E mail notification Disable Notification only Notification and Delete default Notification and Delete 6 Future del
186. aling digits are same as MAX DIGIT then SIP outgoing call established directly 4 So user need not wait until inter digit timer expiring ISDN Prefix Call ISDN enblock Dialing with Prefix Call Setup in Russia 1 Outgoing Call is established with ISDN Co line 2 Outgoing digits are matched with prefix code 3 If total dialing digits are same as MAX DIGIT then ISDN outgoing call is established directly So user need not wait until inter digit timer expiring 4 If total dialing digits are less than MAX DIGIT then ISDN outgoing call is established after inter digit timer expiring 5 If total dialing digits are less than MIN DIGIT then ISDN outgoing call is not established although prefix code is matched 6 When ISDN setup is established Num Of Type Numbering Plan Sending Complete option is applied Conditions 1 If outgoing dialing digits are not matched with prefix code this feature is not working 2 Table ID is used commonly at three feature 247 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 In case of Analog Call Charge related program fields are Prefix Code Call Charge Type Call Charge time 4 In case of SIP direct outgoing related program fields are Prefix Code Max Digit 5 Incase of ISDN enblock dialing related program fields are Prefix Code Min Digit Max Digit Num Of Type Num Plan Sending Complete Programming 1 PGM 206 Prefix Dialing Table 2 PGM 142
187. all will apply 116 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation iPECS Phone To place a call on Exclusive Hold 1 Press the HOLD button twice To access a call on Exclusive Hold from the holding station 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the held CO IP line Or 1 Dial 8 the Held CO IP Call Access code 2 Dial the CO IP line number SLT To place a call on Exclusive Hold 1 Momentarily press the hook switch To access a call on Exclusive Hold from the holding SLT 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 8 the Held CO IP Call Access code 3 Dial the CO IP line number Conditions 1 When a COI IP line is placed on Exclusive Hold the button LED will flash at 120 ipm at the holding station and will be On at all other stations 2 All Transferred CO IP calls are placed on Exclusive Hold for the receiving station 3 The LED of LOOP and POOL buttons will display the CO IP line status Programming SYSTEM Hold Preference PGM 160 Btn 7 Attendant Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 1 Exclusive Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 4 l Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 5 Transfer Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 7 ak Ga h Related Features e Call Transfer CO IP e Hold Preference e Hold Recall e System Hold Hardware 117 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 42 4 System Hold Description CO I
188. all Waiting Camp On e Group Listening e Voice Over e Pre defined amp Custom Text Display Messages Hardware e iPECS Phone 344 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 23 SPEAKERPHONE Description iPECS Phones equipped with speakerphone circuitry enable the telephone to be used hands free in two way conversations Operation iPECS Phone To activate the speakerphone 1 Press the SPEAKER button SPEAKER LED lights steady To switch from Handset to Speakerphone 1 Press the SPEAKER button SPEAKER LED lights steady 2 Replace Handset Speakerphone activated To terminate a speakerphone call 1 Press the SPEAKER button SPEAKER LED extinguishes Conditions 1 If Automatic Speaker Select is enabled for the station pressing a DSS CO LOOP POOL IP or Speed Dial button will automatically activate the speakerphone 2 The MUTE button LED indicates the status of the Microphone when lit the Microphone is inactive 3 When Group Listen is enabled pressing the SPEAKER button while using the handset will send audio to both the Handset and Speaker However only the Handset microphone is active In order to activate the Speakerphone Microphone the Handset must be placed on hook 4 Each iPECS Phone equipped with Speakerphone is allowed denied Speakerphone operation in the system database 5 When Headset operation is assigned for the station the Speakerphon
189. all count start time 05 01 02 09 31 Current time 26 04 02 16 32 Total Lost call count until now 121 Operation System Attendant To print the summary Lost Call Count report 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 0115 the Lost Call Count report code 175 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 Press the SAVE button To reset the Lost Call summary Count 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 0116 the Lost Call Count Reset code 3 Press the SAVE button Conditions 1 When the Lost Call Count is reset the SMDR port will provide a count reset message 2 Individual Lost Call records are only available in real time and not on demand 3 Print Incoming Calls and Print Lost Calls must be enabled in the SMDR Attributes for the system to output real time Lost Call records and for the Lost Call Count summary report 4 The fields of a Lost Call Record are the same as a normal SMDR Call Record Programming SYSTEM 1 SMDR Attributes PGM 177 Related Features e Call Cost Display e SMDR Call Records e Traffic Analysis Hardware e RS 323 device to capture SMDR 176 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 69 SYSTEM ADMIN PROGRAMMING 2 69 1 Keyset Administration Description The system database can be accessed and modified with the keypad and Flex buttons of an iPECS Phone The display of the iPECS Pho
190. alled VMIM board If the correct slot number is dialed the system will prompt enter system greeting number 223 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 The user enters 001 072 The system will prompt to record greeting Once recorded the system will allow re record option Operation Procedure 1 When user dials the digit for VMIB greeting recording in CCR menu or Flexible DID Table menu system prompts enter password prompt User enters system main attendant s telephone number password If there are two or more over VMIM boards Enter slot number is played User enters 3 digits of VMIM board slot number Enter system greeting number is played User enters 3 digits system greeting number 001 072 Enter language type 1 6 is played CON DON BW bh To record a new greeting press pound is played And then if there is a recorded greeting the greeting is played 9 User dials f 10 Start recording after the tone When you are finished press pound is played and confirm tone is heard 11 User records the greeting and dials to finish 12 Svstem goes to step 5 above So Enter system greeting number is played 13 User can hang up Conditions Programming e Anew CCR digit in PGM 228 entry will be added This value will be 14 It can be assigned to any DTMF digit in a CCR menu e Anew Flexible DID Table in PGM 231
191. an be utilized by the MFIM itself without BLF manager or with BLF manager software based on the programming setting Operation With BLF Manager S W 1 The BLF manager software periodically receives the status of station from whole system notice UDP port will be used to send the status information and TCP port will be used to send other information The BLF manager software sends the broadcast message to whole system when the status is changed The network DSS button will be updated according to the PGM 321 5th Duration of BLF Status 193 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Without BLF Manger S W 1 According to PGM 324 Btn 6 and 7 System sends BLF information to opposite networked MFIM IP address and port The network DSS button will be updated according to the PGM 321 5th Duration of BLF Status Conditions 1 If BLF manger S W is used for BLF Presentation the BLF manager should be installed at one system for completely networked systems 2 The number of Net DSS can be restricted according to the capability of each system 3 When a flexible button on a station is assigned as the NET DSS button of another system the system serves as local BLF to indicate the status of the station 4 CO BLF is not supported and also ringing signal does not update a status of that station ICM CO Transfer CO Recall ring 5 When a station is in DND mode the NET DSS
192. answer by a VMIM VSF Auto Attd 3 Upon answer dial to receive the Request for Mail Box number prompt 212 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 Follow local access procedures Conditions 1 The conditions associated with Message Retrieval and Message Retrieval Options apply 2 The conditions associated with DISA apply 3 In Admin VSF is used as the single reference for a parameter that applies to both the VSF and the VMIM Programming Related Features e Message Retrieval Options e VMIM VSF Auto Attendant e Message Retrieval Hardware e VSF and or VMIM 2 73 3 4 Message Retrieval Options Description The user may dial the digit 9 to receive the VM long Options prompt while in the Voice Mailbox including during or after a voice message or system prompt except when an option has been selected that requires user dialing The later may occur when the user selects Message Retrieval Option 1 2 Play New Saved Message 7 Cancel or Forward message for Remote Access Only or 8 Mail Box settings The VM long Options prompt is To play new messages press one to play saved messages press two to set station forwarding press seven This option is available only for remote access to set greeting or password press eight to disconnect press pound Press 0 for the operator Press nine to hear this message again The VMIM VSF Voice Mail will respond to i
193. appearance button available When several calls are ringing simultaneously Call Pick up will connect the oldest highest priority call Ringing Line Preference PGM 173 Queue callback and Private Line calls are not subject to Call Pick up and such attempts receive error tone Handsfree announced intercom calls cannot be picked up by another station Only ringing intercom calls are subject to Call Pick up When a station belongs to multiple pick up groups calls to the group with the lowest number are answered first It can be picked up by pressing flex button of associate station if it s programmed ON at ADM 114 B20 Programming STATION GROUPS 1 Pick Up Group PGM 192 Btn 1 STATION 1 Pick up bv Button PGM 114 Btn 20 SVSTEM 1 Ringing Line Preference Prioritv PGM 173 Related Features Intercom Signaling Mode Ringing Line Preference Directed Call Pick Up Pick Up Group Private Line Hardware 57 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 16 AUTO CALL RECORDING Description iPECS Phone users can be configured in the system to record all calls to a mailbox or the hard disk drive of an iPECS Phontage or UCS Client When recorded to a mailbox users manage the recording through voice mail For recordings to the Phontage or UCS Client recordings are managed directly by Phontage or UCS Client with the ability to listen to delete or send the recording to others via
194. ark a message for confirmation of delivery When the user has listened to the sent message a message is dropped in the sender mailbox confirming listen receipt Operation After replying to a message recording a message the following options will be played For regular delivery press 1 To mark urgent press 2 To mark private press 3 To mark urgent and private press 4 To request delivery receipt of the message for future press 5 Once the user has listened to a message that has been marked for receipt the user that marked the message will get a new message in their mailbox When they access this message a prompt will state message for XXXX mailbox was listened to on HH MM MM DD This message is then treated a normal VM and all options apply Conditions 1 This option is only played to the mailbox owner if the mailbox COS allows it 231 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming Related Features Hardware 232 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 74 WAKE UP ALARM ONE TIME WAKE UP ALARM Description This feature allows a user or Attendant to set a wake up time or desired time to be alerted When the time is reached the system will signal with an audible and visual signal Operation Attendant To register Wake Up 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 044 Attendant Station Program code 3 Dial the desired statio
195. as a unique 4 digit Agent Id used to login and logout of active ACD group participation Agents can login from any station iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 in the system but only at one station When an Agent logs in any active login for the Agent is terminated and the new login is honored An Agent may login to two 2 groups at one time logging into and out of the primary and secondary group separately Operation Agent iPECS Phone To assign LOGIN or LOGOUT buttons 1 PGM FLEX Login or Logout code ACD Group Number optional SAVE To Login to a primary group using the Agent Id 1 Lift handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Dial 581 the ACD Agent Primary Login code or press the Login Flex button 3 Dial the ACD group number 4 Dial the Agent ID the agent is logged into the ACD group To Logout of the primary ACD Group 1 Lift handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Dial 582 the ACD Agent Primary Logout code or press the Logout Flex button 3 Dial the ACD group number 4 Dial the Agent ID the agent is logged into the ACD group To Login to a secondary group using the Agent ld 1 Lift handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Dial 583 the ACD Agent Secondary Login code or press the Login Flex button 3 Dial the ACD group number 4 Dial the Agent ID the agent is logged into the ACD group To Logout of the secondary ACD Group 1 Lif
196. at is set Net Call Forward to a station of another node The call is routed to a forwarded station when the called station does not answer within a No Answer timer and the forwarded station is ringing 4 Answer the ringing at forwarded station The calling and forwarded station can make a conversation To deactivate Net Call Forward 1 Press the FWD button when it is flashing The FWD button will be extinguished Conditions 1 If both of served and diverted to stations are located in the same system the networking path will be cleared That is the forwarded call will be setup as intercom call 2 System does not check the status of diverted to station that is in DND CFW or Empty Admin Programming SYSTEM 1 Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 2 Networking Supplementary Attribute PGM 321 BTN 1 3 Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 4 Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 191 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 70 2 12 CO Transit In Description The incoming DID call can reroute to the net call destination that is in another system Operation 1 ADID call is arrived from PX There is no limit for selecting DID conversion type According to the result of DID conversion the call will be routed 2 Network CO line is seized automatically and the call is transfer to the network destination The destination receives the ringing with CLI from PX The outside user
197. ated from Monday to Saturday 4 Mon Sun Alarm will be activated every day Operation To register wake up time alarm from a Station perform the following steps 1 Press the ITRANS PGMI button Dial 4 1 Enter wake up time id 1 5 Dial the desired 2 digit hour 24 hour mode then 2 digit minute for alerting Enter wake up type 1 4 ona Ff WwW NY ff wake up type is 1 YY MM DD enter wake up date 2 digits for year 2 digits for month and 2 digits for day 7 Press the HOLD SAVE button To erase a wake up time from a Station perform the following steps 1 Press the ITRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 4 2 3 Enter wake up time id 1 5 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To register a wake up time alarm from the Attendant Station perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGN button 2 Dial 0 4 4 3 Dial the station range to be alerted If a single station is to receive the alarm enter instead of a second station number 4 Dial the desired 2 digit hour 24 hour mode then 2 digit minute for alerting 5 Enter wake up type 1 4 6 If wake up type is 1 YY MM DD enter wake up date 2 digits for year 2 digits for month and 2 digits for day 7 Press the HOLD SAVE button 235 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 To erase a wake up alarm from the Attendant Station perform the following Steps
198. ateway K B rie r l 8 EEN 100 004953159330 132164 150 94 LO ON Unicast ECK Me zis r 3 IEOS aw 100 emm miam L OFF Muscast msa 310 LF IECH VCOLGw 19 te III L OFF Muicast Mei l UHN T ur r Rearing Ei r OVW Answer Response UN eg KA r RTP Diversion Method EI Wang SP Channel Mode Proxy Fega Weg 12809 r Prony Server UDP Port Soss Poet e Proxy Server TCP Port ma 1 Poa r Prony Server TLS Port ECH Pon r Registaton UND Pange 1 al 1 Max 600 Enetes r Fall Over Usage ON r Media Poa l 8009 11600 I UDP Por Secondary Proxy Server l Le Ted andane Pervu Sener Afifiresa f 1 IP AAtrece 3 Unregister VCOL SIP Data PGM 133 set Virtual SIP Channel Mode to No state is set to disconnected automatically RTP Diversion Method is automatically set to Recursing CO VoIP Mode in PGM 141 is set to COMMON automatically You can replace type MAC and IP address for other physical CO slot module vs ern Rec mm E Di Answer Response WI usg M we ATP Diversicn Method Nem Recurmng W a Mitual S Channel Mode Proxy Server UOP Port Bose Pon r Fe Proxy Server TCP Port ESCH Port IT Proxy Server TLS Pon Il mee Por r Registration EI Range l KT Si H i Max 600 Entries tr OTMF Tyee agoe RELAY E Fai Over Usage ON 38 r Media Port goo l fweoo Ve Pon Secondary Proxy Server r Secondary Proxy
199. ation Operation iPECS Phone To assign a CALL COVERAGE button at the covering station 1 PGM FLEX 67 covered Station number SAVE To activate Call Coverage at the covered station 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 141 the Call Coverage code 3 Dial 1 to enable or 0 to disable Call Coverage To assign ring fora CALL COVERAGE button 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 142 the Call Coverage Ring code 3 Dial the delay in ring cycles 0 9 When a covered station receives a call the covering station will receive the following display CALL FOR STA xxxx FROM yyyy time Conditional Operation by Administrative Attributes 1 Call Coverage On Busy OFF Call Coverage is implemented when a covered station is on idle state ON Call Coverage is implemented when a covered station is on idle or busy state 2 Call Coverage Through Mobile Ext OFF Call Coverage Ring is not delivered to Mobile Extension ON Call Coverage Ring is not delivered to Mobile Extension 3 Call Coverage On Busy Range External Call Only Call Coverage only for external call when covered station is busy 164 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 External and Internal Call Call Coverage both for external amp internal call when covered station is busy Call Coverage Delay Ring Method by Originator
200. ation to receive the transfer 3 At answer or splash tone announce the call 4 Hang up to complete the transfer 1 Press the DSS BLF button for the desired station 2 At answer or splash tone announce the call 3 Hang up to complete the transfer While on a CO IP call Unscreened Call Transfer 1 Press TRANS button 2 Dial the station to receive the transfer 3 Hang up to complete the transfer Or 1 Press the DSS BLF button for the desired station 2 Hang up to complete the transfer SLT While on a CO IP call Screened Call Transfer 1 Momentarily depress the hook switch 2 Dial the station to receive the transfer 3 At answer or splash tone announce the call 4 Hang up to complete the transfer While on a CO IP call Unscreened Call Transfer 1 Momentarily depress the hook switch 2 Dial the station to receive the transfer 59 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 Hang up to complete the transfer Conditions 1 The transferring station may camp a call on to a busy station 2 The LED of a LOOP or POOL button will display the status of a call until the station no longer has call supervision i e the call is successfully transferred 3 To prevent Toll abuse CO IP lines without an active call either incoming or dialed digits on outgoing cannot be transferred 4 For outgoing CO Line calls the system will monitor the CO Line for dial tone
201. ature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Conditions 1 The ICM button provides an appearance for the transferred station The LED indicates status and pressing the button connects to the station 2 If the receiving station is busy the transferring station may camp the call on to the busy station see Camp On 3 A station in DND or out of service cannot receive a transfer and such attempts will result in error tone Programming Related Features e Exclusive Hold e Hold Recall e Call Waiting Camp On e DND Do Not Disturb e Call Transfer Hardware 267 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 9 MESSAGE WAIT CALL BACK 3 9 1 CLI Message Wait Description When an iPECS Phone with display receives an external call with Calling Line Identification and the call is abandoned disconnects before answer the system will generate a call log with the Caller Identification date and time The user may employ this log to review and if desired return the call An iPECS Phone user may assign a CLI MESSAGE WAIT button with direct access to the CLI Message Wait list The button LED flashes at 30 ipm to indicate a CLI Message Waiting Operation iPECS Phone To assign a CLI MESSAGE WAIT button 1 PGM FLEX PGM 32 SAVE To review CLI Messages 1 Press the CLI MESSAGE WAIT button the first CLI message is displayed 2 Press the VOL UP VOL DOWN butto
202. automatic To record a VMIM VSF announcement for MOH 1 Press the PGM button Dial 06 the VMIM VSF Record code Dial the VMIM VSF device Sequence number Dial the VMIM VSF MOH Announcement number 71 Dial the Language number only required with multi language support The current announcement is played followed by the Press to record prompt 6 Dial 7 After the beep tone record message a A O N 8 Press the SAVE button to stop recording and save the message Conditions 1 The internal source is provided as MOH when MOH Source 0 is selected in the system database 2 The BGM1 RCA jack on the front panel of the MFIM and the BGM1 input via the rear panel RJ 11 jack are common The external music source should only be connected to one of the inputs 3 Only VMIM VSF announcement number 71 may be used for the MOH message The iPECS 50 only has a single MOH BGM source input 5 The iPECS Micro only has a single virtual MOH BGM source input KR Programming CO LINE 1 MOH PGM 142 Btn 6 142 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 SYSTEM 1 MOH Type PGM 171 Btn 2 RSGM 1 MOH Type PGM 434 Btn 1 Related Features e Hold e Back Ground Music e Multiple Language Support Hardware e External Music source connected to MFIM music source input 143 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 58 NETWORK MANAGEMENT
203. b only H323 VoIP Attributes SIP Gateway Attributes CO Service Type PGM140 ISDN DID Remove Digit Count PGM 143 Btn 5 DID Conversion Type PGM 145 DID DISA Busy Destination PGM 167 Btn 1 DID DISA Error Destination PGM 167 Btn 2 DID DISA No Answer Timer PGM 181 Btn 2 CCR Audio Text Tables PGM 228 Flexible DID Table PGM 231 292 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 10 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS DISA Description Each CO IP path may be assigned for DISA service which allows an incoming caller to gain access to the system resources and or features The iPECS will answer the outside call and provide the user intercom dial tone or route the call based on the VMIM VSF Auto Attendant announcement settings where Caller Controlled Routing may be defined The DISA caller may then access the desired resource using dial codes If an Authorization Code is required for DISA access when the system answers an incoming DISA call DND Warning tone is provided to indicate an Authorization Code must be entered Operation System Incoming call subject to DISA service 1 Recognize incoming call 2 Answer call and connect caller to Intercom dial tone or AA announcement 3 Process call based on received digits programming DISA Caller To access the system s resources from an external party 1 Place call to DISA facility of the system 2 At receipt of Intercom dial ton
204. be used with Walking COS 93 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming STATION 1 Station COS PGM 116 CO IP 1 CO COS PGM 141 Btn 2 SYSTEM 1 DISA COS PGM 166 2 PBX Trunk Access Codes PGM 172 3 LD Digit Count PGM 177 Btn 4 4 LD Digit Code PGM 177 Btn 19 TABLES 1 Toll Restriction PGM 224 2 Authorization Codes Table PGM 227 Related Features e Class of Service e Auto Service Mode Control e Day Night Timed Scenario Ring Mode e Authorization Codes Password Hardware 94 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 32 DIFFERENTIAL RING Description Differential Ring allows any one of 14 different audible Ring signals to be assigned to an iPECS Phone allowing users to determine which phone is ringing and the type of call Intercom or CO IP When the phone receives an incoming call the selected ring signal is provided over the speaker Different selections are assigned for Intercom and CO IP calls Eight different tones are stored in the iPECS Phone Four of these tones are permanent while the other four are assigned from the 10 ring tones in the iPECS system Note the system ring tones may be replaced with any 8 second wav file through the iPECS Web Maintenance Operation iPECS Phone To select the desired ring tone 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 1 for Ring Selection 3 Dial 1 for Intercom or 2 for CO
205. ber Information Element These additional digits allow the system to ring a specific station in the MSN pool of phone numbers iPECS Micro iPECS 50 and MFIM100 250 MFIM300 500 MFIM600 1000 and MFIM1200 1500 When MSN or Sub address information is received the system references the MSN Table for an index to the Flexible DID Table which determines call routing In addition the MSN pool can be utilized for multiple calling number of station If a station is assigned a loop button that references a specific MSN entry the specific MSN will be served 304 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 as a Calling number of the station when make an outbound call over ISDN or SIP using the assigned button Operation System Inbound Call Automatic by programming of Called Telephone Number and Index of Flexible DID Table in MSN pool Outbound Call Press the assigned MSN Loop Button and dial over ISDN or SIP The assigned MSN telephone number will be served for calling number And it is recorded by account code of call in SMDR Programming MSN Table Entries PGM 202 Called Telephone Number Calling Number Digits Mandatory CO Line Range Utilization is Optional Only the specified CO lines are employed when make an outbound call using a MSN button if CO line range is specified If CO line range is not specified then it employs CO lines as same method as normal loop button does Button Assignment Using
206. bers receive the Conference Group call To enter a Conference Group call 1 Answer the ringing call and receive recorded announcement if assigned and recorded 2 Dial 1 to enter the conference or hang up to reject the conference For iPECS Phontage or UCS clients use Accept or Deny when notified of the conference To monitor member conference status or delete members while in the conference 1 Press the Monitor flex button the state of the first member is displayed 2 Press VOL UP VOL DWN button to display the state of other members 3 Press the DND button to delete a participant from the conference To monitor the Group member conference status while Not in the conference 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 55 the Monitor Conference Group code 3 Press VOL UP VOL DWN button to display the state of other members 76 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 To add a non member to the Group 1 Press the HOLD button to place the conference on hold 2 Call the desired party 3 Press the CONF button Conditions 1 The conditions associated with Multi Party Voice Conference apply 2 Members using the iPECS Phontage or UCS client may view the state of other members in the conference 3 The number of available groups is given in Table 1 2 1 System Capacity Chart Each group can have up to 32 members including the supervisor 4 The user must have access to
207. bute Company Directory First Name and Last Name System will search an entry only among those who have recorded the subscriber name Ifa match is found the system will play transferring to programmed namef and transfer the call to the station Call will be transferred once the prompt is finished If more than one match is found the system will play for subscriber name press 1 for subscriber name press 2 for subscriber name press 9 When the caller enters the desired digit the system will route the caller to that station Conditions 1 To be searched in company directory subscriber name must be recorded And the first and last name also should be programmed properly Programming A new table PGM 127 First Name Last Name will be created in the station database It will contain first name and last name for each VMIB mailbox This table will be updated by the system administrator 222 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Flexible Number for Company Directory Name will be added to record the name of a person It can be dialed from an extension to record the name And the recorded name will be played for name search and during call transfer Anew CCR digit in PGM 228 entry will be added This value will be 13 and represent a directory request It can be assigned to any DTMF digit in a CCR menu A new Flexible DID Table in PGM 231 entry will be added Thi
208. by default 6 18 r e ew SEA m w n ag ON Unicast ato MIS E eeng 2450 138 moam aooo ON Unicast aoo wla r EE me mme 0080 JON Unicast mm slaj r oiana 18 mom aooo ol Unicast aoo als r SSC ia wem aaoo JON Unicast ao ajaj r MECA asp 8 mom aaoo ON Unicast aoo alul r eet asp 138 mow 15015215026 ON Unicast mm P IE IK 138 Gta Teasibed 190 150 150 29 FI Ee ao Er x 18 Unicast 0 000 Era Son Ranae J C Jroa Lae tea li Atribute Valae Range 1 r Registering Mode Register MW 2 Registration Status Rogiero 3 IP Address ET 4 E Port iei s TRANSPORT e 6 e SIP Phone Type f i 7 Id 8 e Registration Timer Usage OFF 38 E r Registration Timer ben 2 200 sec i in A Kaen Alive liraaa ner w 6 DTMF Outband signaling by default you can set this to INBAND or 2833 in PGM 211 DTMF TYPE If DTMF type is set to INBAND or 2833 then VOIP RTP relay channel is utilized automatically when voice connection is established nr Retry Count 3 10 SSLE 407 Authentication LOFF FI ral 161 Being Forwarded OFF SCH E 14 i Wd Support T TORF si reir Session Timer Supot OFF m SI Max Session Timer 1800 160 3600 sec win Min Session Timer foo 0 150 sec wir Same Network with MFIM OFF m MIT SATP Usage Torr wa IST CRYPTO
209. ce Mode Control e Back Ground Music e Station User Programming Codes Hardware e iPECS Phone 368 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 6 CABINET ALARM Description The Cabinet Alarm alerts the Attendant of a fault in the fans or power supplies in a cabinet The alarm notification displays the cabinet number The cause of the fault cabinet fan PSU or PSU fan is shown on the Cabinet Attributes Web Admin page PGM 197 The alert may be terminated at the Attendant s phone by dialing the Alarm Stop code or if assigned pressing the ALARM STOP button Operation When an alarm condition occurs the Attendant phone will display CABINET XXX STS FAULT System Attendant To assign a Flex button as an ALARM STOP button to terminate the Alarm Signal 1 PGM FLEX 565 SAVE To terminate an Alarm Signal while idle 1 Dial the Alarm Stop code 565 confirmation tone is received and the display returns to normal Or 1 Press the ALARM STOP button Conditions 1 The PSU serial port must be connected to the gateway Module or MFIM identified in the Cabinet Attributes Web Admin page PGM 197 2 If the PSU is connected to a WTIM refer to the Description and Installation Manual for proper DIP switch settings DIP switch 3 must be set to the Off position 3 The notification identifies the cause of the alarm as FAN1 or FANZ for the Main cab
210. cement if any and can enter the conference dial 1 or reject the conference hang up The system will attempt to contact a busy or no answer member based on the assigned Retry Count A call is consider no answer using the no answer timer set when the group was created 75 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation To create a conference group from the iPECS User Portal 1 Access Station Program in the Web Admin 2 Select Conference Group button 3 Create the Conference group entering e The name of group up to 12 character e The password Passwords must be 5 digits e Announcement number for the group pre recording the announcement is required e The Absent Supervisor timer s The No answer timer e The busy no answer Retry count e The Interval time Each member is called in turn at expiration of the interval timer 4 Set the Member Attributes by entering e Index number e Type Station Individual CO CO group loop or Transit out code access loop for networking call e The CO value the supervisor wants to select a specific CO line or CO group e Dial number The station number or Co dial number iPECS phone To assign a GRP MONITOR button 1 PGM FLEX PGM 55 SAVE To initiate a Conference Group call 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 68xxx the Group Conference code and group number 3 Enter the Conference group password if assigned mem
211. conds after which the station is removed from the queue the queue is cancelled 68 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming STATION 1 CO IP Queuing PGM 112 Btn 5 Related Features e CO IP Access Hardware 69 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 23 CONFERENCE 2 23 1 Conference Room Description In addition to ad hoc conferencing users may establish a Conference Room Other internal and external parties are invited to the conference and can join the conference without further action by the user who established the Conference Room A user can transfer an active call to a Conference Room A Conference Room can be password protected so that only parties that enter the password are allowed to join the Room Up to 9 Conference Rooms can be set up and each can support a maximum of 32 parties with the g 711 or g 729 codec or 24 parties with the g 723 codec Conference Rooms employ channels from an MCIM Multi party Conference Interface Module Each MCIM supports up to 32 parties and multiple MCIM units may be installed as shown in the chart below iPECS Micro 1 MCIM unit maximum iPECS 50 amp 100 2 MCIM units maximum iPECS 300 4 MCIM units maximum iPECS 600 8 MCIM units maximum iPECS 1200 30 MCIM units maximum Operation Attendant Phone To view Room participant list 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 054 3 Dial Room number 1
212. cription amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 14 EMERGENCY CALL ATTENDANT ALERT Description When a station places a call to an Emergency number the attendant receives an emergency call alert The alert includes an alert tone and display of the emergency call information which continues until the Attendant resets the alert The information includes the calling station number time and date The system stores the most recent emergency calls up to 16 The Attendant can review the history at any time To control atctivation or de activation Emergency call Attendant alert feature configure the option at PGM 161 Operation System Operation of the alert is automatic Attendant To assign a Flex button as an ALARM STOP button to terminate the alert 1 PGM FLEX 565 SAVE To terminate an alert signal while idle 1 Dial the Alarm reset Code 565 confirmation tone is received and the Alert terminates Or Press the ALARM STOP button To view the Emergency Call History at the System Attendant phone 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the PGM button 3 Dial 08 the Emergency Log code The display shows the first emergency call logged in the history EMERGENCY STA NO XXXX MM DD HH MM xx 4 Press the VOL UP and VOL DOWN buttons to scroll through the call history 5 If you review a history then the item will be mared as below EMERGENCY STA NO XXXX MM DD HH
213. cted VoIP party must transmit DTMF digits in the mode selected in the system database otherwise the DTMF digits will not be recognized Programming Related Features Hardware 300 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 15 ISDN INTEGRATED SERVICE DIGITAL NETWORK Description The iPECS system supports both BRI Basic Rate Interface and PRI Primary Rate Interface ISDN circuits Both North American standard 23B 1D channel and ETSI 30B 2D channel configurations are supported through the selection of the gateway Module the T1 PRI supports NA standards while the PRIM supports the ETSI standards 4 15 1 ISDN AOC Advice of Charge Description When ISDN Advice of Charge service is provided from the ISDN the iPECS system will deliver charge information for display in the LCD of iPECS Phones and include the AOC in SMDR records AOC is implemented in accordance with ETSI ISDN AOC Specifications Operation System ETSI standard AOC operation is automatic Conditions 1 AOC information which is implemented based on ETSI AOC standard can be sent during call set up AOC S during the call AOC D or at the end of call AOC E 2 This feature may not be available in the specific ISDN service area or may be a subscription service Programming SYSTEM 1 SMDR attributes PGM 177 CO IP 1 Advice of Charge PGM 143 Btn 9 Related Features e SMDR Station Message Detail Recording e
214. d 3 Dial 42 the erase Wake up code 4 Hook flash a conformation tone is provided Conditions 1 In cases where a remote device is installed the time display in the remote terminal is adjusted by the Device Zone assignment Thus the Wake up alarm time is based on the time displayed on the phone and not the system time 2 When receiving a wake up signal lifting the handset will return MOH 3 The Wake up alarm Ring signal is 30 seconds On 90 seconds Off repeated 3 times If no action is taken by the user the ring signal is given to the Attendant with a display designating the station number that did not respond 4 Time hh mm must be entered in the Military 24 hour format 5 The daily alarm will reset and repeat each day until erased cancelled The One time alarm will reset and cancel automatically Programming Related Features Hardware 234 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 75 WAKE UP ALARM FIVE TIME WAKE UP ALARM Description If PGM161 New 5 Wake Up Usage is set to ON then new wake up feature is enabled Each station can have and set up to 5 wake up times Each wake up time is identified using an id 1 5 Each wake up time has a wake up type 1 YY MM DD Alarm will be activated only one time in day specified by YY MM DD 2 Mon Fri Alarm will be activated from Monday to Friday 3 Mon Sat Alarm will be activ
215. d When the user dials 2 in response to the Number of Messages prompt the oldest saved message is played At the end of the message the Old Message option prompt To replay message press one to listen to the next message press two to delete message press three to forward message press four to call the sender press five to return to main menu press nine Jis played This process is repeated until the last new message is played and the No Message prompt No Messages is played In addition to the options indicated in the prompt a user can record a memo which is attached to the current voice mail by dialing the digit 7 The current voice mail and memo can then be forwarded to other iPECS users When the user dials 9 in response to the Number of Messages prompt or during or at the end of a message the VM long Options prompt is played 210 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation iPECS Phone To assign a VMAILBOX Flex button 1 PGM FLEX VM group Mail box station number SAVE To retrieve Voice Mail locally 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press MSG CALLBK button The message contents summary is shown as below ST CL VS VM FS MS 001 001 005 006 001 004 3 Dial digit 3 to select VMIM VSF Messages 4 Press the MSG CALLBK to receive the Mail Box amp Password prompts sequentially 5 Dial th
216. d e Intercom Call ICM Call e Exclusive Hold e Hold Recall Hardware e iPECS Phone 260 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 4 INTERCOM CALLER CONTROLLED ICM SIGNALING Description A user can change the signaling mode of an Intercom call from Tone ring to Voice announce or Voice announce to Tone ring Operation iPECS Phone To change the ICM Signaling mode 1 Place intercom call 2 Dial ff ICM Signaling mode will change from Voice announce to Tone ring or Tone ring to Voice announce SLT To change the ICM Signaling mode 1 Place intercom call as normal 2 Dial ff ICM Signaling mode will change from Voice announce to Tone ring or Tone ring to Voice announce Conditions 1 The ICM Signaling mode cannot be changed when an Intercom call is placed to a Linked Pair station 2 If the signaling mode is changed the call is not subject to Call Forward No Answer 3 The signaling mode for a specific Intercom call can only be changed once and cannot be changed back to the original signaling mode 4 Changing the signaling mode does not affect privacy at the called station Programming STATION 1 Caller Controlled ICM Signaling PGM 111 Btn 15 Related Features e Intercom Signaling Mode e Linked Station Pairs Hardware 261 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 5 INTERCOM LOCK OUT Description If the use
217. d Auto Attd Voice Mail e Internal External amp All Call Page Hardware 2 5 6 Event Messages Description Each ACD group sends messages for group and agent events over the defined Serial or TCP port These event messages are employed by 3rd party applications to provide enhanced Call Center functionality Details of the event messages are provided in the iPECS 3rd Party Support Guide 26 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation System When enabled Event messages are sent automatically Conditions Programming STATION GROUPS 1 ACD Group PGM 191 SYSTEM 1 ACD Pack PGM 175 Btn 9 2 Discovery Manager Print Output ACD Event Msg PGM 160 Btn 13 Related Features e Station Groups Hardware 2 5 7 Group Mail Box Description A mailbox can be associated with a Station Group Calls to the group are assigned to overflow and can be otherwise re routed to the Station Group Mail box When routed to Voice Mail messages are placed in the assigned Station Group Msg Wait Station mailbox Messages are retrieved in the same manner as normal voice messages employing the Station Group number as the station number and the defined Station Mailbox Password Messages can be retrieved only if a GROUP MAILBOX Flex button is assigned to the station Operation Agent iPECS Phone To assign a GROUP MAILBOX Flex button PGM FLEX VM Group Group Msg Wait Station SAVE To retri
218. d Features e Redundant System Processor Hardware 362 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 2 ALTERNATE ATTENDANT Description This feature allows an Alternate answer point while the Attendant station is in an unavailable mode When in the unavailable mode the next available Attendant in the Attendant group will receive Attendant calls and recalls Operation Attendant To assign a flexible button to activate ALT ATD button 1 PGM FLEX 562 SAVE To toggle Attendant Unavailable feature 1 Dial 562 the Alternate Attendant code or press ALT ATD Conditions 1 Alternate Attendant activates the DND feature at the Attendant station and affects all calls to the Attendant station 2 A Flex button can be assigned to activate Alternate Attendant The ALT ATTENDANT button LED indicates the status of the Alternate Attendant feature On Attendant unavailable 3 A station which is receiving calls forwarded from the System Attendant cannot use the Alternate Attendant feature 4 All except for one attendant can activate Alternate Attendant When the last Attendant attempts to activate this feature error tone is received 5 An Attendant forwarded to an unavailable Attendant is also considered to be in the unavailable Attendant mode 6 When there is a queued Attendant call unavailable Attendant stations HOLD button will flash but no audible ring is
219. d Features e Ring Group Call Pick Up service ON Hardware 169 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 68 SMDR STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING 2 68 1 Call Cost Display Description Each SMDR call record includes a Cost field which is a calculated estimate for the cost of the call The call cost updates in real time and displays on the iPECS Phone LCD in place of the call duration The cost is determined by 1 Fixed charge per Call Meter Pulse 2 ISDN Advice of Charge or 3 Estimated cost updated based on Elapsed Call Timer and assigned costing The technique selected to determine cost is based on the type of facility analog CO ISDN or VoIP services provided by the carrier and the system database Analog CO Where Call Metering Pulse service is available from the carrier the system will apply the SMDR Cost per Unit Pulse and the SMDR Decimal to the Call Metering received to estimate the call cost When no Metering Type is selected the system call duration is used with the cost pulse and decimal values to estimate the cost of the call The cost is updated periodically using the Elapsed Call Timer duration ISDN ISDN providers may support Advice of Charge information in the ISDN Facility Message If assigned the system will employ this information to display and output the call cost VoIP For VoIP calls the system employs th
220. d code Or 1 Press WRAP UP END flexible button before expiration of the Wrap Up Timer Conditions 1 During Agent automatic Wrap Up the assigned WRAP UP END flexible button flashes The button LED extinguishes when the Wrap Up Timer expires or if the button is pressed both return the Agent to available Programming NUMBERING PLAN 1 ACD Agent Wrap Up End Code PGM 109 Btn 9 STATION GROUPS 1 ACD Group PGM 191 2 ACD Wrap up Timer PGM 191 Btn 9 Related Features Hardware 2 5 1 6 Agent On Off Duty w Reason Code Description Agents can control their status On Off duty and assign a Reason code for an Off duty state The system outputs the Reason code as part of the ACD Event message output The Reason code may be any digit 0 9 and With the exception of Reason code 0 when the Agent goes Off duty manually the Agent must return to the On duty state manually If assigned as the Auto ACD DND code using Reason code 0 activates the ACD DND Wrap up timer At expiration of the timer the Agent is placed back On duty This provides the flexibility of an Agent activated Wrap up time The Agent may assign an ACD ON OFF DUTY button to for easy access The ACD group number and the Reason code can be assigned for an ACD ON OFF DUTY GROUP REASON button By entering the Auto ACD DND code the Agent will have an ACD DND button and if assigned Reason code 0 the Agent will return to On duty status afte
221. d for you 402 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Other SIP Phone Attributes 1 SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 Registration Mode by default Register Re Registration should be implemented from the SIP Phone NOTE MFIM will set the Re Registration Timer for the SIP Phone If there is no Re Registration from the SIP Phone during the Registration Timer then system will disconnect the SIP Phone automatically after Registration Timer expires Manual Re Registration is not required for the SIP Phone 2 SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 TRANSPORT by default UDP TLS you need to set the Encryption Key More technical information may be required for you 3 SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 SIP Phone Type Automatically determined by system 4 SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 Device NAT Usage AUTO system determine automatically Multi Line support for a SIP Phone 1 LIK allow multiple Extension for a SIP Phone that support Multi Line 2 ASIP Phone will implement multiple register to system 3 System will distinguish them by 1 Extension write it as a device with original MAC address from 2 Extension write it as a device with virtual MAC address Conditions 1 You need to install Lock Key for SIP Phones except LG Ericsson LIP8002 WIT400H Yamaha ACT 50 PJP 50 Programming SIP DATA 1 SIP Attributes 210 2 SIP P
222. d in a single voice conference The MCIM will support any combination of parties and conferences to the maximum total number of parties in conference Multiple MCIMs see chart below are installed to support multiple multi party conferences with a maximum of 32 parties in any single conference iPECS Micro 1 MCIM unit maximum iPECS 50 amp 100 2 MCIM units maximum iPECS 300 4 MCIM units maximum iPECS 600 8 MCIM units maximum iPECS 1200 30 MCIM units maximum Operation iPECS Phone To establish an ad hoc conference 1 Establish first call 2 Press the CONF button The LED will light the connected party is placed on exclusive hold and the user receives dial tone 3 Place second call 4 When connected press CONF new call is placed on exclusive hold 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 above to add additional conference parties 72 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 Press CONF button to establish conference To place a conference on hold 1 Press the HOLD button the CONF button LED will flash To retrieve held conference 1 SLT Press CONF button all parties reconnected To establish an ad hoc a conference 1 2 Establish first call Momentarily press the hook switch the connected party is placed on exclusive hold and the user receives dial tone Place second call When connected repeat steps 2 and 3 above to add additional parties When
223. d setting affect to Master and all member If this value is set to OFF individual Call Forward is worked by each room Use Master DND If this value is set to ON DND setting affect to Master and all member If this value is set to OFF individual DND is worked by each room Related Features e SMDR e Call Coverage e Wake Up e Message Wait VM Message Hardware 256 Issue 5 6 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 INTERCOM 3 1 DIRECT STATION SELECT BUSY LAMP FIELD DSS BLF Description When a Flex button on an iPECS Phone or DSS Console is assigned as a DSS button it also serves as a Busy Lamp Field The LED indicates the status of the associated station or system facility Operation iPECS Phone Operation of this feature is automatic for assigned Flex buttons Conditions 1 Astation receiving ICM ringing is considered busy and the associated station LED on all other stations will flash at 30 ipm 2 A station receiving ICM ringing will receive visual indication by a flashing LED of the Flex button associated with the calling station 3 When a station receives a Camp On the LED of a DSS button associated with the calling station will flash 4 The station is considered busy when e in use receiving ICM Ring at an iPECS Phone e receiving any ring at an SLT Programming Related Features e Intercom Call ICM Call e Station User P
224. dant To print the Hourly Call Report 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 0126 the Hourly Call report code 3 Press the SAVE button Conditions Programming SYSTEM 1 RS 232 Port Settings PGM 174 2 Serial Port Function Selections PGM 175 Related Features e SMDR Station Message Detail Recording e ACD Statistics Report Hardware e device to capture reports 2 71 3 Traffic Analysis H W Usage Description The Hardware Usage report provides statistics for the system s special Hardware resources such as the VSF as shown in the following sample report Site Name abc co Report Type Hardware Usage Report Today Peak Date 06 05 02 08 34 Unit Num Anal Total Total Type Unit Hour Req Denied VSF 6 09 00 19 0 Operation System Attendant To print the Hardware Usage Summary Report 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 0127 the H W Usage Summary report code 202 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 Select Analysis Period 1 5 4 Press the SAVE button Conditions Programming SYSTEM 1 RS 232 Port Settings PGM 174 2 Serial Port Function Selections PGM 175 Related Features e SMDR Station Message Detail Recording e ACD Statistics Report Hardware e device to capture reports 2 71 4 Traffic Analysis CO IP Reports Description The CO IP Traffic Summary and Hourly reports provide statistics on a summary or hourly basis for CO IP Gr
225. de through the RS 232 port of the Module Characteristics that can be established are e IEEE 802 1p Q VLAN sets Virtual LAN tag and priority for Ethernet frame e Diffserv sets Diffserv Code Point priority for IP packet e IPSec enables IPSec to establish IPSec tunnel and encryption of IP packet e SRTP enables Secure RTP for RTP packet payload using AES Advanced Encryption Service Operation System Operation of Security and priority is automatic once configured Conditions 1 For Web Admin the password is encrypted using the LG Ericsson Java Virtual Encryption plug in A Java Virtual Machine MS or Sun must be installed in the user s PC to support password encryption 2 Security and priority characteristics can be set for all devices local or remote 3 SRTP support is available only with the Phase 4 or higher modules The devices must be on the same LAN to support SRTP 4 iPECS implementation of IPSec employs a proprietary Key exchange protocol from the MFIM to the iPECS device 5 IEEE 802 1 VLAN priority and ID are set at each device using the device Web interface Diffserv IPSEC and SRTP treatments may also be set in the device via the local Web interface For the MFIM VLANs are configured via the maintenance interface of the RS 232 port Programming BOARD 1 SRTP PGM 132 Btn 4 SYSTEM 1 Web Password Encryption PGM161 Btn15 Related Features Hardware 145 iPECS LIK Feature Descripti
226. deo Call feature is added Operation To place Video call from SIP 88xx 1 Dial the counterpart Video phone number and press VIDEO CALL button Or press VIDEO CALL button and dial the counterpart Video phone number 2 If the counter part can answer with Video Video call will be established If not voice call will be established To establish Video call after answering with voice call 1 Voice call will be established at first 2 Start Video codec negotiation pressing VIDEO START button or soft menu 3 Video call will be established if the video codec negotiation is succeeded Conditions 1 After pressing CONF HOLD TRANS Video call will be changed as Voice call 2 For the Trunk outgoing call can not establish Video call directly after establishing Voice call Video call must be established Programming Related Features Hardware e None 423 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 17 SIP VIRTUAL MOBILE EXTENSION VMEX Description SIP gives us the opportunity to provide a truly integrated and cost effective mobile extension solution The closer integration lets the mobile users to use the mobile exactly as they are used to The goal have been to integrate the mobile phone even further with the PBX out band signaling and add a more cost effective solution for bigger systems recursing diversion The out band signaling is mandatory Recursing divers
227. dialed by the caller DID service is available over analogue digital and packet networks Analogue DID lines are limited to one way incoming service and require special call start signaling definition ISDN lines can provide two way incoming DID and normal outgoing service and require no special signaling After collecting the digits from the carrier iPECS converts the digits employing one of three DID digit conversion Types e Type 0 collect incoming digits based on the programmed digit count and convert the digits according to the DID conversion pattern resulting in the DID destination number e Type 1 use the incoming DID digits as the destination number without converting e Type 2 Following the result of DID conversion Type 0 route the call according to the Flexible DID table conversion Operation System System response to an incoming DID call analogue CO line 1 set up a connection based on the defined Start signal 2 collect incoming digits based on the programmed Receive Digit Count 3 handle digits based on the Conversion type 0 2 4 route the call to assigned destination System response to an incoming DID call ISDN line 1 set up a connection based on the received call set up messages 2 collect incoming digits and delete digits from left based on the programmed ISDN Remove Digit Count 3 handle digits based on the Conversion type 0 2 4 route the call to assigned destination Conditions
228. distributor of IPECS system 182 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 Unified Dialing Plan UDP Each station can have a unique number up to 7 digits in the networked systems but it depends on their own numbering plan 3 The alternative route employs a Speed Dial number to place a call and is not a Networked call Thus the Distributed Control Network features are not available Programming Related Features Hardware 2 70 2 1 Net Call Description A station user can make a call to a station in other systems by dialing only a station number just as an intercom call within the same system Operation 1 Lift Handset or press the SPEAKER button The system provides a user with a dial tone 2 Dial the station number of other systems or press the NET DSS button of other systems 3 The station seizes the network CO line according to the net routing table and the system sends a digit stream that is modified by the net routing table 4 The called party receives a digit stream that is sent by calling party and analyzes it using the net routing table to determine 5 The right destination The called station receives a ringing signal 6 The LED of Network CO button will be extinguished when the Net Call is cleared Conditions 1 Net call must be used without seizing a CO line 2 User hears an error tone if there is no idle networking path 3 In spite of ICM mode the called par
229. dle 2 When the speakerphone is used the microphone is active unless the MUTE button is pressed and the MUTE button LED is On Programming STATION 1 Auto Speaker Selection PGM 111 Btn 1 Related Features e Mute e Speakerphone e Automatic Speaker Select e Headset Compatibility e Group Listening Hardware e iPECS Phone 338 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 19 PRIME LINE IMMEDIATELY DELAYED Description When a user goes to an off hook state the system normally provides ICM dial tone If desired a station can be assigned to access a pre assigned system resource Prime Line The Prime Line can be any of the Idle Line Settings e Seize a CO IP Line e Call another station e Activate a Flex button feature e Call to pre assigned Hunt group e Call to pre assigned station Speed e Call to pre assigned system Speed Prime Line access can be defined as immediate or delayed When assigned immediate upon an off hook event the system provides access to the Prime Line With Delayed Prime Line the station user receives normal Intercom dial tone for the Prime Line Delay timer and after the delay the Prime Line is accessed Operation iPECS Phone To access the station s Prime Line 1 Lift the handset or press SPEAKER button and take no action Prime Line as assigned will be accessed Conditions 1 Any of the station s Flex buttons may be assigned as the
230. e FWD button when it is flashing The FWD button will be extinguished Conditions 1 If both of served and diverted to stations are located in the same system the networking path will be cleared That is the forwarded call will be setup as intercom call 2 System does not check the status of diverted to station that is in DND CFW or Empty Programming SYSTEM 1 Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 2 Networking Supplementary Attribute PGM 321 BTN 1 3 Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 4 Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 2 70 2 9 Net Call Forward Busy Description It is possible for a user to forward his station remotely when the station is busy The forwarded destination can be over the network Engineering notice Currently iPECS system supports both rerouting and join method by admin programming Operation To activate Net Call Forward 1 Press the SPEAKER button and the FWD button 2 Dial Net Call Forward code 2 and dial the station number of another system The FWD button will be flashing and a confirmation tone will be provided if allowed 3 Dial the station number that is set Net Call Forward to a station of another node The call is routed to a forwarded station when the called station is busy and the forwarded station is ringing 4 Answer the ringing at forwarded station The calling and forwarded station can make a conversation To deactivate Net Call Forward
231. e The CO line is placed on Exclusive Hold 2 Dial the station number of another system to transfer the call The transferred station of another system receives a ring signal 3 Announce when the transferred station answers Both stations can make a conversation each other but the held CO is still in waiting on Transfer hold 4 Hang up to complete the transfer Unscreened transfer 1 Press the TRANS button at a station during conversation with a CO line The CO line is placed on Exclusive Hold 2 Dial the station number of another system to transfer the call 3 Hang up to complete the transfer Conditions 1 If both of transferred and transferred to stations are located in the same system the networking path will be cleared That is the transfer call will be setup as intercom call The transfer will be canceled when user presses the flashing CO or TRANS button Net Transfer call does not recall to the origination User hears an error tone if there is no idle networking path Net transfer is not activated to a busy station O A ON 184 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming SYSTEM 1 Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 2 Networking Supplementary Attribute PGM 321 BTN 1 3 Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 4 Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 2 70 2 3 Identification Service Description Calling Name Identification Presentation
232. e 5 6 6 16 FEATURE CANCEL Description The System Attendant can cancel features such as DND Call Forwarding and Pre defined or Custom Messages that are active at other stations Operation To deactivate DND Call Forward Pre selected Message for other stations 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 052 Attendant Station Program code 3 Dial the desired station range or the same station number twice for a single station 4 Press the SAVE button confirmation tone is heard and Attendant station returns to idle status Conditions Programming SYSTEM 1 System Attendant PGM 164 Btn 1 Related Features e Call Forward e DND Do Not Disturb e Attendant Positions e Pre defined amp Custom Text Display Messages Hardware 385 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 17 INTRUSION Description An Attendant can intrude upon an active station conversation When the Attendant intrudes an Intrusion Tone is provided if assigned and a conference is established between the Attendant station and the CO IP party Intrusion can only be activated using an ATD INTRUSION button Operation Attendant To assign an ATD INTRUSION button 1 PGM FLEX PGM 86 SAVE To activate attendant intrusion while receiving busy on an Intercom call 1 Press ATD INTRUSION button Intrusion Warning Tone is provided to the busy station Conditions
233. e AA announcement dial as desired If DND Warning tone is received enter an Authorization Code to receive Intercom dial tone Conditions 1 Each CO IP path is separately assigned for DISA operation during Day Night and or Timed system operation mode DISA operation is active only when the system is in the assigned operating mode s 2 DISA callers can be routed to a VMIM VSF Auto Attendant announcement in place of Intercom dial tone The announcement can be associated with a CCR Table or assigned to disconnect after playback ff 3 A DISA caller can be required to enter an Authorization Code to access the system s external outgoing resources facilities or features If required the caller is permitted to retry entry of a valid Authorization Code based on the DISA Retry count Continued failure results in disconnect 4 DISA callers are subject to COS dialing restrictions If Authorization Codes are required and the code entered matches a Station Authorization Code the station s COS will apply Otherwise the assigned DISA COS will apply In both cases the CO IP COS for the outgoing path will be active 5 The system will disconnect an outgoing DISA call if the Unsupervised Conference timer expires or disconnect supervision is received A disconnect warning tone is provided 15 seconds prior to disconnect 293 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 If a DISA caller encounters a system All
234. e Mail Box and corresponding password to receive the Number of Messages prompt 6 Dial desired option code 7 At completion of session hang up to return to idle Or Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button Press VMAILBOX button Dial the Mailbox password to receive the Number of Messages prompt AA O N gt Dial desired option code 5 At completion of session hang up to return to idle To attach a memo to the current voice message 1 During or after the New or Old Message option prompt dial 7 2 At the beep record the memo 3 Dial to stop recording and store the memo 4 During or after the New Old option prompt dial 4 to forward the message and memo SLT To retrieve Voice Mail locally 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the Voice Mail Group to receive the Mailbox amp Password prompts sequentially 3 Dial the Mailbox and corresponding password to receive the Number of Messages prompt 4 Dial desired option code 5 At completion of session hang up to return to idle To attach a memo to the current voice message 1 During or after the New or Old Message option prompt dial 7 2 At the beep record the memo 211 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 Dial to stop and store the memo 4 During or after the New Old option prompt dial 4 to forward the message and memo Conditions 1 If no new old mess
235. e Registration Switch position Three tables are provided to enter MAC addresses The MAC Registration Table PGM 102 allows entry of two MAC address ranges Any device with a MAC address in either of the ranges will be permitted to register with the system The second is the Fractional Module Table PGM 235 This Table permits entry of five MAC addresses and the number of channels to be registered for each device Entering the MAC address permits the device to register with the system regardless of the Registration Switch position The number of channels available to the device is limited to the number of channels entered in the Table This function is commonly used to limit the number of channels available over an E1 T1 or PRI ISDN circuit Fractional T1 line The third table allows entry of the MAC address of a remote phone or gateway Module as well as the Nation code and Zone During registration the system will compare the MAC address received form the remote device and if matched will permit registration of the device Once the device is registered the data for the device is placed in the appropriate locations and the data is removed from the Remote Phone amp Gateway Registration Table Operation Operation of registration is automatic based on the system database and Registration Switch position Conditions Programming NUMBERING PLAN 1 MAC Registration Table PGM 102 Btn 11 14 TABLES 1 Fractional Module Table PGM 235
236. e assigned as a member of one or more of the system s nine Push To Talk page groups The iPECS Phone user may login or log out of any one or all PTT groups to which it is assigned Once logged in the user may place or receive one way page announcements to from other users who are logged in to the same PTT group To place a PTT page announcement the user must press and hold the PTT Flex button An Attendant may log other stations in and out of PTT groups Operation iPECS Phone To assign a PTT Flex button 1 PGM FLEX PGM 99 SAVE To log in to a PTT group 1 Dial 0 the PTT Log in out code 2 Dial the desired PTT group number 1 9 and 0 for all groups To log out of the PTT group s 1 Dial 0 the PTT Log in out code 2 Dial To place a page to the active PTT group 1 Press and hold the PTT Flex button 2 After confirmation tone make page announcement Attendant To log other stations in to a PTT group Press the PGM button Dial O77 the Attendant PTT log in out code Dial the desired station range Dial the PTT group number 1 9 and 0 for all groups Press the SAVE button To log other stations out of a PTT group Press the PGM button Dial O77 the Attendant PTT log in out code Dial the desired station range Dial Press the SAVE button a A O N gt o Ek o H A
237. e call duration cost pulse and decimal values to establish the call cost estimate The cost is updated periodically at intervals of the Elapsed Call Timer Operation System Call cost is estimated automatically and output to iPECS Phone displays and the SMDR RS 232 port Conditions 1 The call cost display begins after the SMDR Start Timer expires if enabled or at receipt of the first Call Meter Pulse 2 Once connected to the system the call duration includes the total time the call is connected including periods when the call is on hold in queue etc 3 To enable Call Cost Display the SMDR Cost per Unit Pulse and SMDR Decimal must be assigned When not assigned the call duration is provided by the system 170 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming CO IP SYSTEM Metering Type PGM 142 Btn 3 SMDR Cost per Unit Pulse PGM 177 Btn 10 SMDR Decimal PGM 177 Btn 11 SMDR Start Timer PGM 177 Btn 12 CO Warning Tone Timer PGM 180 Btn 19 RwWN gt Related Features e SMDR Station Message Detail Recording e Lost Call Recording e Traffic Analysis e CO IP Call Warning Tone Timer Hardware e RS 323 device to capture SMDR 2 68 2 SMDR Call Records Description SMDR Station Message Detail Recording provides detailed information on incoming and outgoing calls Assignable options in the system database permit recording of all external calls al
238. e call is disconnected when the station receives forced Intrusion call 3 The busy station is connected to forced intrusion caller only after short indication with beep tone 4 Forced Intrusion call is not possible to a station in DND state 5 Forced Intrusion call is not possible to attendant Programming Related Features Hardware 252 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 87 CALL BACK TO CO Description User can call back to CO using station web window Call From Number can call to Call To Number using own system resource SMDR and COS is followed the station number Operation To activate make call back to CO 1 The user can enter to station web using own station password 2 The user should enter right digits to From and To box after that you should press CALL button 3 You can see the result that it s success or not in widow display 253 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Conditions 1 This function can be operated by admin 113 24B 11B or web admin as following Kag PROCTOR MONITORING Power Failure OFF w 6 F VSF MSG SMTP Mall Server ID IT CAE VSF MSG SMTP Mai Server Password _ CJE CAMP ON TONE Ton we ele Serial DSS Usage Tenable B 70 EI ICM Disi Tone Source Disi Tone i e ICM Ring Back Tone Source Ring Back Tone SC Lo EI j VSF MSG Anach Message
239. e disabled CO IP line will flutter at 240 ipm other stations will indicate the CO IP line as busy LED is On 3 The CO IP line outgoing access status is stored in battery protected memory in case of a power failure 4 Multiple CO IP lines may be enabled disabled without redialing the Attendant Station Program code Confirmation tone is heard after each CO IP line is enabled disabled 5 When the system detects a fault on an analog CO line the CO line is disabled for outgoing access automatically 6 Incoming calls on a disabled CO IP line will continue to operate normally Programming SYSTEM 1 System Attendant PGM 164 Btn 1 Related Features e Attendant Positions Hardware 380 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 13 DND OVERRIDE Description A station in the DND mode generally cannot receive an incoming call The Attendant and the Secretary station of an Executive Secretary pair however may override the DND status to signal the station of an awaiting call Operation Attendant To activate DND Override while receiving DND tone 1 Press the ATD INTRUSION button the call signals at DND station Conditions 1 An Attendant may use Override to transfer a CO IP call to a station in DND Programming SYSTEM 1 Attendant Assignment PGM 164 Related Features e Intrusion e DND Do Not Disturb e Executive Secretarv Forward Hardware 381 iPECS LIK Feature Des
240. e forward to the Secretary regardless of the Executive s station status In addition if the Secretary is in DND Executive calls sent to the Secretary route back to the Executive if the Call Exec If Sec in DND option is enabled Each Executive can be assigned a Grade 01 highest 12 lowest Executives with a higher grade can call lower grade Executives overriding the Executive Secretary forward With the Icm Call to Secretary option PGM229 Btn5 enabled all internal calls to the Executive except for calls from higher or same grade executive forward to the Secretary regardless of the Executive s station status Callers to an Executive in DND can leave a Message Wait indication The message waiting indication is given to the Executive or Secretary station based on the system database and User Programming Operation iPECS Phone To activate deactivate Executive Secretary forward from the Executive iPECS Phone 1 Press the DND button to toggle Executive Secretary Forward Conditions 1 The available number of Executive Secretary pairs is provided in Table 1 2 1 2 An Executive may have multiple Secretaries and a Secretary may have multiple Executives Each forms a separate Executive Secretary pair 3 If the Secretary is busy when a call is received for the Executive the caller will receive busy tone 4 The Secretary may override the DND status of the Executive to Camp On and transfer calls to the Execut
241. e is disabled and the SPEAKER button activates the Headset audio path instead of the speaker Programming STATION 1 Headset Ring PGM 111 Btn 8 2 Speakerphone PGM 111 Btn 9 Related Features e Mute e Group Listening e Automatic Speaker Select e Headset Compatibility 345 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Hardware e iPECS Phone 346 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 24 STATION FLEXIBLE BUTTONS Description The iPECS Phone incorporates a field of Flex buttons as well as the fixed feature buttons The Flex buttons are assigned in the system database to access features functions and resources of the system Specifically Flex buttons can be assigned as e An Empty button has no system database assignment e A DSS BLF button used to place One touch ICM call to a designated station and display status of the station e A Flex Numbering Plan button activates the feature associated with the assigned digits from the Flexible Numbering Plan e A Speed Dial bin button accesses and dials the number from the assigned Speed Dial bin e A Pool button accesses a CO IP path from the CO IP group designated for the Pool button A Pool button is used primarily to provide an outgoing call appearance when a direct CO line appearance is not available It may be used as the last choice for an incoming CO IP call The Pool button LED provides the stat
242. e mail Operation Recording of calls is automatic when assigned To manage the recordings use the procedures outlined in the Phontage or UCS Client User Guide Conditions 1 The Phontage or UCS Client can record one call at a time and must be idle While recording if the Phontage or UCS Client places or receives a call recording terminates 2 When call recording begins the station will receive a Call Recording confirmation tone 3 Aremote Phontage or UCS Client will not support call recording 4 If user want to record in case of CO call he can set CO in PGM 112 Btn 20 If he set ALL all calls can be recorded Programming STATION 1 Two way Record Privilege PGM 112 Btn11 2 Auto Call Recording PGM 112 Btn 20 3 Call Recording Destination PGM 112 Btn 21 Related Features Hardware e iPECS Phone PC with Phontage or UCS Client 58 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 17 CALL TRANSFER 2 17 1 Call Transfer Station Description CO IP calls can be transferred to other stations in the iPECS system Calls can be transferred announcing the call screened or without an announcement unscreened When a call is transferred the Transfer Recall Timer is initiated If the timer expires before the call is answered the Hold Recall process is initiated Operation iPECS Phone While on a CO IP call Screened Call Transfer 1 Press TRANS button 2 Dial the st
243. e system even if the call is transferred or picked up at another station 2 There are two kinds of CUT OFF timer One is Station base the other is CO base It is newly added If two timers are assigned simultaneously call can be followed by shorter timer Programming STATION 1 CO IP Call Time Restriction PGM 112 Btn 3 2 Cut Off Timer PGM 123 Btn 2 CO IP 1 CO CUT OFF TIMER PGM 142 Btn 21 Related Features e CO IP Call Warning Tone Timer Hardware 66 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 21 CO IP CALL WARNING TONE TIMER Description Stations can receive a tone indicating the elapsed time of a CO IP call has reached the Warning Tone time The station hears the tone after the CO Warning Tone Timer has elapsed Operation System Operation of this feature is automatic when assigned Conditions 1 Warning tone is received 15 seconds prior to expiration of the timer and is repeated at intervals equal to the Warning Tone Timer Programming STATION 1 CO Call Time Tone PGM 112 Btn 1 SYSTEM 1 Elapsed Call Tone Timer PGM 180 Btn 19 Related Features e CO IP Call Time Restriction Hardware 67 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 22 CO IP QUEUING Description When CO IP lines are busy permitted users can request to be placed in queue awaiting the CO IP line or a CO IP line in the same group to become available When an a
244. e the assigned COS 1 Momentarily press the hook switch Dial 561 the SLT Programming code Dial 22 the restore COS code Dial Authorization Code station number and code a A OO N Momentarily press the hook switch System Attendant To activate Temporary COS 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 021 the Temp COS code 3 Dial station range 4 Press the SAVE button To restore the assigned COS 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 022 the restore COS code 3 Dial station range 4 Press the SAVE button Conditions 1 The station is restored to the Station COS as appropriate for the active service mode Day Night or Timed Programming STATION 1 Station COS PGM 116 CO IP 1 CO COS PGM 141 Btn 2 SYSTEM 1 DISA COS PGM 166 2 PBX Trunk Access Codes PGM 172 3 LD Digit Count PGM 177 Btn 4 4 LD Digit Code PGM 177 Btn 19 TABLES 1 Toll Restriction PGM 224 2 Authorization Codes Table PGM 227 Related Features e Class of Service 92 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 e Walking COS e Auto Service Mode Control e Day Night Timed Scenario Ring Mode e Authorization Codes Password Hardware 2 31 4 Walking COS Description A user may temporarily override the toll restriction of a station to make toll calls from a normally toll restricted station The user must input an Authorization Code in order to activate Walking
245. eature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 In addition a Station User Program Menu display is provided by the iPECS Phone display to assist the user in programming the Station User Program Code features and functions The VOL UP VOL DOWN buttons are used to scroll through the menu items and the dial pad is used to enter a selection The codes are also used to assign a function feature to a Flex button The Station User Program Menu display is graphically illustrated in the figure below USER PROGRAM MENU Displays First top level Menu selection 1 RING NEWKEYSET 2 COS der selection 1 Ring select 1 5 as below 1 STA RING TYPE 2 CO RING TYPE 3 ANSWER MODE 4 CALL COVER ATTR 5 STA RING DOWNLOAD 1 STA RING TYPE Under selection 2 COS select 1 3 as below 1 COS DOWN 2 COS RESTORE 3 WALKING COS 4 ICR SCENARIO 5 LIP KEYSET STAT 1 COS DOWN Next top level Menu selection 3 MSG RET M EXT 4 WAKE UP TIME U 352 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Under selection 3 MSG RETRIEVE select 1 8 as below 1 MSG RETRIEVE METHOD 2 MSG RETRIEVE EXAMPLE 3 USER AUTH REGIST 4 DID CALL WAIT 5 CHOICE EXEC SEC MSG 6 SEND SMS MESSAGE 7 REG MOBILE EXT 8 ACTIVE MOBILE EXT 9 REGISTER MOBIL CLI 0 VM MOBILE NOTIFY Under
246. ecord prompt Press the SPEED button during playback to erase message Conditions 1 2 Thresholds are assigned as total Calls In Queue to activate a Page alert and are checked from lowest priority CIQ 1 to highest priority CIQ 3 Thus the highest priority CIQ defined should have the largest threshold and the lowest priority CIQ should have the smallest threshold The VMIM and VSF have seventy 70 announcements employed for Auto Attendant ACD groups CCR Page Alerts etc 25 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming STATION GROUPS ACD Group PGM 191 CIQ 1 Threshold PGM 191 Btn 24 6 CIQ 1 Announcement Location PGM 191 Btn 24 7 CIQ 1 Page Zone PGM 191 Btn 24 8 CIQ 1 Announcement Delay Timer PGM 191 Btn 24 9 6 CIQ 1 Announcement Repeat Timer PGM 191 Btn 24 10 7 CIQ 2 Threshold PGM 191 Btn 24 11 8 CIQ 2 Announcement Location PGM 191 Btn 24 12 9 CIQ 2 Page Zone PGM 191 Btn 24 13 10 CIQ 2 Announcement Delay Timer PGM 191 Btn 24 14 11 CIQ 2 Announcement Repeat Timer PGM 191 Btn 24 15 12 CIQ 3 Threshold PGM 191 Btn 24 16 13 CIQ 3 Announcement Location PGM 191 Btn 24 17 14 CIQ 3 Page Zone PGM 191 Btn 24 18 15 CIQ 3 Announcement Delay Timer PGM 191 Btn 24 19 16 CIQ 3 Announcement Repeat Timer PGM 191 Btn 24 20 17 VSF Group Number PGM 190 aR WD Related Features e Station Groups e VMIM VSF Integrate
247. ed Conditions 1 Multiple up to three 3 WTIMs may be linked to provide a zone with up to 24 base stations 8 per WTIM 2 The maximum number of WTIMs that can be installed in an iPECS system varies based on the system model refer to Table 1 2 1 Programming DECT 1 DECT Registration PGM 491 Web only 2 DECT Attributes PGM 491 Related Features Hardware e WTIMs e GDC 400B Base stations e GDC 400H handsets 126 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 48 IP FAX RELAY T 38 SUPPORT Description Because of there nature Fax tones do not transmit well through IP networks particularly when compression is employed To address this the SLTM LGCM BRI and PRI gateways support T 38 protocol that defines the translation of fax tones to digital signals When Fax tone is detected on a port of an iPECS module the module will activate a T 38 Fax relay channel to the appropriate Line and SLT module Operation Operation of this feature is automatic Conditions Programming Related Features Hardware 127 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 49 IP TRANS CODING Description The system employs either IEEE g 711 g 729 or g 723 codec to digitize and compress voice signals for RTP packets between iPECS devices iPECS terminals and gateway Modules incorporate DSP functions to support codec conversion Available VOIMs include DSP
248. ed Dial Description Each user can store commonly dialed numbers for easy access using Station Speed Dial bins With the iPECS Micro iPECS 50 and 100 each station has access to 20 Speed Dial numbers and with other iPECS systems each station has access to 100 Speed Dial numbers Each Speed Dial number can be up to 48 digits in length and may include special instruction codes Special instruction codes available are as 1 digit Activate Display Security do not display number Flash as 1 digit Activate dial tone detect F Insert a pause dialing command not 1 digit Switch from Pulse to DTMF dialing MSG CALLBK Send as ISDN Keypad Facility IE HOLD Insert a Pulse to tone switchover iPECS Phone users may assign a Flex button for One Touch access to a specific Speed Dial bin In addition the iPECS Phone user may assign a Telephone number directly to a Flex button In this case the telephone number is allocated to the highest numbered available Station Speed Dial bin 157 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation iPECS Phone To assign a Flex button as a STATION SPEED DIAL button 1 PGM FLEX SPEED Station Speed Dial bin number SAVE To dial using a Station Speed Dial with a SPEED button 1 Lift handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the desired bin number To dial using a Station Speed Dial and the LIP 8000
249. ed party 1 Press the illuminated MUTE button Conditions 1 The Supervisor must be active and logged into the Agent s ACD group to monitor calls in progress Programming NUMBERING PLAN 1 Supervisor Monitor Code PGM 107 Btn 8 STATION GROUPS 1 ACD Groups PGM 191 2 ACD Group Supervisor PGM 191 Btn 18 3 ACD Warning Tone PGM 191 Btn 12 Related Features e Station Groups Hardware e iPECS Phone 2 5 11 4 Group Status Displav Description An ACD Supervisor may view the status of each of the ACD groups to which the Supervisor is assigned The displav will give the status of the active ACD group at the time of the request The displav indicates the following statistics Number of calls in Queue Wait time for the call in queue longest and Agents in service and available When a call is queued to the group the ACD Supervisor is notified in real time bv the LED of the GROUP STATUS button The GROUP STATUS button allows access to the ACD Group status displav or the Group Status code mav be used to displav the status information 34 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation Supervisor iPECS Phone To assign a GROUP STATUS button at the Supervisor 1 PGM FLEX 576 Group Number SAVE To display the Group status when the GROUP STATUS button is flashing 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Dial 576 the Group Status di
250. eed Dial numbers assigned to a zone 2 A station not assigned access to a zone will receive error tone when trying to access a System Speed Dial number in the zone 3 The Station COS is applied to the Speed Dial number based on the active service mode Day Timed or Night Programming STATION 1 Speed Dial Access PGM 112 Btn 8 TABLES 1 System Speed Zone PGM 232 Related Features e System Speed Dial e Class of Service Hardware 163 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 65 STATION CALL COVERAGE Description The Call Coverage feature permits an iPECS Phone user to receive ring and answer calls directed to a covered station This feature is generally employed to allow a Secretarial answering position to cover calls to other stations When a covered station rings the CALL COVERAGE button LED will flash and the covering station may receive ring immediate or delayed for the call The covering station can answer the call using the CALL COVERAGE button terminating ring at other stations Once answered the LED of CALL COVERAGE buttons for the station at other covering stations will extinguish Operation of this feature requires a CALL COVERAGE button at the covering iPECS Phone and the covered station must activate call coverage A station can have multiple Call Coverage buttons each covering a different station and multiple stations can have a Call Coverage button for a given st
251. eges are governed by the Station COS only 2 Assignments in Exception Table A govern dialing privileges for Station COS 2 amp 4 3 Assignments in Exception Table B govern dialing privileges for Station COS 3 amp 5 4 No LD calls LD code amp digit count and assignments of Exception C apply to Station COS 2 amp 6 only 5 No dialing restrictions applied overrides Station COS 2 through 6 88 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Station amp CO COS Interaction The following chart displays the dialing capabilities based on the interaction between the Station COS and CO line COS assignments Station Restriction cos CO COS 1 CO COS 2 CO COS 3 COCOS 4 CO COS 5 1 No restriction No restriction No restriction No LD calls amp No restriction Table C 2 Exception Table A Exception Table A No restriction No LD calls amp No restriction Table C 3 Exception Table B No restriction Exception No LD calls amp No restriction Table B Table C 4 Exception Table A Exception Table A Exception No LD calls amp No restriction 8 B Table B Table C 5 Local call amp Table Local call amp Table Local call A No LD calls amp No restriction C C Table C Table C 6 Local call amp Table Local call amp Table Local call amp No LD calls amp No restriction C C Table C Table C 7 Intercom only Intercom only Intercom only Intercom only Intercom only
252. em if there is any uploaded cert key data and display the information Conditions 1 Provisioning is only for LG Ericsson SIP Phone types Programming SIP DATA 1 SIP Phone Attributes 211 2 SIP Phone Provisioning 212 Related Features Hardware 408 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 3 MAKE CALL Description There are three types of call setup Station Call CO Call System Call Feature Implementation Operation Making Station Call Setup 1 Dial Station Number 2 If Dial Digit Map is programmed SIP Phone will send call setup immediately 3 If Dial Digit Map is not programmed press the SEND button or key for send out call setup Making CO Call Setup 1 CO Access Code Dial Number SEND button ex CO Access Code 9 Dial Number 450 4500 dial 94504500 and press SEND or button NOTE If you program Second Dial Tone Digit Map on SIP Phone you will hear self dial tone from SIP Phone 2 CO Access Code SEND after hearing CO dial tone press Dial Number ex CO Access Code 9 Dial Number 450 4500 dial 9 and press SEND or button hear CO dial tone from system dial 4504500 Making System Call Feature Setup 1 System Call Feature by Numbering Code System Numbering Plan PGM106 109 2 Enblock Dialing System Call Feature numbering code data SEND button 3
253. endant call by the HOLD button LED flashing The calling intercom party will receive ring back tone or MOH as specified 3 Calls to the Attendant s station intercom number are sent to the Attendant station dialed as with any intercom call 4 When an attendant calls another busy attendant by dialing station number busy tone is received and camp on is available Programming SYSTEM 1 Attendant Assignment PGM 164 2 MOH PGM 171 Btn 2 3 Attendant Call Queuing Tone PGM 160 Btn 1 Related Features e Attendant Positions e Intercom Call ICM Call Hardware 373 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 10 DAY NIGHT TIMED SCENARIO RING MODE Description The system clock automatically controls the Ring Mode Ring assignments are applied based on the time of day and day of week Four modes of ring Ring Assignments are provided Day Night Timed and Scenario The Attendant controls the system Ring Service mode changing from Auto Service Mode to Day Night Timed or Scenario service mode Based on the service mode selected different ring assignments COS and answering privileges are invoked for the system users Operation System Attendant To change Day Timed Night Ring Mode manually 1 Press the DND button 2 Dial 1 5 1 Day mode 2 Night mode 3 Timed mode 4 Auto Service mode 5 Scenario mode 3 If you set Scenario mode 5 you should set scenario group MFIM100 300 60
254. ennnnnnnnenanennnnnn 422 8 16 SIP VIDEO CALL tii iss i gt 423 8 17 SIP VIRTUAL MOBILE EXTENSION VMEX 424 8 18 SIP VIRTUAL CO LINE VCOL cc nnennnnennnnnnnnnnnnn 432 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 MANUAL APPLICATION This document provides detailed information covering description and operation of the numerous features available in the iPECS Series Release 5 system software The document is written assuming the system employs the default numbering plan for North America 1 1 1 Organization Features are arranged alphabetically in six different major groupings as follows Section 2 System Features Section 3 Intercom Features Section 4 CO IP Section 5 iPECS Phone Section 6 Attendant Position Section 7 SLT 1 1 2 Feature Information Each section is an alphabetical listing of features with the description and operation of each The structure is divided into 6 parts as below Description explains the nature of the feature Operation gives detailed step by step operation of the feature for iEPCS IP Phones and SLTs Conditions explains known feature interactions and constraints related to the feature Programming lists database entries that may be required for proper feature operation Reference lists related topical information to aid in understanding the feature Hardware lists hardware required for proper feature operation
255. ent by CLI without adding any prefix The 50th CLIP index will be used generally to all CLI cases from Station CLI 1 to Station CLI 5 The 50th CLIP index name will be changed to Station CLI Operation Example Station 110 has 5 CLI and related program is as followings 1 CLI Station Number Original CLI 110 Station CLI 2 01234567 Station CLI 3 01234567890123456 Station CLI 4 110 Station CLI 5 1234567890 COLP Table index 01 450 Area Code 031 In PGM 143 CO 1 is set to CLI 1 CO 2 is set to CLI 2 CO 5 is set to CLI 5 CON OO Om BW ND 311 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Station 110 Call to outside via CO 1 CLIP table is 01 1 CLI is 031 450 110 Station 110 Call to outside via CO 2 CLIP table is 01 1 CLI is 031 450 01234567 Station 110 Call to outside via CO 2 CLIP table is 50 Station CLI 1 CLI is 01234567 Station 110 Call to outside via CO 3 CLIP table is 50 Station CLI 1 CLI is 01234567890123456 Net Slave station 110 seizes the transit out co line 2 CLIP table is 01 PSTN CLI Method is set to ON 1 CLI is 031 450 01234567 Net Slave station 110 seizes the transit out co line 2 CLIP table is 50 PSTN CLI Method is set to ON 1 CLI is 01234567 Conditions 1 New CLI Station Number length is Max 16 2 When program new CLI in PGM 114 Character can be entered in each PGM for future requiremen
256. er this should be same as MFIM Device Login Station User Login 443 Desired Number Authorization Name Mandatory Login ID this should be same as MFIM Device Login Station User Login 443 ID Authorization Password Optional Login Password Login ID this should be same as MFIM Device Login Station User Login 443 Password Call Preferences 1 Call Wait ON OFF When on BUSY accept other call setup or not 2 Call Forward oa fF WwW NY 398 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 5 DTMF Type Mandatory one of INFO type After registration to system SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 DTMF Type set the same type as SIP Phone c f only support INFO type CODEC Call Blocking and so on Other Configurations 1 2 3 Answer Mode Key Tone Digit Map if SIP Phone support dial by Digit Map solution If you can utilize SIP Phone s programmable Dial Digit Map you can make immediate sending out dials w o press SEND or f key lt Refer to below gt Digit Map for Call Setup in SIP Phone you can program Digit Map according to System Numbering Plan Example in case of LIP8002 88xx SIP Phone type xX T 0 xx xxx 1xxx 2xxx 3xxx xxxx Explanation 0 dial 0 for attendant call you can specify other single digit if you want it to be sent immediately when press the
257. er options Conditions 1 Two timers are provided to control voice message length The Valid User Message Timer establishes the minimum voice message length Voice messages shorter than this timer are not stored The VSF User Record Timer establishes the maximum voice message length When the VSF User Record Timer expires while recording a voice message confirmation tone is heard and the message is saved for destination station 2 If all the VMIM VSF channels are in use Ring Back tone is provided until a VMIM VSF channel is available 3 All stations including an SLT can leave and receive voice messages Individual User Greetings and Voice Mails are protected from loss of AC power 5 In Admin VSF is used as the single reference for a parameter that applies to both the VSF and the VMIM A Programming STATION VSF Back up Station PGM 112 Btn 23 VSF Access PGM 113 Btn 2 Direct Transfer to Mailbox PGM 120 Btn 6 Station Call Forward Timer PGM 123 Call Forward No Answer Timer PGM 181 Btn 1 VSF User Record Timer PGM181 Btn 3 VSF Valid User Message Timer PGM 181 Btn 4 SYSTEM U N a P Go h A Related Features e Call Forward 209 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 e Station Message Wait Call Back e VMIM VSF Voice Mail e Call Transfer Voice Mail Hardware e VSF and or VMIM 2 73 3 2 Message Retrieval Description A user can access their Mail Box locally by plac
258. erage service time after answer Agent Statistics Report e Group Number e Agent Number Number of ACD calls served Number of unanswered ACD Calls Average ring time before answer Average ACD call service time after answer Operation Supervisor iPECS Phone To assign a GROUP STATUS button at the Supervisor 1 PGM FLEX 576 Group Number SAVE To output ACD Statistics Report 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the GROUP STATUS button 1 STATUS 2IDBASE 3 AGENT 3 Dial ACD Group Statistics Reporting Code 4 Press the MUTE button to initialize the ACD database after printing this eliminates overlap of future reports 38 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 To output the Agent Statistics Report 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the GROUP STATUS button 1 STATUS 2 DBASE 3 AGENT 3 Dial 3 Agent Code the LCD menu will update 1STATUS 20N OFF PRINT 4 Dial f Agent Statistics Reporting Code 5 Press the MUTE button to initialize the ACD database after printing this eliminates overlap of future reports Conditions 1 The ACD status can be printed periodically The period is assigned in Admin Programming The ACD records contain information for both ACD agents and ACD group 2 The Supervisor mu
259. eration ACCOUNT CODE button PGM FLEX PGM 84 SAVE ONE TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE button PGM FLEX PGM 84 Account code up to 12 digits SAVE To enter an Account Code using an ACCOUNT CODE button prior to placing a call Lift the handset Press the ACCOUNT CODE button Dial the Account Code 1 to 12 digits Press Intercom dial tone is heard Place the CO IP call as normal on FR wn S 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the ONE TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE button 3 Place the CO IP call as normal To enter an Account Code using an ACCOUNT CODE button during a call 1 Press the ACCOUNT CODE button 2 Dial the Account Code 1 to 12 digits 3 Press Or 1 Press the ONE TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE button SLT To enter an Account Code prior to placing a call 1 Lift the handset Dial Flex Numbering Plan code 550 Dial the Account Code 1 to 12 digits Press an A O N Place the CO IP call as normal iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 To enter an Account Code during a call 1 Momentarily press the Hook switch 2 Dial Flex Numbering Plan code 550 3 Dial the Account Code 1 to 12 digits 4 Press 7 Conditions 1 When entering an Account Code during a call DTMF digits are not heard bv the connected partv 2 A maximum of 1000 ONE TOUCH ACCOUN
260. eration Manual Issue 5 6 calls are not sent to the ANI Link unit In this situation emergency calls are sent over normal system PSTN ISDN circuits and the station digits are not sent 7 SMDR output will identify any call made via the Emergency call feature including the success or failure of calls Related Features e Emergency Call e Emergency Call Attendant Alert Hardware e Tone Commander PBX ANI Link unit or equal e CAMA telco trunk e SLTM port connected to ANI Link unit e LGCM port connected to ANI Link unit 102 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 36 EMERGENCY CALL Description Regardless of a station s dialing restrictions COS the user may dial assigned Emergency numbers Operation System The system will automatically override any toll restrictions and process an assigned Emergency number call Conditions Programming STATION 1 Emergency CO Group PGM 112 BTN 18 TABLES 1 Emergency Code Table PGM 226 Related Features Hardware 103 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 37 EXECUTIVE SECRETARY FORWARD Description iPECS Phones can be assigned as Executive Secretary pairs By activating DND the Executive also activates Unconditional Call Forward to the Secretary which will forward Executive calls to the Secretary With the CO Call to Secretary option enabled all CO calls to the Executiv
261. ers using 2 dial pad digits for each character 4 Press the SAVE button confirmation tone is received the new User Custom Text Display Message is stored and the station returns to idle SLT To activate a Display Message 1 Lift handset Dial 561 the SLT Programming code Dial 51 the Display Message code Dial Message number 00 20 Dial auxiliary data as desired an A O N 6 Momentarily press the hook switch confirmation tone is received To cancel an active Display Message 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 559 the SLT Feature Cancel code To enter the User Custom Message 00 1 Lift the handset Dial 561 the SLT Programming code Dial 52 the Custom Message program code confirmation is received Enter the Message contents up to 24 characters a A O N Momentarily press the hook switch confirmation tone is received System Attendant To activate Display Messages for other stations 1 Press the PGM button Dial 051 Attendant Display Message code Dial station range To view available messages press VOL UP VOL DOWN button Dial Message number 00 20 Dial auxiliary data as desired 7 Press the SAVE button To cancel active Display Messages for other stations 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 052 Attendant Display Message Cancel code oa A WwW NY 3 Dial station range 4
262. es not INBAND and 2833 NOTE For SIP Trunk all type of DTMF is supported 401 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 If SIP Extension talking voice path is connected directly each other then they can implement INBAND or 2833 DTMF independently Synchronization between system and SIP Phone is required SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 DTMF Type One of INFO default DTMF RELAY SIP Phone Self Programming DTMF Type INFO or a specific INFO type if there is in select list By Provisioning for LG Ericsson SIP Phone DTMF Type of Phone is automatically set to INFO Type In that case you do not need to set it by SIP Phone Self Programming Network Related Configuration 1 SRTP MFIM IP address for WAN is different from original IP address for LAN Condition 1 MFIM has firewall IP address or MFIM is port forwarded bv VOIM WAN U or other Switches Condition 2 There is a SIP Phone in WAN side of MFIM Resolution SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 Same Zone with MFIM OFF Implementation MFIM will implement signaling with its WAN IP address for the SIP Phone ASIP Phone is on NAT environment for example wireless SIP Phone via AP Condition 1 The NAT IP address or IP Port of SIP Phone WAN address of SIP Phone is frequently updated Condition 2 Sometimes communication is disconnected unreachable or mismatched
263. escription The Short Message Service SMS provides the abilitv to send and receive text messages to and from iPECS phones equipped with a displav including the Phontage UCS Client and WLAN Phone The text can comprise words numbers or an alphanumeric combination Each short message can be up to 100 characters in length when Latin alphabets are used Users send and receive messages from their IPECS Phone or the Station Program selection in the IPECS system Web Home Page For operation using the IPECS system Home Page see your System Administrator Operation To assign a Flex button as a SMS SEND button 1 PGM FLEX PGM 36 SAVE To resend an existing SMS message 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 36 the SMS send code SMS SENDING MODE RESEND 1 EDIT 2 3 Dial 1 to resend a message DIAL STA DEST XXX XXX SKIP 4 Dial the desired station range to receive the message or to use the displayed station range STA 100 124 SEND SAVE CANCEL 5 Press the SAVE button to send the message or ff to cancel To send a new message 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 36 the SMS send code SMS SENDING MODE RESEND 1 EDIT 2 3 Dial 2 to send a new message DIAL STA DEST XXX XXX 270 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 Dial the de
264. est for assistance Programming NUMBERING PLAN 1 ACD Group Help Code PGM 107 Btn 5 STATION GROUPS 1 ACD Group PGM 191 2 ACD Supervisor PGM 191 Btn 18 Related Features e Station Groups e Supervisor Help Response Hardware 2 5 1 4 Agent Queued Calls Display Description An Agent can view the queued call status for an ACD group when not on a call in off duty or wrap up status In addition an active Agent can view the queued call status for an ACD group while on a call using Display Call Queue Flex button The Call Queue display will show the ACD group number the number of calls in queue and the longest queue time iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation Agent iPECS Phone To assign a DISPLAY CALL QUEUE buttons PGM FLEX 575 ACD Group Number SAVE To display ACD Call Queue status when the Agent is idle and on duty 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Dial 575 the ACD Call Queue status code 3 Dial the ACD Group number The display shows the Queued call status and will update as the queue status changes If no calls are in queue the phone returns to idle 4 Hang up to return to idle and normal display Or 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the DISPLAY CALL QUEUE button The display shows the Queued call status and will update as the queue status changes If no calls are in queue the phone re
265. eve Station Group Voice Mail 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press GROUP MAILBOX button to receive the Password prompt 3 Dial the ACD Group number Group Mailbox password to receive the Number of Messages prompt 4 Dial desired option code 5 At completion of session hang up to return to idle 27 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Remote Caller To leave a voice message 1 After Greeting and beep leave the message Ow 2 Hang up to quit recording or dial 7 for further options Conditions 1 The System Administrator or Supervisor may change the Group Mailbox password 2 An external caller CO IP call cannot access the Group Mailbox to retrieve messages Programming STATION GROUPS 1 Group Attributes PGM 191 2 Mailbox Message Wait Station PGM 191 Btn 24 2 3 Mailbox Password PGM 191 Btn 24 3 Related Features e External Auto Attendant Voice Mail e Station Groups e VMIM VSF Voice Mail e Supervisors Hardware e iPECS Phone 2 5 8 Group Name Description Each hunt group is assigned a name of up to 12 characters The name is employed as the called party display for internal callers in the output of group statistics Operation System Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Conditions 28 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming STATION GROUPS Station Gr
266. f Net feature apply When enabled calls forwarded Off net will receive the Off net forward prompt When enabled calls forwarded Off net will receive the DTMF repeat tone To utilize off net call forward of incoming analog CO line to other analog CO line a valid Open Loop Detect Timer should be assigned by programming for the analog CO lines to prevent CO line lock up when analog CO lines are in use oak W DY Programming STATION 1 Call Forward PGM 111 Btn 2 2 Off Net Forward PGM 111 Btn 14 371 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 SYSTEM 1 Off Net Prompt Usage PGM 160 Btn 11 2 DTMF Repeat Tone Usage PGM 160 Btn 15 3 System Attendant Assignment PGM 164 Btn 1 4 Unsupervised Conference Timer PGM 182 Btn 5 5 Open Loop Detect Timer PGM 142 Btn 13 Related Features e Call Forward e Unsupervised Conference Hardware 372 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 9 CALL QUEUING Description Any station can call the Attendant by dialing the Attendant Call code 0 When an Attendant call experiences a busy the call is queued to the Attendant group The call will be delivered to the first available Attendant Operation To call the Attendant 1 Dial 0 the Attendant Call Code Condition 1 Call routing order follows the order of entry in the Attendant Assignments program 2 The Attendant is informed of a queued Att
267. f day in ISDN messages and automatically adjusts the time if the time in the system deviates from the ISDN time Operation System Operation of this feature is automatic Conditions 1 NTP packets are expected over UDP port 123 Assure this port is open and available 2 Asecondary NTP server address can be defined should the first server not respond 3 The system adjusts for the local time zone assigned in the system as the Standard System Time as well as Daylight Savings Time DST if set Programming SYSTEM 1 Network Time Date PGM 161 Btn 12 2 NTP Active PGM 195 Btn 1 3 NTP Sever address Web only 4 Std system time local Time Zone Web only Related Features e Auto Service Mode Control e Automatic System Daylight Savings Time e System Clock Set Hardware 44 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 11 BATTERY BACK UP MEMORY Description The system database is protected from power loss by a long life 10 year lithium dry cell battery Should local power fail the battery will maintain the system memory and proper operation of the system clock Operation System Operation of this feature is automatic Conditions 1 The Initialization switch must be in the OFF position to enable Memory Battery Back up Otherwise should power fail the system will initialize the database on power up Refer to the iPECS Hardware Description and Installation manual section
268. fic Analysis Authorization Codes Password Hardware RS 323 device to capture SMDR 173 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 68 3 Lost Call Recording Description Incoming calls where the caller hangs up before answer or while in a hold state are considered Abandoned or Lost calls Special SMDR call records are provided for lost calls in real time as they occur and a summary Lost Call count report is available on demand The real time Lost Call records provide details on the called party when and how long the call rang or was on hold before being abandoned etc Description of the record details is provided in the following charts As noted in the charts the dialed number field indicates the type of call and the ring or hold duration before the call was abandoned The first character in the NUM field is the status of the call when abandoned R normal ring to a station ring to a station group and H call placed in a hold state including Transfer hold STA CO TIME START DIAL CL CPN COST ACCOUNT DIAL CLI CPN NUM II NUM 1 CODE EXT 31 00 00 14 05 02 15 45 R RING 01 35 e Incoming call on CO Line 31 received on May 14 2002 at 3 45 pm rang the assigned stations for 1 minute and 35 seconds STA CO TIME START DIAL CLI CPN COST ACCOUNT DIAL CLI CPN NUM II NUM 1 CODE 101 31 00 00 14 05 02 16 45 R RING 02 03 e Station 101 rang for an incoming call on CO Line 31 on May 14 2002 at 4 45 pm
269. for the Station Authorization code or for a System Authorization Code dal or and the Authorization table index 2 Dial the corresponding Authorization Code 3 Place call as normal SLT To assign a Station Authorization code 1 Lift the handset Dial SLT Program Mode Entry code 561 Dial Station User Program code 33 Dial Authorization Code 1 to 12 digits Momentarily press the Hook switch receive confirmation tone oa A W N iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 To enter an Authorization Code when second dial tone is received 1 Dial the station number for the Station Authorization code or for a System Authorization Code dial or and the Authorization table index 2 Dial the corresponding Authorization Code 3 Momentarily press the Hook switch 4 Place call as normal DISA To enter an Authorization Code when second dial tone is received 1 Dial the station number for a Station Authorization code or for a System code 7 or and the Authorization table index 2 Dial the corresponding Authorization Code 3 Place call as normal System Attendant To assign an Authorization Code 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial Attendant Station Program Code 031 3 Dial station number for a Station code or for system code 7 or and the Authorization table index 4 Dial Authorization Code 5 Press the SAVE butto
270. ft at the originally called station even if the call is forwarded to another station 8 While idle the user may toggle between CLI number and CLI name if available by pressing the TRANS button 9 The CLI and called station number will be shown in the SMDR record 10 For ISDN calls the CLI Message Wait will display and dial the number as shown in the Table below modified based on assignments in PGM 200 as follows Incoming Prefix Code My Area Code My Prefix Area Code International Access Code Inc Prefix Area Country Access Code Received Caller ID Display Code Code No 0343 82 00 National 507951 0343 50 7951 No 0343 82 00 National 507951 0343 50 7951 No 0345 82 00 National 0343 507951 0343 50 7951 Yes 0343 82 00 National 507951 0343 50 7951 Yes 0343 82 00 Subscriber 0343 507951 0343 50 7951 Yes 0343 82 00 International 00492 888 492 888 7777 7777 Programming STATION CLIP LCD Display PGM 114 Btn 1 CLIP LCD MSG WAIT EN DIS PGM 114 Btn 10 SYSTEM Incoming Prefix Code Insertion PGM 143 Btn 12 International Access Code PGM 143 Btn 14 My Area Code PGM 143 Btn 15 My Prefix Area Code PGM 143 Btn 16 SS Ga h A DN A Related Features e Station Message Wait Call Back e ISDN Integrated Service Digital Network 269 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Hardware e iPECS Phone 3 9 2 Short Message Service SMS D
271. gency call use until the Power Fail signal is removed Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when assigned Programming STATION 1 Emergency CO Group PGM 112 Btn 18 2 Proctor Monitor PGM 113 Btn 22 CO IP LINES 1 Proctor On Off PGM 141 Btn 12 TABLES 1 Emergency Code Table PGM 226 Conditions 1 The system Loop Start lines connected to the ANI Link unit must be assigned to a separate CO line group and the individual CO IP lines assigned for emergency service 2 The ANI Link unit must be properly connected to an SLT port and an LGCM port on the same LAN as the MFIM In addition the ANI Link device must be co located with the iPECS system in the same building 3 The ANI Link unit must be properly installed and connected to a CAMA trunk from the telco to send location information to the local emergency center 4 It is the Customer s responsibility to maintain the ANI Link unit number location database there is no integration provided between the iPECS database and the ANI Link unit 5 The system must be programmed for a three or four digit numbering plan The system must send four digits to the ANI unit When a three digit plan is used a leading O is automatically added to the station number 6 During a power failure if the ANI Link unit Power Fail contacts normally open are connected to a system SLT port the iPECS will recognize the fault and emergency 101 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Op
272. gent s station 5 When logged off the Agent s active database including the following items are saved e Station Number e Station Attributes PGM 111 124 e CO Routing Ring assignments DID routing etc e Voice Mail e Station Group assignment 6 The number of Hot Desk phones and Hot Desk users is limited to the system capacity Each Hot Desk phone and Hot Desk user Agent requires a separate station channel in the system 121 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 7 To identify the station number only station authorization codes may be used for Hot Desk login 8 An ACD Agent must use the Agent Login procedure as defined under the ACD feature description 9 DKT Phone cannot be Hot Desk Programming STATION 1 Hot Desk PGM 112 Btn 13 TABLES 1 Hot Desk Attributes PGM 250 Btn 1 3 2 Auto Logout Timer PGM 250 Btn 3 Related Features e Station Groups e Automatic Call Distribution e Call Forward Hardware e iPECS Phone 122 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 44 ICLID CALL ROUTING Description The system can employ ICLID Incoming Calling Line Id to determine the routing of incoming external calls Each CO IP Line including DID Lines may be assigned to employ ICLID routing The system will compare the received ICLID to entries in the ICLID Routing Table and if a match is found will route the call to the destination defined
273. gnizes the Forward condition and bvpass hunt calls around the station or routes hunt calls to the station based on the svstem database 8 No Answer forward emplovs the Station No Answer Forward Timer unless it is set to zero in which case the Svstem No Answer Timer is used 50 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming STATION 1 Preset Call Forward PGM 120 2 Station Call Forward No Answer Timer PGM 123 Btn 1 3 Direct Transfer Mail Box Destination PGM 120 Btn 6 STATION GROUPS 1 Member Forward PGM 191 Btn 14 Circ Term 24 23 UCD or 12 Ring SVSTEM 1 Svstem Call Forward No Answer Timer PGM 181 Btn 1 Related Features Call Forward Off Hook Signaling External Auto Attendant Voice Mail VMIM VSF Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail DND Do Not Disturb DND One Time DND Private Line Hardware 51 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 14 CALL PARK Description Auser may place an active CO IP call in a special holding location Park Orbit for easy access from any station in the system Operation iPECS Phone To park an active external call 1 Press the TRANS button 2 Dial the Park Orbit 3 Return to idle To retrieve a parked call 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Dial the Park Orbit SLT To park an active external call 1 Momentarily press the hook switch 2 Dial the Par
274. he ACD group 2 The Overflow destination may be any station or group including the ACD group VMIM VSF Mailbox but cannot be a member of the overflowing ACD group 3 If an agent becomes available during an announcement except a guaranteed announcement the call is passed immediately to the agent 29 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming STATION GROUPS ACD Group PGM 191 Overflow Destination PGM191 Btn 7 Overflow Time PGM 191 Btn 8 Music Source PGM 191 Btn 11 Alternate Destination PGM 191 Btn 13 Report No Members PGM 191 Btn 10 Agent Priority PGM 191 Btn 19 NOOR WD A Related Features e Automatic Call Distribution Hardware 2 5 10 ACD Caller Controlled ICLID Routing Description With Caller Controlled ICLID enabled ICLID Usage for the ACD Group at any time during or within 5 seconds after a Guaranteed Announcement the system will monitor for digits dialed by the caller Received digits are compared to the ICLID Table entries If a match is found the call routes to the destination defined in the ICLID Ring Assignment Table Available destinations are a Voice Mail announcement system speed dial a station or a station group If a match is not found the call returns to the queue and is handled as defined for the ACD group Operation System ICLID Routing of ACD group calls is automatic based on the ACD group assignments Conditions 1 The conditi
275. he Net attendant The system provides ring back tone to the calling station and the Net DSS button lights To assign ATD DND button 1 PGM Flex Button PGM 83 SAVE Conditions 1 ICM Call is routed to Net attendant if system attendant press ATD DND button and the next attendant is Net attendant 2 CO Call can be routed to Net attendant only if DID DISA destination is ATD and the ring is not assigned to any station Programming STATION 1 Attendant DND Button PGM 115 STN PGM 83 SYSTEM 1 Net Attendant Assign PGM 164 2 Net DSS cannot be assigned to the System Attendant 3 DID DISA Destination PGM 167 4 CO Ring Assignment PGM 144 2 70 2 17 Centralized Voice Mail Description This function can support that all voice mail occurred in all systems can be recorded in an external VMS 195 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation Refer to the External Voice Mail function in the system features Conditions 1 The centralize VMS should be assigned in slave system and the number of the centralized VMS should use the representative number of mail access created in master system 2 The numbering plan including the representative of mail access assigned in master system should be included in the numbering plan of QSIG group in slave system Programming SYSTEM 1 Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 BTN 6 2 Centralized VMS Assign PGM 190 2
276. he authority to use serial DSS in Admin Check the serial DSS power is off only for LIP 8048DSS Power off the LIP 8000 keyset Connect serial DSS to keyset through serial cable Power on the DSS only for LIP 8048DSS Power on the keyset NO oO P W b Program DSS button on station program by pressing PGM Flex button Or program DSS button from web Flexible button PGM menu Editing LSS Labe 1 After connecting serial LSS enter ADM 129 and enter serial dss order and desired button number 2 Edit Label string according to flex button feature 3 If Label is saved and Flex button is programmed the label string is displayed in the flex button field Conditions 1 Total number of Serial DSS per a system is limited Refer the table below System Max number of Serial DSS Max number of LSS iPECS Micro 50 40 iPECS 50 50 40 iPECS 100 50 40 iPECS 300 100 60 iPECS 600 200 80 iPECS 1200 200 80 Above limitation includes Hot desk Agent stations 2 LIP 8004D doesn t support serial DSS 3 Maximum 4 serial DSS boxes can be connected to one keyset 360 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 LIP 8048DSS is powered by external adaptor but others cannot use external adaptor They should be powered from keyset or LIP 8048 DSS 5 LIP 8000 keyset can supply power to maximum two DSS For this the keyset should use external adapto
277. he message will include the button type Wrap if the ACD DND timer is activated 2 The ACD ON OFF DUTY flex button will flash while the agent is Off duty for any reason The button LED extinguishes when the Agent returns to On duty status 3 While Off dutv the supervisor s flex button LED assigned for the Agent s station flashes at the DND rate The supervisor may call the station overriding the Off duty status 4 The ACD ON OFF DUTY GROUP 0 button overwrites other ACD DUTY GROUP buttons only one ACD ON OFF DUTY GROUP button can be assigned at a station 5 The default value of the ACD DND Wrap Up Timer is 10 seconds Programming NUMBERING PLAN 1 Agent On Off Duty code PGM 107 Btn 2 2 Agent ON OFF duty in all hunt group PGM 109 Btn 17 STATION 1 Auto ACD DND Reason code PGM 113 Btn 15 20 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 STATION GROUPS 1 ACD Group PGM 191 2 ACD DND Wrap up Timer PGM 191 Btn 20 Related Features e Agent Automatic Wrap Up e Auto ACD DND Unavailable Service e Event Messages Hardware 2 5 2 Announcements Description Each ACD group can provide announcements to incoming callers Primary and secondary announcements are available with control timers The first announcement is played after 15 control timer The 274 control timer determines the period between the first and second announcement The second announcement can be replayed at defined i
278. he system will retry the notification until the notification is successful or the number of call attempts reaches the Retry count Operation Operation of message notification is automatic when configured Condition 1 Outbound notification over a PSTN line is not available 2 Caller Id will be the external caller who left the message or for messages from another station Caller Id will be the station receiving the message 3 If VSF VMIM Notify is changed to Not Use any existing notification will be terminated after the initial notification call 4 For proper operation the Station COS and CO Group access for the station must be such as to allow the notification call 5 The destination of the notification is the Mobile telephone number assigned in PGM 236 6 If all lines in the assigned CO group are busy when the system attempts to place the notification call the System will continuously try to seize CO line until a line is successfully seized 7 The Retry counter is incremented after the system access the CO line for notification 8 The Retry count is from 1 to 9 the retry interval is from 1 to 3 minutes 9 If anew message is logged before answer of the notification call the message will be available to the user and a new notification is not invoked If a new message is received after answering the notification call the System will invoke another notification call The user will receive the notification after retu
279. hone Attributes 211 3 SIP Phone Provisioning 212 Related Features Hardware e MFIM1200 Support up to 600 channels SIP extension CO trunk simultaneously e MFIM600 Issue 0 1 2 Support up to 100 channels SIP extension CO trunk simultaneously Issue 3 Support up to 200 channels SIP extension CO trunk simultaneously e MFIM300 Support up to 200 channels SIP extension CO trunk simultaneously e MFIM100 Support up to 100 channels SIP extension CO trunk simultaneously 403 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 e iIPECS 5OA B Micro Support SIP extension and CO trunk according to the maximum station and CO lines 404 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual 8 2 PROVISIONING Description By default you do not need to implement provisioning Provisioning is only for LG Ericsson SIP Phone types If you do not want to implement provisioning you can set the same attributes in SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 per a SIP Extension or by range SIP Attributes 210 lt Why gt To pre assign default attributes and download configuration to SIP Extensions when they register to System MFIM lt For Who for all of specified Phone type or for one MAC specified Phone gt Private Mac Register Timer 3600 3 4 Local UDP port enen Port 5
280. ial using the name The user selects from one of three Dial by Name directories and enters characters employing 2 dial pad buttons for each character The system finds and displays the nearest match to the user entries The user may continue entering characters or scroll the directory at any point using the VOL UP VOL DWN button and select a name to call The number associated with a selected name is displayed by using the TRANS button Operation iPECS Phone To use Dial by Name using a SPEED button 1 Press the SPEED button twice 2 Dial the desired directory l Intercom U User Speed Dial S System Speed Dial 3 Search the directory using the VOL UP VOL DOWN button or by entering characters See Station Speed Dial for character entry procedure 4 Press the SAVE button to place the call To use Dial by Name using the LIP 8000 series soft buttons 1 Press the DIR soft button 2 Dial the desired directory 1 User Speed Dial 2 System Speed Dial 3 Intercom 3 Search the directory using the Navigation button or by entering two digits for each character see section 2 64 3 for character entry procedure 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to place the call To toggle between the name and number display 1 Press the TRANS button To program the station user name 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 74 the User Name Program code 3 Dial the name up to 12 characters refer to Stati
281. ier and speaker s are required 8 The systems External Control Contacts may be assigned to activate when External Page is accessed 9 A station is permitted only one Page Zone queue request at a time If a station attempts another Page Zone queue only the later queue request is honored 10 When a busy Page Zone becomes idle the system will select the oldest page queue and signal the appropriate station The signaled station will have an audible ring indicating the queue callback The audible ringing will be a distinctive signal The All Page Zone while signaling a queued station is considered busy In addition the All Page Zone is considered busy when any page zone is active 11 The queue recall is always in the tone ring mode regardless of the station s ICM signaling mode 12 If the waiting station is idle the Call Back ring signals the station for 15 seconds after which the queue is canceled and the next station in the queue is signaled 13 1f the waiting station is busy and the Page zone becomes available the next idle station in the Page Queue list is signaled and the busy waiting station is placed at the bottom of Page Queue list If there is no idle next station in the Page Queue the Page Queue is canceled 14 When the waiting station goes to idle and both a Page Queue and CO Call back Queue exist the Page Queue is given priority 277 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6
282. igning a conference group number and the members of the group A voice recording which is played to members receiving the Conference group call can be associated with the group Initiation of a Group call can be password protected with a 5 digit password assigned when the group is created There are two 2 types of Conference Groups Station and System The Station Conference group is created by the station user who is assigned as the group supervisor and is the only member that can initiate a Conference group call The System Conference Group is created by an Attendant or system administrator and any member can initiate the Conference Group call The member initiating the call becomes the supervisor for that Conference Group call The supervisor can manage membership in the conference and can monitor the status of each member in out of conference The Supervisor can remove members from the conference or if members are absent the supervisor can add a non member to the conference An Absent Supervisor timer terminates the conference if the supervisor is not in the conference for the timer interval Setting the interval to 0 disables this feature Once a group is created the supervisor imitates the conference by calling the conference group The system then attempts to call each member of the group either simultaneously or in turn using the Interval timer assigned for the group Members that answer the call receive the recorded voice announ
283. ile receiving a muted ring Or 1 The muted ring is changed to normal CO ring when you go on hook state Then you can answer the offered call Conditions 1 Call Offer is only applied to a station that is in talk status 2 During a conference or paging call offer is not activated 3 System does not support the path reservation mode of standard QSIG specification 186 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming SYSTEM 1 Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 2 70 2 6 Net Conference Description A call to a station on one node is able to conference in a party on any other node Members of conference must be allowed up to 3 stations of the network Operation To make a Net Conference 1 Press the CONF button during conversation through the network call The exiting call is on hold and an ICM dial tone is provided 2 Make a Net Call to another station of other node 3 Press the CONF button when 3rd party answers The second call is on hold and an ICM dial tone is provided 4 Press the CONF button again at master station All parties can make a conversation To clear a Net Conference 1 Any station in the net conference hangs up during the conference 2 The net conference will be cancelled and the network path will be cleared Conditions 1 Multi line conference time is not applied on 3 party conference of networking 2 Standard IP phone can not be a master stati
284. in the ICLID Ring Assignment Table Destinations can be the VMIM VSF an external Voice Mail a station or a station group An ACD group may be assigned to route calls employing the ICLID Tables When configured calls re route based on the Caller Entered ICLID Operation System System implements routing automatically based on database entries and the received ICLID Conditions 1 If the received ICLID does not match an entry in the ICLID Route Table the call is routed based on the type and other programming Ring assignments etc for CO IP Line 2 For analog CO Lines the system will await receipt of valid ICLID for the ICLID Ring Timer At expiration of the timer if ICLID is not received the call is routed based on the type and other programming Ring assignments etc 3 The ICLID received from the CO IP Line must be a telephone number to match an ICLID Route Table entry 4 If ICLID routing is enabled for a DID line DID Call Wait is disabled Programming CO IP 1 ICLID Ring Timer PGM 142 Btn 14 ISDN ICLID 1 ICLID Route Table PGM 203 2 ICLID Ring Assignment Table PGM 204 STATION GROUPS 1 ACD ICLID Use PGM 191 Btn 21 Related Features e CO IP Ring Assignment e Automatic Call Distribution e Direct Inward Dial DID Hardware 123 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 45 IN ROOM INDICATION Description A supervisor can press the In Room Indication button and
285. inet fans PSU1 or PSU2 for a power supply fault or PSU1 FAN or PSU2 FAN Programming SYSTEM 1 Cabinet Attribute PGM 197 Related Features e Alarm Signal Door Bell e Emergency Call Attendant Alert Hardware 369 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 7 CALL FORWARD ATTENDANT Description As with other stations Attendants can forward calls to other stations in the system Calls may be forwarded unconditionally on busy or no answer Operation Attendant To activate Call Forward 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button to receive intercom dial tone 2 Press the FWD button 3 Dial code 0 5 the Call Forward type 4 Dial the station number to receive forwarded calls To deactivate Call Forward 1 While idle press the FWD button Or 1 While Off hook press the FWD button 2 Dial Condition 1 The Conditions of the Call Forward feature apply 2 If the System Attendant activates Unconditional Call Forward the receiving station will receive Attendant calls and recall ring In addition if the receiving station is an iPECS Phone the user will be able to activate features normally reserved for a Main Attendant 3 The system requires at least one Attendant be available The last available Attendant cannot activate Call Forward to an Attendant that has activated the Alternate Attendant feature Programming Related Features e
286. ing a call to the VMIM VSF Voice Mail group or from an iPECS Phone by pressing the MSG CALLBK button or by pressing a VMAILBOX button while off hook receiving Intercom dial tone Prompts are then received to guide the user in the Voice Mailbox operation The user must enter a Mailbox number generally the station number and a corresponding password in response to the Request for Mailbox number Please enter your Mailbox number and Request for Password Please enter your password code prompts If the user enters valid and matching Mailbox and password numbers the Number of Messages prompt You have xx new messages You have yy saved messages is received At this point the user also receives the VM long option prompt To play new messages press one to play saved messages press two to set greeting or password press eight to disconnect press pound Press 0 for the operator Press nine to hear this message again When the user responds by dialing 1 the first new message is played At the end of message playback the New Message option prompt To replay message press one to listen to the next message press two to delete message press three to forward message press four to call the sender press five to skip message press six to return to main menu press nine is played This process is repeated until the last new message is played and the No Message prompt No Messages is playe
287. ing for all of CONFTYPE SIP Phones If you want to make provisioning for a specific individual SIP Phone then input Private Mac Address of the SIP Phone Set the attributes you want to set for those type of SIP Phones on their registration to system and press save button To view the saved information press the view button NOTE Abnormal Case If you cannot see the saved provisioning data even though you saved them then you can try to solve the problem as below Cause of Problem MFIM does not have enough working memory space currently Resolution Shut down SIP Server save Provisioning Start SIP Server 406 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Step 1 Shut down SIP Server connect COM1 and enter into maintenance mode and type maint gt sipstack kill SIP stack kill kill start refresh will be displayed on the screen Step 2 Go to SIP Data SIP Phone Provisioning 212 and implement saving Provisioning Step 3 Start Up SIP Server connect COM1 and enter into maintenance mode and type maint gt sipstack start SIP stack start kill start refresh will be displayed ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT CONFTYPE Mandatory select one of LG Ericsson SIP Phone type Private MAC Specify MAC address of a SIP Phone to serve private provisioning for a Extension
288. ion System Auto Release of SPEAKER button operation is automatic for supported features see conditions below Conditions 1 This feature applies to all User and Attendant Programming except Custom Message CO IP line Disable and Version Display Auto Release of SPEAKER button also applies to features including Call Park Call Back Call Forward and CO IP Queuing 2 If during Station User Programming erroneous data is entered error tone is received and the user must correct the error before the station will return to idle automatically Programming Related Features Hardware e iPECS Phone 317 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 4 AUTOMATIC SPEAKER SELECT Description iPECS Phones programmed for Auto Speaker Select can access a CO IP line or an internal call by pressing the appropriate button without the need to lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button Audio from the CO IP line or called station is sent to the speaker as if the user pressed the SPEAKER button and the speakerphone s MIC is activate Operation iPECS Phone To access an internal or external system resource 1 Press an assigned FLEX button Conditions 1 For iPECS Phones not equipped assigned with speakerphone the user must lift the handset to be heard 2 Paging while on the speakerphone will cause feedback from the paging equipment If Auto Speaker is enabled and a PAGE ZON
289. ion amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 5 CALL HOLD Description SIP Phone make a call on hold The other party goes to held state and hear Music On Hold MOH Operation Make a Call On Hold 1 Press HOLD button 2 or Press TRANS button and OnHook 3 Call is automatically exclusively held on system 4 Only the Extension who made the call held can retrieve the call Music On Hold 1 System serves MOH from MISC to SIP Phone via VOIP VOIM channel Held Recall 1 After programmed recall timer system makes a call for recall to the SIP Extension who hold the call originally Conditions 1 To serve MOH for SIP Phone VOIP VOIM channel for RTP Packet Relay is required Programming Related Features Hardware 412 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 6 CALL TRANSFER Description SIP Phone supports Consultation Transfer and Blind Transfer Consultation Transfer is also separated to Screened and Unscreened Transfer by System Operation Consultation Transfer 1 During talking on a call press TRANSFER button 2 Dial destination number 3 Destination is ringing and answers the call Screened Or Destination is ringing Unscreened 4 Press TRANSFER COMPLETE button or OnHook Blind Transfer 1 During talking on a call press BLIND TRANSFER button 2 Dial destination number 3 Press SEND or Call Complete button 4 SIP Phone will g
290. ion allowing the mobile phone to place and receive calls through the system ISDN DID calls are sent to the user s iPECS Phone and the active registered mobile phone simultaneously If the mobile phone is paired with a Hunt group station Hunt group calls routed to the station also ring to the active mobile phone when enabled The mobile phone users can access the facilities of the IPECS to place internal and external calls as well as activate access features To access system facilities and resources the mobile user calls the DID number of the corresponding iPECS Phone When the call is received the system matches the CLI to the mobile phone and provides the mobile user with system dial tone The user may be allowed to register and activate a mobile phone Operation iPECS Phone To register a the mobile phone number 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 37 3 Dial the mobile phone number 4 Press the SAVE button To activate a registered mobile phone from the user s station 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 38 3 Dial digit 1 to activate 0 to deactivate 4 Press the SAVE button To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS 1 Dial the DID number of the station the system will check the CLID answer the call and the user will receive intercom dial tone 2 Place internal or external iPECS call as normal To Transfer a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS 1
291. ion is not required in smaller solutions but still more cost effective In a bigger solution more then 20 30 MEX users it is needed to compete with Aastra Cisco and various hosted solutions including the hosted solution we sell Out band signaling makes it a truly transparent solution The user places an outgoing call exactly as he is used to and it works on any cell phone This means that the user can use speed dials and do not need to have any special phone or application installed in the phone Also the use of DISA which is considered too complicated by many users will be obsolete Operation 1 Incoming call from PSTN to MEX TDC uses a prefix on the To tag and From Contact tag These prefixes are trunk based and should be added to the mobile extension section of pgm 133 B MEK Op eee be SIP TRUNK CO 001 024 Pubke User AHRJ 1 The Public user calls 084707405 LIP 105 and an Invite A is sent to iPECS 2 LIP 105 has MEX and the call should be routed to MEX 105 We now need to add two prefixes to the outgoing Invite B and they are described below A Incoming Invite From lt sip 468920505 se pgw1 ipt ip tele dk 5060 user phone gt tag 1399855756 To lt sip 4684707405 btse ip tdk dk 5060 user phone gt Contact lt sip 468920505 62 242 160 7 5060 transport udp gt B Outgoing Invite To lt sip 463949804670111111 tdc se gt From lt sip 46752468004468920505 tdc se gt tag 61D3F1B4 1
292. ion of Intercom Tenancy Groups is automatic when programmed Conditions 1 Intercom calls from a station to a denied access Intercom Tenancy Group will return error tone 2 Intercom Tenancy does not affect the Station Numbering Plan in the system All stations in the system must have different station numbers even if they are assigned to different Intercom Tenancy groups 3 The Attendant of an ICM Tenancy Group can be any station in the system and it is not affected by ICM Tenancy Group access 4 When the Attendant of an ICM Tenancy Group sets Day Night Weekend mode it will affect only the assigned ICM Tenancy Group 5 Calls to and from CO IP Lines are not affect by ICM Tenancy however calls can not be transferred between groups if access is not allowed between the groups 6 Intercom Tenancy Group 00 is the default or unassigned group Stations assigned to group 00 are unaffected by Intercom Tenancy and can place and receive calls with stations of all other groups Programming STATION 1 ICM Group Number PGM 111 Btn 17 2 ICM Tenancy Group PGM 125 TABLES 1 Flexible DID Table PGM 231 2 Auto Ring Mode PGM 233 Related Features e Intercom Call ICM Call 264 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 e CO IP Ring Assignment e Flexible Numbering Plan e Call Transfer e Auto Service Mode Control Hardware 265 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6
293. ion xxx e Forwarded to speed bin xxx e Queued CO IP xx e Locked temporary COS change e COS x 220 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 SLT To hear Date amp Time Prompt 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial feature code 661 for IPECS Micro amp 50 amp 100 661 for all other systems announcement for time is heard Date is May 2nd Time is xx xx pm To hear Station Number Prompt 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial feature code 662 for IPECS Micro amp 50 amp 100 661 for all other systems announcement for station is heard This is station 150 To hear Station Settings 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial feature code 663 for IPECS Micro amp 50 amp 100 663 for all other systems status for station is reported Items that will be reported are as follows e Station number e Station IP Address e Station Mac Address e Station ICM Mode Handsfree Tone Privacy e Listed message x the number of all message waiting e Wake Up Time hh mm e Do not disturb e Forwarded to station xxx e Forwarded to speed bin xxx e Queued CO IP xx e Locked temporary COS change COS x Conditions 1 For station status items from Listed message x to COS x will not be announced if not active Programming STATION 1 VSF Access PGM 113 Btn 2 Related Features e VMIM VSF Hardware e VSF and or VMIM 221 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operatio
294. it queue is full the station will receive ICM busy tone 5 A Message Wait remainder tone can be enabled to remind the user of messages waiting 6 A station in Call Forward can leave a message wait 7 A Message Wait indication is left at the originally called station even if the call is forwarded 8 An iPECS Phone with LCD may call back to stations that left messages in any desired order or the normal oldest first order 9 Placing an Intercom call to a station will cancel any existing Message Wait from that station Programming SYSTEM 1 Message Reminder Tone Timer PGM 181 Btn 8 274 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features e Message Wait Reminder Tone e CLI Message Wait Hardware 3 9 4 Message Wait Reminder Tone Description In addition to the MSG CALLBK button LED the iPECS Phones can be sent a tone as a periodic reminder to the user of message waits in queue This tone is sent to the station only while idle and is heard over the speaker Operation System Reminder tone is sent to stations automatically when assigned Conditions 1 The interval between tones can be 00 to 60 minutes A setting of 00 disables the reminder tone 2 The reminder tone will continue until all messages have been retrieved 3 A busy station or station in DND will not receive the Message Wait Reminder tone Programming SYSTEM 1 Message Reminder Tone Timer PGM 181 Btn
295. ive 5 Achain can be constructed by assigning the Secretary of one pair as an Executive of another Although a chain may be constructed a loop back is not allowed 6 If an Executive has multiple Secretaries calls will automatically route to the Executive s first idle Secretary 7 The Executive may use Call Forward to send calls to stations other than the Secretary 8 Messages are left at the Executive or Secretary based on assignment of Left Msg Exec When enabled On messages are left at the Executive s station 9 The Executive Grade can be assigned only for Country Code 82 Korea 104 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming STATION DND PGM 111 Btn 3 Left Msg Exec PGM 113 Btn 10 TABLES Executive Secretary Pair PGM 229 Btn 1 CO Call to Secretary PGM 229 Btn 2 Call Exec If Secretary in DND PGM 229 Bin 3 Exec Grade PGM 229 Btn 4 Icm Call to Secretary PGM 229 Btn 5 O SS Ga h AD Related Features e DND Do Not Disturb e Call Forward e Call Waiting Camp On e CLI Message Wait e Message Wait Call Back e Call Transfer Hardware e iPECS Phone 105 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 38 EXTERNAL AUTO ATTENDANT VOICE MAIL 2 38 1 AA VM Group Description The system provides support for an adjunct Auto Attendant Voice Mail system via connection to SLT ports When a call arrives for the E
296. ivery messages on off Off default Confirm message receipt on off Off default 8 Private message mark on off Off default N Conditions 1 The default class of service for all mailboxes is 1 COS 1 contains all default settings 2 Future delivery message feature is not supported Programming VM COS PGM 253 will be added for the above settings Related Features Hardware 2 73 11 Send Message Description A user can record the message and send it to other mail box with several options or distribution list Operation The main menu prompt will be modified to add To send a message press 4 Main Menu to send a message press four Step 1 Record Voice Message To send a message user can press 4 in the main menu and record a message The prompt will state At the tone please leave a message and to stop recording press pound key Step 2 Decision of Destination The prompt will state Enter the mail box number or distribution list number followed by pound To spell the name press Step 2 1 Mail Box Enter the mail box number Refer to the Step 3 and Step 4 Step 2 2 Enter distribution list number and key The prompt will state Your message has been sent Step 2 3 228 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Press To spell name Refer to the Step 3 and Step 4 Step 3 After Step 2 2 and Step 2 3 The prompt will state For regular delivery press
297. k Orbit 3 Return to idle To retrieve a parked call 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the Park Orbit Conditions 1 If the selected Park Orbit returns a busy signal the user may simply dial another Park Orbit without the need to disconnect 2 Intercom calls cannot be placed in a Park Orbit 3 A Parked call will recall to the station that parked the call should the Call Park Timer expire The normal Hold Recall process is then initiated 4 A Parked call will indicate busy at all appearances Programming SYSTEM 1 Call Park Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 2 Related Features e Hold Recall e Attendant Recall 52 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Hardware 53 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 15 CALL PICK UP 2 15 1 Directed Call Pick Up Description A station may answer Pick Up incoming and transferred intercom CO and IP calls ringing at another station All ringing calls are subject to Directed Call Pick up except Private Line and queue Callbacks iPECS phone users may assign a Flex button as a DIRECTED CALL PICK UP button Operation iPECS Phone To assign a DIRECTED CALL PICK UP button 1 PGM FLEX 7 SAVE To Pick up a call ringing at another station 1 Lift the handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Dial 7 the Directed Call Pick up feature code 3 Dial the ringing station s interc
298. king e 93 2 32 DIFFERENTIAL RING iii ek ugeE EEN dese Oe REENEN ege 95 2 33 DND DO NOT DISTURB cccssceeceeeseeeeeeeseeseeaeeeesaeeeeseees 97 2 34 DOOR OPEN i a taccesivecscacenvaressveusaacccusdeaceieasmaececsaccaves 99 2 35 EMERGENCY CALL E 911 CALLER LOCATION SUPPORT 101 2 36 EMERGENCY CALL EE 103 2 37 EXECUTIVE SECRETARY FORWARD 2 cccscceeeeeeeeees 104 2 38 EXTERNAL AUTO ATTENDANT VOICE MAIL 55 106 2 30 TAANM GOUD EE 106 2 38 2 In band DTMF Signaling LL ses 107 2 38 3 SMDI Simplified Msg Desk Interface 107 2 38 4 Voice Mail Box Translation 109 2 39 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN ss snennnnznnnnnenznnnennnnnnanznza 111 PA OR DIGITS gene ai aa p Si si vandscceesaveacerssesuieeanipess 112 2 41 HEADSET COMPATIBILITY ll nn eennenennznnnnnnennenennnznnannnza 113 BAe MOL EE 115 2 42 OIG RTE 115 26422 IOI REGAN ii cok ot ees coe ok eG ak ik ta eee aa ead ad Sad 115 2 42 39 EXClUSIVE Hold eene 116 ZAZA System Hold EE 118 242 5 PURO MAIC IONS A t a ena os oiue ite riei ES 119 243 HOT DESK EE radir tehe adaa 121 2 44 ICLID CALL ROUTING l nn nenenennnnenznnnnnnnnenanenennnennnnenznn 123 2 45 IN ROOM INDICATION ccccsceccseeeeeeseeeeseeceeneeeeeeeeeneesenes 124 2 46 IP BRIDGE MODE iiscsgccccgicvevscccssecevcassvaccscascacvuacddcestaevwcsacceens 125 2 47 IP SYSTEM DEG Ti 126 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6
299. l Forward feature access dial code 554 3 Dial to cancel Call Forward Conditions 1 A station receiving a forwarded call can transfer the call to the forwarding station 2 A station denied the use of Call Forward will receive error tone in response to attempts to activate Call Forward 3 A forwarded intercom call will signal the receiving station in the Tone Signaling mode regardless of the Intercom Signaling Mode at the station 4 Calls cannot be forwarded to a station in DND and if attempted error tone is returned 5 Attempting activation of Call Forward will automatically deactivate any activate Display Text Message Active Call Back or Queue requests are not canceled 6 When Call Forward is active a station can make outgoing calls internal or external but cannot activate a Call back or Queue request 7 Private lines can be forwarded if the forwarding and receiving station have a direct appearance CO button for the Private line or if calls are forward to a VSF VMIM or Voice Mail group 8 For CO IP calls manually activated Call Forward will override any Preset Call Forward assigned for the station or CO IP line 9 Users may forward calls to the VMIM VSF without recording a greeting in which case calls are still forwarded to the VMIM VSF but callers receive the No announcement recorded message before they can leave a voice mail 10 Call Forward status is maintained in the system s non volatile mem
300. l be utilized dynamically when need to serve MOH Ringback Busy Tone Paging and so on atleast 1 8 to maximum 1 2 of number of concurrent SIP call Related Features Hardware 434
301. l external outgoing calls or toll calls calls that exceed a fixed duration and intercom calls Call records are output either upon completion of the call real time or in response to a request from the System Attendant SMDR may be sent periodically via e mail to a defined e mail address The SMDR record output for external calls is as shown in the figure below There are two flexible fields Field and Field II Each Field is defined to show Ring duration CLI Caller Id or CPN Called Party Number NO STA CO TIME START DIAL CLIICPN COST ACCOUNT DIAL CLI CPN DC NUM 1 CODE NUM II XXXX SSSS BBB DD DD FF FFIFF HCCCCCCCCCC sssss aaaaaaaa hccccccccccc rr EE EE CCCCCCCC aaaa CCCCCCC The various fields or items for a Call Record are NO SMDR record number optional output PGM 177 Btn 23 STA 3 or 4 digit station number CO 2 or 3 digit CO Line number Time Call duration in minutes and seconds Start Date and time call was placed received NUM Flex Field I for outgoing call displays dialed number for incoming call displays Ring duration CLI or CPN PGM 177 Btn 20 171 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Cost Account Code NUM ll DC Cost of Call Account code entered for call Flex Field Il for incoming call displavs Ring duration CLI or CPN or blank PGM 177 Btn 23 Disconnect Cause optional output PGM 177 Btn 29 with value 01 7F Follow cause value of Q 931 specifica
302. l hunt group when the user is ON duty in all hunt group 1 Dial the code for Agent On Off duty in all hunt group 2 Dial Reason Code 0 9 T or ff Or 1 Press ACD ON OFF DUTY IN ALL HUNT GROUP button 2 Dial Reason Code 0 9 T or ff iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Or 1 Press ACD ON OFF DUTY IN ALL HUNT GROUP REASON button SLT To toggle to Off duty state from On Duty 1 Lift handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Dial 571 Agent On Off Duty Code 3 Dial ACD group number 4 Dial Reason Code 0 9 U or ff To return to an On dutv state 1 Lift handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Dial 571 Agent On Off Duty Code 3 Dial ACD group number If a station is included in two or more hunt group To go to ON duty in all hunt group when the user is OFF duty in more one hunt group 1 Lift handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Dial the code for Agent On Off duty in all hunt group If a station is included in two or more hunt group To go to OFF duty in all hunt group when the user is ON duty in all hunt group 1 Lift handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Dial the code for Agent On Off duty in all hunt group 3 Dial Reason Code 0 9 or Conditions 1 The system will output an Agent Availability message with the dialed Reason code when an Agent changes availability status T
303. led digits These digits are employed to route the caller as defined in the system CCR Customer Controlled Routing Tables The VMIM VSF AA VM Group Voice Mail application receives calls forwarded or recalling from a station Such calls will receive the user s pre recorded greeting and may leave voice messages The user may call the VMIM VSF AA VM Group to review and manage the integrated Voice Mail application Feature Server UMS Group The Feature Server is a PC based TAPI application with high end Auto Attendant Voice Mail and Unified Messaging Service Voice Fax and e mail The iPECS Feature server receives calls plays announcements stores voice messages and forwards them as wave file attachments to the user s e mail The application also receives Faxes and forwards them as attachments to e mail The Text to Speech option permits listening to e mails as well as voice mails Net VM This group is defined to support a Centralized Voice Mail system for a networked environment At supported systems the group is used to handle the AA VM requirements from the central iPECS The Net VM group may be an external VM system or the iPECS Feature Server UCS Group This group is defined to support the Unified Communication Solution available with the iPECS system Group Announcements Station Group routing can be augmented with announcements recorded in the VMIM VSF AA VM Callers can be routed to one of several user recorded annou
304. lift the handset to speak privately SLT To place an outgoing CO IP call 1 Lift handset 2 Dial the CO line or Group access code 3 Dial the desired number To answer an incoming CO IP call 1 Lift handset Conditions 1 When a user dials 9 the system will search the preferred CO group for idle CO IP line if there is no idle CO IP line then the system will search the 15t CO IP Group for an idle CO IP line The system may continue the search through all CO IP line groups for an available line if 15t CO IP Group Override is enabled 2 Atelephone user not allowed access to a CO IP line receives error tone when access is attempted The station may receive transferred calls on such denied access lines but will not be able to flash or use the CO IP line for an outgoing call 64 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 A station denied access to a CO IP line but assigned to have ring for the CO IP line will receive ring a flashing CO IP line LED and may answer the call The user may transfer the call but cannot make an outgoing call on the CO IP line CO IP lines placed on hold may be retrieved by dialing the retrieve held CO IP code 8 and the CO IP line number The Tx path to a station will be muted until the system has verified the Toll Restriction for the CO IP line When a CO line is seized the system will monitor the line for dial tone The syste
305. ll station activating or individual station working In PGM 260 Personal group master and member can be assigned In PGM 261 Personal group attribute can be set Operation Personal Group and Call Coverage If master and members are assigned in admin 260 call coverage programs are set automatically as following In Master station attribute Call coverage CC usage ON CC on busy usage ON CC Mobile ext usage ON CC Delay Ring by members ON CC Service for wake up ring ON In Member stations attribute Call for button is assigned to max button in each members The initial value of delay is 0 Call to Personal Group Master number Display in caller Members are ringing with delay of Call Coverage All leaved messages can be checked a Master station as well as member stations Call from Personal Group Master or Personal Group Member 1 With Master station number all call can be made 2 Each member can leave message by the master station number Conditions 255 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Programming 1 Personal Group Assign PGM 260 2 Personal Group Attribute PGM 261 Attribute Name Description Use Master Wake Up If this value is set to ON all member wake up follow by master wake up If this value is set to OFF individual wake up is worked by each station Use Master Call Forward If this value is set to ON call forwar
306. loyed to support the Conference Room feature Programming Related Features Automatic Speaker Select Hold Recall Unsupervised Conference Broker Call 73 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 e Conference Room Hardware e MCIM required to support voice conferences with more than 3 parties 2 23 3 Unsupervised Conference Description An iPECS phone user may establish a conference with external parties and exit the conference while allowing the external parties to converse privately without supervision from the user The system will disconnect the Unsupervised conference if disconnect is detected with only two parties connected or at expiration of the Unsupervised Conference timer Fifteen seconds prior to expiration of the timer a Disconnect Warning Tone is provided If enabled either party in an Unsupervised Conference can request the Unsupervised Conference timer be extended The party enters the Timer Extension feature code and a digit 1 to 9 indicating the Timer extension multiplier The system will then extend the timer based on the dialed digit multiple of the Timer For example if the Unsupervised Conference timer is 5 minutes and the user dials the digit 4 the timer will extend to 20 minutes 4 multiplied by 5 minutes Operation iPECS Phone To set up an Unsupervised conference 1 Establish normal conference 2 Press the CONF button The CONF button LED flashes to indicate
307. ly controlled Conditions 1 While using the speakerphone a Camp On tone is provided over the speaker in place of the assigned Off hook ring Signal 2 Activating the DND or One Time DND places the station in DND terminating any Off hook signaling 3 Off hook ring signals terminate when the call is answered forwarded or abandoned 4 Astation which is receiving Off hook ring signals will receive normal ring upon return to idle status Programming CO IP 1 CO Line Ring Assignment PGM 144 SYSTEM 1 Off Hook Ring Signal Type PGM 161 Btn 1 Related Features e Call Waiting Camp On e CO IP Ring Assignment e DND Do Not Disturb e DND One Time DND Hardware e iPECS Phone 337 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 18 ON HOOK DIALING Description iPECS Phones equipped with a Speakerphone allow users to place as well as receive calls while the handset is on hook Once the user activates the speakerphone by pressing the SPEAKER button or Automatic Speaker Select dial tone is received and the user may dial the desired number Operation iPECS Phone To activate On Hook Dialing 1 Press the SPEAKER button dial tone is received and the SPEAKER button LED lights 2 Place desired call dial station ICM number or select CO IP path and dial Conditions 1 If the outgoing call is not answered the user must press the illuminated SPEAKER button to return to i
308. m list The prompt will state Please enter the mailbox number The prompt will state mailbox XXX added Repeat steps 3 to 3 1 until done Step 4 2 Press 2 Delete mailbox from list The prompt will state Please enter the mailbox number The prompt will state mailbox XXX deleted Step 4 3 Press 3 Listen list The prompt will state mailbox XXX Repeat steps 3 to 4 3 until done Conditions 1 The maximum number of mailboxes in a distribution list is 25 Programming Related Features Hardware 2 73 13 Mark a message private Description This allows a mailbox owner to mark a message as private replying to or creating a message to another user These messages cannot be forwarded Operation After replying to a message recording a message the following options will be played For regular delivery press 1 230 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 To mark urgent press 2 To mark private press 3 To mark urgent and private press 4 To request delivery receipt of the message for future press 5 Step 1 From the menu press 3 or 4 The prompt will state Your message has been sent Conditions 1 Private message cannot be forwarded 2 This option is only played to the mailbox owner if the mailbox COS allows it Programming Related Features Hardware 2 73 14 Mark a message for delivery confirmation Description This allows a mailbox owner to m
309. m selects lines from a group using the Round robin or Last choice method based on Admin Programming When an iPECS Phone is not assigned Ringing Line Preference the user must press the ringing CO IP line button to answer the call IPECS Phone users may be assigned exclusive use of a CO line as a Private Line Programming STATION CO IP CO IP Line Access PGM 112 Btn 4 CO Line Programming PGM112 Btn 6 Prefer CO GROUP PGM112 Btn 14th CO Line Group Access PGM 117 CO IP Line Group PGM 141 Btn 1 CO IP Ring Assignment PGM 144 MA A P Go M A Related Features CO IP Line Groups CO IP Ring Assignment Ringing Line Preference Private Line Hardware 65 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 20 CO IP CALL TIME RESTRICTION Description The system can be programmed to limit the length of outgoing calls by specified stations When a specified station places an outgoing call the system initiates the Call Restrict timer and 15 seconds prior to expiration a warning tone is delivered At expiration the system terminates the call returning the external CO IP line to idle In PGM 142 21 CO CUT OFF TIMER is added By using this timer CO Base call time restriction is possible Operation System Operation of this feature is automatic when assigned Conditions 1 Once activated the Call Warning Tone timer continues timing while the call is connected to th
310. maller than the number of other devices If some devices use all the CO lines the other devices can not call to outside of system To prevent this situation and to increase the common usage of the CO lines outgoing CO calls are limited to zone maximum outgoing CO call number Zone maximum outgoing CO call number can be set from 0 to maximum CO line capacity The default value of Zone maximum outgoing CO call number is 0 and it means there is no limit to zone outgoing CO call Operation Operation of this feature is automatic based on zone maximum outgoing CO call number Conditions 1 If maximum outgoing CO call number is set to 0 zone outgoing CO call will not be limited 2 If maximum outgoing CO call number is set to non zero value and current zone outgoing CO call number is more than maximum value the outgoing CO call trying station will play error tone and display OUTGOING CALL LIMIT OVER on the LCD 3 Networking call is also processed as an outgoing CO call 4 System counts emergency call in current outgoing CO call number but no limit procedure is applied Programming ZONE DATA 1 Zone Attributes PGM 439 Web only Related Features Hardware 2 78 2 Inter Zone Connection Number Limit Description If some devices exist very far from the other devices it might cause to the bandwidth limitation Those devices must be controlled the number of connections according to the bandwidth limitation for the voice quality
311. me as Same as system 100 200 200 100 500 Stations system port Note5 CO lines port Note 1 The station and CO Line maximums are not simultaneously total ports cannot exceed the specified System Port capacity Note 2 For maximum RSGM connection ports calculation formula is ports available system station ports 2 there must be sufficient VoIP channels to support packet relay for RSGM rtp packets Note 3 Approximately 35 minutes 16 Mbytes of the VSF memory are used to provide basic system prompts the remaining memory can be used for announcements and voice message storage Values in parenthesis are the announcement and storage time available Note 4 Using G711 codecs 8 VoIP channels are available Due to additional processing needs complex codecs reduce the available channels four 4 channels are available using G723 or G729 Note 5 Issue0 1 2 Support up to 100 channels SIP extension CO trunk simultaneously Issue 3 Support up to 200 channels SIP extension CO trunk simultaneously iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 SYSTEM 2 1 ACCOUNT CODE Description Station users may allow tracking of specific calls by entering a non verified variable length up to 12 digits identifier for a call The identifier or Account Code is output as part of the Station Message Detail Record SMDR for the call Operation iPECS Phone To assign a Flex button for ACCOUNT CODE op
312. ment 1 Dial 06 the Message Record code Dial the VMIM VSF sequence number Dial the Announcement number 01 72 a A W N 6 7 8 Press the PGM button With Multi Language support enter the Language number 1 3 the current announcement is played followed by the Press to record prompt Dial f After the beep tone record message Press the SAVE button to stop recording and save the message To delete a recording 1 Dial 06 the Message Record code Dial the VMIM VSF sequence number Dial the Announcement number 01 72 a A O N 6 7 System Press the PGM button With Multi Language support enter the language number 1 3 the current announcement is played followed by the Press to record prompt Dial Press the SPEED button during playback to erase message Operation of the CCR Audio Text Tables and Auto Attendant are automatic Conditions 1 2 There are no individual time limits on an Auto Attendant announcement Up to 500 VSF Announcements may be recorded including Voice Mail user greetings and the 72 VSF announcements The external caller may experience ring back tone before playback of a VMIM VSF announcement The System Attendant must Save a recording before returning to the on hook state otherwise the existing recording is used To record or delete an Auto Attendant
313. ments may be played and music on hold may be sent to the caller The caller may dial a digit at any time while queued to exit the queue except during a Guaranteed Announcement The dialed digit is compared to digits defined in the ACD Group CIQ Route Table If a match is found the call is routed to the defined 23 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 destination Station Station Group etc If a match is not found external callers receive an error message and are placed back in queue internal callers are simply placed back in queue Operation Operation of this feature is automatic based on caller input Conditions 1 ACD CIQ routing is not supported during or within 5 seconds of a Guaranteed Announcement Digits dialed during a Guaranteed Announcement use Caller Controlled ICLID routing 2 The call must be in queue for the ACD group dialing during ring back tone is not recognized by the iPECS Programming STATION GROUPS 1 ACD Group PGM 191 2 ACD CIQ Route Table PGM 191 Btn 23 Related Features e Station Groups e Announcements e ACD Caller Controlled ICLID Routing Hardware 2 5 5 Calls In Queue Page Alert Description The administrator can establish CIQ Calls In Queue thresholds for each ACD Group so that an assigned VMIM VSF announcement plays over a defined Page zone if the number of calls in queue equals or exceeds a CIQ threshold The message which is recorded by an At
314. message all of the VSF or VMIM channels must be in the idle state The external caller may dial at any time during an Auto Attendant announcement and must dial prior to the expiration of the CCR Analysis timer If the external caller dials an invalid selection or station the system will play the Invalid Entry prompt and allow re entry using the DISA Retry Counter If the external caller dials more than a single digit the call is routed based on the System Numbering Plan 207 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 9 Calls answered by an Auto Attd CCR Announcement are interactive DISA calls and are subject to conditions of a DISA call 10 The digit is reserved in the Audio Text Tables to repeat the current or previous Auto Attd announcement 11 The digit is reserved for callers to access their Voice Mailbox remotely 12 A CCR Announcement may be programmed to disconnect after playing 13 The Auto Attd Announcement feature is supported for DISA and DID calls 14 In Admin VSF is used as the single reference for a parameter that applies to both the VSF and the VMIM 15 System announcement number 771 if recorded is played as MOH 16 System announcement number 72 is for Multi Language support only Programming STATION 1 CO IP 1 STATION GROUPS 1 2 SYSTEM 1 2 3 4 5 TABLES 1 2 Related Features e Station Groups VSF Access PGM 113 Btn 2 DID Ser
315. n Conditions 1 When a DISA Line is marked for Authorization Code entry the caller will hear DND Warning tone and must input a valid Authorization Code to continue In case of an entry error the user may retry entry of the code In case of multiple entry errors the user may retry entry based on the DISA Retry counter The station if assigned is forced to COS 7 after repeated attempts fail 2 A user must enter a valid code within the number of attempts assigned as the FAC Forced Account Code Retry Count The station if enabled is placed to COS 7 after repeated failure attempts 3 A user may enter an Authorization Code from any station to place a CO IP call using Walking COS 4 The default Station Authorization code is the station number and 5 The total number of Authorization codes is provided in Table 1 2 1 6 CO IP groups may be configured to require entry of a valid Authorization Code In this case a second dial tone is provided when the CO IP group is accessed If the code entered is invalid error tone is returned and the user must enter a valid code within the FAC Retry Count 7 If the Check Password option is enabled in the LCR database when dialed digits match the LDT table digits the system will send second dial tone to request the user input a valid Authorization code 8 An Authorization code may include any dial pad digit except and 10 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Opera
316. n Manual Issue 5 6 2 73 5 Company Directory Description This feature allows a caller reaching CCR menu or Flexible DID Table menu to utilize the DTMF keys to spell the name of a subscriber and be directed to their extension If system checks and finds subscriber stations Company Directory First Name and Last Name has to be preprogrammed and station s Subscriber Name has to be prerecorded in each station When station users record his subscriber name users can record by dialing Record Company Directory Name code PGM109 20 in Flexible Numbering Plan Admin Operation To record Company Directory Name 1 Dial the Record VM Subscriber Name flexible number 2 Choose the Recording menu of Subscriber Name 1 3 After recording announcement record subscriber name To delete Company Directory Name 1 Dial the Record VM Subscriber Name flexible number 2 Choose the Deleting menu of Subscriber Name 2 To use Company Directory Feature When outside caller presses the programmed CCR digit or DID number at Flexible DID Table the system will prompt Press one to search by first name Press two to search by last name then Enter the first 3 characters of the person s first name or Enter the first 3 characters of the person s last name Once 3 characters have been entered the system will check the entered characters for a match to the programmed name in the VMIB field in PGM 127 Station Attri
317. n be assigned as Hot Desk phones allowing users Agents to login with the iPECS The Hot Desk will become active and will take on the attributes defined for the Agent s station number When the Agent logs off the Hot Desk phone becomes inactive and the Agent s calls are forward to the user entered destination A different Agent may then login through the inactive Hot Desk phone Operation iPECS Phone To login through an inactive Hot Desk 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Dial 0 3 Dial the user s station number and authorization code Agent is logged in To logout through the active Hot Desk 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial or press the AGENT LOGOUT Flex button 3 Use the VOL UP VOL DOWN buttons to select call forward destination for Agent calls speed dial joined mobile phone VMIM VSF or VM group 4 Press the SAVE button Conditions 1 The Hot Desk phone can be programmed to log out an active user automatically if no action has been taken by the Agent for the Auto Log out timer 2 An active logged in Agent can login to another inactive Hot Desk However this will log the Agent off the previously active Hot Desk 3 Auser may only logout from the Agent s active Hot Desk phone Attempting to logout using a different Hot Desk phone will return error tone 4 The Flex button map of the Hot Desk station is fixed and does not take on the configuration associated with the A
318. n range for a single station enter an in place of the second station number 4 Dial 2 digit hour and 2 digit minute for alerting 5 For a daily repeating alarm dial 6 Press SAVE button To erase Wake Up 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 045 the Attendant Station Program code 3 Dial the desired station range for a single station enter an in place of the second station number 4 Press SAVE button iPECS Phone To register Wake Up 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 41 the set Wake up code 3 Dial 2 digit hour and 2 digit minute for alerting 4 For a daily repeating alarm dial 5 Press SAVE button To stop the alarm notification 1 Lift the handset or press SPEAKER button To erase Wake Up 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 42 the erase Wake up code 3 Press SAVE button 233 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 SLT To register Wake Up 1 Lift the handset Dial 561 the SLT Programming code confirmation tone is heard Dial 41 the set Wake up code Dial 2 digit hour and 2 digit minute for alerting oan A W N For a daily repeating alarm dial 6 Hook flash conformation tone is provided To stop the alarm notification 1 Lift the handset To erase Wake Up 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 562 the SLT Programming code confirmation tone is hear
319. n to scroll through the CLI Messages 165 123 23 36 21 11 09 10 CNT 2 To delete the current CLI Message 1 Press the button the next CLI message is displayed To delete all CLI Messages 1 Press the SPEED button 2 Press the button twice To return a Call to the current CLI Message 1 Press the SAVE button Conditions 1 The total number of Message Wait indications in queue for the system is 1000 Should the message Wait buffer fill the buffer full message as below will be output over the RS 232 port Warning Message Wait Buffer Full 2 The CLI Message Wait display includes the date time message count and CLI The count is the number of attempts by a specific calling party with the time and date from the most recent attempt 3 The CLI Message Wait status is stored in non volatile memory to protect against power loss 268 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 When a CO IP call is assigned to ring multiple stations or a group CLI Message Wait is not provided 5 When a CO IP call with CLI is routed to an ACD Terminal Circular station group the CLI Message Wait will be provided to the last station rung before the call was abandoned 6 Once a call is answered by a station in the system CLI Message Wait is no longer available i e transferred calls do not provide CLI Message Wait 7 ACLI Message Wait indication is le
320. ncelled This feature is working on SLT also Operation iPECS Phone To activate ACNR while receiving busy no answer 1 Press the REDIAL button 2 Hang up handset or press SPEAKER button To cancel ACNR while idle 1 Press flashing REDIAL button To cancel ACNR during an ACNR attempt 1 Lift the handset or press the MUTE button or flashing REDIAL button SLT Phone To activate ACNR while receiving busy no answer 1 In SLT outgoing call is established Outside destination is no answer or busy Press and release the hook switch the intercom dial tone should be heard SLT user press ACNR code While on waiting state SLT user hears MOH an A O N System 1 The system initiates the ACNR process starting the ACNR Pause Timer 2 At expiration of the timer the system activates the station s speakerphone with the microphone in the mute mode 3 The system attempts the previous call 4 When the called party answers the user may answer by lifting the handset or pressing the MUTE button to communicate with called party Conditions 1 Four timers and a retry counter can be programmed ACNR Pause Time Time allowed between ACNR retries ACNR Delay Timer At expiration of Pause Timer if no line is available the system will wait for delay timer before retry 315 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 ACNR Tone Detect After dialing the system
321. ncements The system answers the call and plays the defined 15t announcement to the caller The announcement may provide the caller with routing options for Caller Controlled Routing The 1St announcement 167 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 may be Guaranteed meaning it will play in full before routing the call A 2 announcement can be provided to the caller should queue timers expire Operation Conditions 1 The number of groups and member stations per group are given in Table 1 2 1 2 3 Station Group calls are not routed to member stations that are in DND When a member of a Circular Terminal or Ring Group activates Call Forward calls to the group may still route to the member based on the Member Forward option A call transferred to a Station Group will follow the routing for the group and will not initiate the Transfer Recall process Calls to a Station Group receive either ring back tone or MOH while queued to the group Calls which are not answered in the Overflow time are routed to the defined Overflow destination station group etc If no Overflow destination is defined the call is dropped after expiration of the Overflow timer One of the 70 VMIM VSF announcements may be assigned as the Overflow destination These announcements allow for Caller Controlled Routing Programming STATION GROUPS 1 Station Group Assignment PGM 190 2 Station
322. ncoming digits as shown in the following table Digit Function 1 Play New Msg Play Saved Msg Set Cancel Fwd available only for remote access Mailbox Setting Mailbox Settings prompt VM Long options Drop Goodbye Attd Call Call to System Attendant OO E oO N N 213 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation iPECS Phone To access a Message Retrieval option 1 At any time after the Number of Messages prompt dial a Message Retrieval Option digit The system initiates the selection providing any needed prompts SLT To access a Message Retrieval option 1 At any time after the Number of Messages prompt dial a Message Retrieval Option digit The system initiates the selection providing any needed prompts Conditions 1 The user must begin dialing within the CCR Analysis timer in response to a system prompt If the timer expires the system will disconnect the call and the user will receive error tone 2 When the call sender option results in an external call dialing restrictions will be applied based on the Station COS 3 If the user remains off hook after a call placed through the voice mail is complete the user will be returned to the previous place in the Voice Mailbox If the user hangs up the VMIM VSF will recall the user and upon answer will play Request Mailbox Number prompt 4 In Admin VSF is used as the single reference for a
323. nd time HHMM 8 Select Type of destination 0 6 e Type 0 Station e Type 1 Hunt group e Type 2 CO Line Number Type 3 CO Group number Type 4 CO Loop Type 5 CO Transit Type 6 N A 9 Select Scenario Priority O to 9 0 highest priority 10 Select Forward From Net 0 1 331 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 11 Select Call Profile Table Index 0 3 12 Select Call Profile Timer 10 60 sec To activate ICR call forward 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button to receive a dial tone 2 Press the FWD button 3 Dial the desired Call Forward code 0 4 4 Dial 587 the Station ICR code 5 Replace the handset return to idle To change Call Profile in Local mode 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 26 the Call Profile menu or log on to the Station Web portal 3 Select Call Profile Table 0 3 cf 0 Deact 1 3 Call Profile table To change Call Profile in Remote mode 1 Call to iPECS System DISA CO Line Enter to access voice mail box Enter Station Number Enter Auth code of station Enter 7 to set call forward Enter 1 to set station call forward Enter Station ICR Code Enter Call Profile Number 0 ICR fwd 1 3 Call Profile fwd D NOOO BW ND Conditions 1 This feature is possible only Digital Co line 2 This feature is applied only incoming call 3 Ring Assigned feature
324. ne is employed to view items in the iPECS database The user may be required to enter a password for access to Keyset Admin Based on the Multi level password the user has access to specified system database program codes For detailed information on database administration and maintenance refer to the iPECS Admin amp Program Manual Operation Operation is detailed in the iPECS Admin and Maintenance Manual Conditions 1 Only stations assigned with Admin access can enter and change the system database items As a default all iPECS phones can access the database Programming STATION 1 Admin Access PGM 113 Btn 1 SVSTEM 1 Admin Access Authority Web only 2 System Password PGM 162 Related Features e Web Administration e Multi Level Admin Access Hardware 2 69 2 Multi Level Admin Access Description Access to the Admin database is password protected Up to three 3 levels of access to the database can be established by assigning a different password to each level The Maintenance level has access to the entire database all maintenance routines and defines the Admin Access Authority of the two remaining passwords The User password can only access the defined database items and cannot access the Station Program pages The Admin password has access to the defined database items as well as Station Program pages In Web Admin the Maintenance password user establishes the Access Authority for each password selecting the Admin
325. nswer or not answered a new wake up time will be enabled if it exist for current day Wake up call functionality is similar with old wake up feature 10 Wake up year can be from 2000 to 2031 Programming PGM161 ENABLE ENHANCED WAKEUP ON OFF Related Features Hardware 236 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 76 ZONE HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT Description The Administrator can assign Holiday Zones up to 40 and Vacation Zones up to 5 for each Zone Devices in a Zone follow the holiday and vacation assignments of the zone When the date of a zone is set to Holiday or Vacation the zone will operate in the programmed ring mode Operation Operation of Zone Holiday Assignment is automatic when programmed Conditions 1 When the Tenancy group Ring mode for Flexible DID ICLID function PGM231 is programmed the priority is higher than the Zone Holiday Assignment PGM444 2 Zone Holiday Assignment has a higher priority than the Attendant ring mode 3 It is recommended to use the same zone for each Tenancy group CO and station Programming SYSTEM 1 Zone Holiday Assignment PGM 444 Related Features Hardware 237 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 77 REMOTE DEVICE ZONE MANAGEMENT Description Remote devices in particular those not reachable by the system are managed by grouping devices by various characteristics in
326. nt 3 2 Talking Monitoring Session Timer Role When a SIP Phone is unplugged or disconnected from network during talking with other Phone CO G W or other devices system can recognize that and disconnect the talking call to avoid locking up the associated devices and resources Session Timer Usage SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 Session Timer Support ON Disconnect Guard Time SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 MAX Session Timer 180 second for example Minimum Guard Time for session timer negotiation SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 MAX Session Timer 60 second for example Authentication for Registration and Call Setup 1 Authentication for Registration Progress SIP Phone REGISTER w o or wrong Authentication information MFIM SIP Phone 401 unauthorized MFIM SIP Phone Registration w right Authentication information MFIM SIP Phone 2000K MFIM 2 Authentication for Call Setup Progress SIP Phone INVITE w o or wrong Authentication information MFIM SIP Phone lt 407 proxy authentication required MFIM SIP Phone INVITE w right Authentication information MFIM SIP Phone 100 Trying 180 Ringing MFIM 3 Related Attributes SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 407 Authentication ON Station User Login 443 Password Available not empty DIMF Type 1 MFIM currently support only INFO type DTMF for SIP Extension do
327. nt processor operation The redundant system processor is a hot standby processor The LAN2 port of the master MFIM is connected directly to the LANZ port of the standby MFIM The standby MFIM monitors the active MFIM and takes over system control if the e active MFIM power fails e active MFIM is reset e LAN1 connection to the active MFIM fails or is removed e standby MFIM does not receive a polling message from the active MFIM for 1 minute If failure occurs the standby MFIM will take over and maintain control of the system When the original master recovers from failure it functions in the standby processor mode The active MFIM will maintain the system database for both the active and standby processor Operation Operation of redundant processors is automatic when installed Conditions 1 The Master Slave switch on the main MFIM must be set in the Master position and the back up MFIM must be set in the Slave position to match the system Admin settings 2 All eight wires of the Cat 5 cable must be terminated on the RJ45 connectors 3 It is not possible to use the VSF Internal VM and a VMIM external or commercial VM should be installed for CPU redundancy If you set redundancy ON by 161 Btn 20 VSF goes to OUT of Service 4 Master and Slave can be active in case LAN2 cable is out of order or other reason These dual active can be protected using IP watch timer 181 B14 If you set the timer as 1 sec Master send
328. nter Password prompt Please re enter your password to confirm and press pound when finished 4 Dial new password again 5 Press ff and receive Password Confirmation prompt Your password is saved for greeting 1 Dial A and receive Greeting Option prompt To listen to your current greeting press five to record a new greeting press seven to return to the main menu press nine 2 Dial 5 to hear your greeting 1 Dial 7 and receive Record Greeting prompt At the tone record your new greeting press when done 2 After beep record greeting speaking in a normal voice 3 Press ff and receive Greeting Confirmation prompt Your greeting is saved for Mailbox Setting prompt 1 Dial 9 and receive Mail Box Setting prompt To edit your greeting press one to edit you password press two To return to main menu press nine Conditions 1 If the user is external the user must begin dialing within the CCR Analysis time if not the call is released 2 If the dialed number is not recognized the Invalid Entry prompt is played 3 The user must assign a password Authentication code up to 12 digits before access to the mailbox will be allowed Note that a greeting need not be recorded 4 In Admin VSF is used as the single reference for a parameter that applies to both the VSF and the VMIM Programming Related Features e Message Storage
329. ntervals If desired the primary message can be defined to play in full to all callers as a guaranteed announcement or only for calls that queue When enabled a CIQ Calls in Queue announcement is played to callers that are queued to the ACD group The CIQ announcement Your Call is number xx in Queue is played to queued callers after the 15t announcement is played and again after each time the 274 announcement is played Internal callers with an iPECS Display Phone also receive the You are xx in queue display message Operation System ACD group announcements are played automatically based on the ACD group assignments System Attendant To record a VMIM VSF Announcement for an ACD Group 1 Press the PGM button Dial 06 the VMIM VSF Record code Dial VSF VMIM sequence number to select a VSF VMIM Dial the VMIM VSF Announcement number 01 70 Dial record language type 1 3 the current announcement is played followed by the Press to record prompt 6 Dial 7 After the beep tone record message a A O N 8 Press the SAVE button to stop recording and save the message 21 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 To delete a recording 1 Press the PGM button Dial 06 the VMIM VSF Record code Dial VSF VMIM sequence number to select a VSF VMIM Dial the VMIM VSF Announcement number 01 70 Dial record language type 1
330. nual Issue 5 6 An ACD supervisor can be assigned to monitor the group and act to oversee operations of the group The ACD Supervisor can print group statistics and activate alternate routing as well as assist agents Station Ring Group A call to any station in the Group will cause all stations in the group to ring and any station in the group may answer the call If the call remains unanswered beyond the Overflow timer the call is sent to the Overflow destination which can be a Station Station Group or Voice Mailbox Multiple calls can be received by a Station Ring Group and can be serviced in any order External AA VM Station Group This group is assigned to support an external Auto Attendant Voice Mail system that employs SLT ports to interface to the iPECS An External AA VM group is assigned for either circular or terminal hunt The External AA VM may employ either in band signaling over the audio channel or SMDI protocol with a signaling connection to the system RS 232 channel Pick Up Station Group A station can be assigned to a Call Pick Up group and then may pick up answer calls to other stations in the group employing the system s Group Call Pick Up feature VMIM VSF AA VM Group The VMIM VSF memory is employed by the integrated IPECS AA VM application Incoming calls can be directed to one of 70 user recorded announcements which may request further routing instructions from the user in the form of caller dia
331. o hang up between calls the user simply presses another DSS BLF button 5 An Intercom call to a station in the HF answerback or Voice Announce mode H or P Intercom Signaling Mode is not considered answered unless the called user lifts the handset or presses the SPEAKER button goes off hook Programming STATION 1 Prime Line PGM 113 Btn 7 SYSTEM 1 ICM Dial Tone Timer PGM 181 Btn 6 2 Inter Digit Timer PGM 181 Btn 7 258 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features e Intercom Signaling Mode e Speakerphone Hardware 259 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 3 INTERCOM CALL HOLD Description While on an active ICM Call users of iPECS Phones can place the ICM Call on hold The held station will receive the assigned Music on Hold The call is placed on Exclusive Hold and recalls to the holding station after expiration of the Exclusive Hold Recall Timer Operation iPECS Phone To place an active ICM call on hold 1 Press the HOLD button the ICM button LED will flash at the exclusive hold rate ICM dial tone is received To retrieve the held ICM call 1 Press the ICM button or the DSS BLF button associated with the held station the ICM button LED illuminate and the ICM call connected Conditions 1 Only one ICM call may be placed on hold at a station Programming Related Features e MOH Music On Hol
332. oes to idle automatically Transfer Recall 1 When call transfer failed or no answer there will be recall to the transfer or SIP Phone Conditions Programming Related Features Hardware 413 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 7 CALL FORWARD Description LIK System support Call Forward by SIP Phone SIP Phone also can utilize Call Forward Feature of System Operation Call Forward Authority ON 1 System Admin Station Data Station Attributes 111 113 Call Forward ON Call Forward setting by SIP Phone 1 3 Party SIP Phone Self Programming 2 LG Ericsson SIP Phone Self Programming w o Provisioning or w Provisioning in which Feature Sync is OFF Call Forward setting by System 1 3 Party SIP Phone Dial Call Forward Feature Code Condition Destination SEND button 2 LG Ericsson SIP Phone Self Programming wl Provisioning in which Feature Sync is ON NOTE With Feature Sync ON Call Forward data by Self Programming will be notified to system and applied to system s station database By this proprietary implementation system can recognize Call Forward and DND setting of SIP Phone side Also the real Call Forward and DND operation is implemented by system Or Dial Call Forward Feature Code Condition Destination SEND button One Time Call Forward for a Ringing Call 1 Acall is ringing to a
333. oing mailbox destination 5 0d5 02 Feb 10 Update description of DID call wait feature 5 5 09 JUL 10 Updates for iPECS release 5 5B software Add IP Watch timer for cpu redundancy and IPCR 5 5d1 30 DEC 10 Updates for iPECS release 5 5C software 5 6 01 NOV 11 Updates for iPECS release 5 6 software Add IP Attendant iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Table of Contents Tu d E dn E 1 1 1 MANUAL APPLICATION ccccceeeeeeeee cess eeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseneeeneees 1 11 1 Organization srein nt 1 1 1 2 Feature Information GE 1 1 2 SYSTEM CAPACIT IES EE 2 2 OVSE EE 5 2 1 ACCOUNT CODE e aer ma 5 2 2 ALARM SIGNAL DOOR BELL ssssennnnnnnzznnnnenzznnzznnnnnnznnznzz 7 2 3 AUTHORIZATION CODES PASSWORD cs esseeeeeeeeeeeees 9 24 AUTO GALL RELEASE geess 12 2 5 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD REENEN 13 2205 WEE 13 2 5 1 1 Agent Auto Connect Zap Tone cccceteeesedeecteceeeeeeenenseecneeeeeetenees 13 2 5 1 2 Agent Id Login Logout nn rna 13 2 9 1 3 A ent Help Request re er ar ae Fe Ta a 15 2 5 1 4 Agent Queued Calls Display LL 16 2 5 1 5 Agent Automatic Wrap Up Lee nnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnznna 17 2 5 1 6 Agent On Off Duty w Reason Code Lee nennnzn nn nnnna 18 D OLANNOUN EMENIS cide i mat kein detetturi ee A 21 2 5 3 Auto ACD DND Unavailable Service L 22 2 5 4 Calls In Queue routing Liu eyeenndedeeeeeeceeteceneden date ceeeeeeee 23 2 5 5 Call
334. om number Or 1 Lift the handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Press the DIRECTED CALL PICK UP button 3 Dial the ringing station s intercom number SLT To Pick up a call ringing at another station 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 7 the Directed Call Pick up code 3 Dial the ringing station s number Conditions 1 To pick up a CO IP call the station must have an idle appearance button available 2 When several calls are ringing at a station simultaneously Call Pick up will connect the oldest highest priority call Ringing Line Preference PGM 173 3 Queue callback and Private Line calls are not subject to Call Pick up and such attempts receive error tone 4 Handsfree announced intercom calls cannot be picked up by another station Only ringing intercom calls are subject to Call Pick up 54 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming SYSTEM 1 Ringing Line Preference Priority PGM 173 Related Features e Intercom Signaling Mode e Ringing Line Preference e Group Call Pick Up e Private Line Hardware 2 15 2 Group Call Pick Up Description A station can answer Pick Up incoming and transferred intercom CO and IP calls ringing at another station in the same station group All ringing calls except Private Line and Queue Callbacks are subject to Pick up by other stations in the same group iPECS phone users may assign a Flex button as a GROUP
335. om or external call 2 Momentarily press the hook switch intercom dial tone received and active call is placed in Exclusive hold state 3 Place second call 4 To alternate between calls momentarily press the hook switch To activate a Camp On Broker Call 1 Make or receive an intercom or external call 2 Receive a Call Waiting Camp On tone 3 Momentarily press the hook Switch intercom dial tone received and the active call is placed on Exclusive Hold 4 Dial the Camp On Answer feature code 600 camped on call is connected To alternate between the calls 1 Momentarily press the hook switch 2 Dial the Camp On Answer feature code 600 Conditions 1 After a hook switch flash if the call results in an error busy no answer or an abnormal state the SLT user may momentarily press hook switch to retrieve the held call 2 During a Transfer Broker Call if the SLT user goes on hook the Broker Call parties are connected completing a Call Transfer 3 During a Transfer Broker Call if the active caller disconnects from the SLT user the held party if another station is connected to the SLT If the held party is an CO IP call the SLT user receives error tone and may go on hook to receive recall and retrieve the held call Transfer Broker Call 2nd Call is originated by SLT user Camped On Broker Call 2nd Call is delivered to the SLT through a Camp On 4 During a Camp On Broker Call if the SLT user
336. oming UNA call 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 567 the UNA feature code the oldest UNA call is connected Conditions Programming SYSTEM 1 Universal Night Answer PGM 141 Btn 7 Related Features e LBC Loud Bell Control Hardware 205 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 73 VMIM VSF INTEGRATED AUTO ATTD VOICE MAIL 2 73 1 VMIM VSF Description VMIM The VMIM Voice Message Interface Module includes processing and memory for the iPECS integrated Auto Attendant Voice Mail and system announcement applications The memory is employed to store Auto Attendant announcements voice mail greetings and messages and various system prompts The system prompts time date etc are employed by the Auto Attendant and Voice Mail applications as well as other system features Each VMIM supports 8 channels with 9 hours of voice storage Each iPECS system except iPECS 600 1200 may include 2 VMIMs for a total of 16 channels and 18 hours of storage The iPECS 600 1200 may have up to 8 30 VMIMs for a total of 64 240 channels and 72 270 hours of storage VSF The VSF Voice Store amp Forward unit which is equipped in smaller MFIMs provides the system memory to support the integrated Auto Attendant Voice Mail and system announcement applications available in the iPECS The memory is employed to store Auto Attendant announcements voice mail greetings and messages and various system prom
337. omplete the transfer Conditions 1 For this feature at least one of the two CO IP lines transferred or receiving must provide detection of disconnect supervision and lost loop condition 2 ISDN and VoIP calls can provide Answer Supervision thus the iPECS system can provide Transfer Recall 3 If during the transfer to an external party the user presses the CO IP line of the original call the outgoing call is disconnected and the original call is connected to the user 4 An H 323 or SIP call cannot be transferred to a like VoIP call using unscreened call transfer Programming STATION SYSTEM Off Net Forward PGM 111 Btn 14 Transfer Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 7 Off Net Prompt Usage PGM 160 Btn 11 CO to CO US Timer Extension PGM 160 Btn 12 Unsupervised Conference Timer PGM 182 Btn 5 AON gt Related Features e Hold Recall e Call Transfer Station e Unsupervised Conference Hardware 61 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 17 3 Call Transfer Voice Mail Description CO IP calls can be transferred directly to a station s voice mailbox either VMIM VSF or an external Voice Mail system Operation iPECS Phone While on a CO IP call Call Transfer 1 Press TRANS button 2 Press MSG CALLBK button 3 Dial the number or press the DSS BLF button for the desired station 4 Hang up to complete the transfer Conditions 1 The LED of a LOOP
338. on System Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Conditions 1 The system mutes the user s voice transmission to reduce interference while sending DTMF tones Programming CO IP 1 CO Line Signal Type PGM 141 Btn 5 SYSTEM 1 Inter Digit Timer PGM 181 Btn 7 2 DTMF Duration Timer PGM 182 Btn 9 Related Features e Dial Pulse Signaling Hardware 295 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 12 IP ADDRESS DIALING Description If allowed users may place calls using an IP path The system accepts user dialed digits as the IP address for the called party When dialing an IP call the asterisk is used as the dot between bytes of the IP address Operation iPECS Phone To place an IP Call 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press IP GRP button or dial IP Group access code 3 Dial xxx xxx xxx xxx use as the dot in the IP address 4 Press to complete dialing SLT To place an IP Call 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial IP Group access code oe D I oe D I 3 Dial xxx xxx xxx xxx use as the dot in the IP address 4 Press to complete dialing Conditions Programming STATION 1 CO IP Group Access PGM 117 2 Direct IP Call PGM 122 Btn 1 Related Features Hardware 296 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6
339. on amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 60 PRE DEFINED amp CUSTOM TEXT DISPLAY MESSAGES Description A user can select a text message to be displayed on the LCD of a calling iPECS Phone with Display When a user activates Text Display Messages incoming intercom calls will signal the user with Muted ring in place of normal ring and the LCD of the calling station will display the selected message There are ten Pre defined messages 01 10 ten system wide Custom messages and one user defined Custom message Several of the ten Pre defined messages allow for auxiliary information such as a time date or number System level Custom Messages may be entered from the Attendant or Administrator s phone or via the Web Admin The user s Custom Message is assigned from the user s phone as well as the Attendant or the Administrator iPECS Phone users may assign a Flex button as a DISPLAY MESSAGE button or may include the message code to act as a ONE TOUCH DISPLAY MESSAGE button The Pre defined messages are Message 01 LUNCH RETURN AT hh mm Message 02 ON VACATION RETURN AT DATE mm dd Message 03 OUT OF OFFICE RETURN AT TIME hh mm Message 04 OUT OF OFFICE RETURN AT TIME mm dd Message 05 OUT OF OFFICE RETURN UNKNOWN Message 06 CALL enter up to 17 digits Message 07 IN OFFICE STA xxxx
340. on Exclusive hold the call is placed on System Hold If still unanswered after the Attendant Recall time the CO IP call is disconnected and the appropriate circuits returned to idle 115 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation Hold Recall operation is automatic Conditions 1 Separate timers are assigned for the various types of hold System Exclusive Transfer etc 2 If the l Hold timer is set to zero the station will not receive recall If the Attendant Recall timer is set to zero the Attendant will not receive recall 3 If the specific Hold timer is set to zero recall is disabled 4 In case of Private Line recall ring is served to only the station that hold is done until the station answer Programming SYSTEM Hold Preference PGM 160 Btn 7 Attendant Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 1 Exclusive Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 4 l Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 5 System Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 6 Transfer Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 7 oak wh A Related Features e Call Transfer CO IP e Exclusive Hold e System Hold Hardware 2 42 3 Exclusive Hold Description CO IP lines may be placed in a waiting state such that other stations in the system are unable to access the CO IP line Only the station placing the line on Exclusive hold can access the held line If the call remains on hold at expiration of the Exclusive Hold Recall Timer normal Hold Rec
341. on No Answer Forward Timer unless it is set to zero in which case the System No Answer Timer is used Programming STATION 1 Call Forward PGM 111 Btn 2 2 Station Call Forward No Answer Timer PGM 123 Btn 1 SYSTEM 1 System Call Forward No Answer Timer PGM 181 Btn 1 STATION GROUPS 1 Member Forward PGM 191 Btn 14 Circ Term 24 23 UCD or 12 Ring Related Features Call Forward Attendant Authorization Codes Password DND Do Not Disturb DND One Time DND Direct Inward System Access DISA Unsupervised Conference Dialing Restrictions Station Groups Station Speed Dial System Speed Dial Intercom Signaling Mode Call Forward Preset Hardware 49 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 13 CALL FORWARD PRESET Description With Call Forward Preset calls to a station forward to a pre determined destination assigned in the system database Preset Station Call Forward can define separate treatment of CO IP calls and intercom calls In addition separate busy and no answer treatments are defined Treatments available are e Unconditional all calls immediately forward e Internal Busy Intercom calls that encounter busy forward immediately e Internal No Answer Intercom calls which are not answered in the No Answer time forward Note calls to a busy station also forward after the No Answer time e External Busy external calls that encounter busy forward immediately
342. on Speed Dial for character entry 4 Press SAVE button SLT To program the station user name 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 561 SLT Programming code 3 Dial 74 the User Name Program code 85 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 Dial the name up to 12 characters refer to Station Speed Dial for character entry 5 Momentarily press the hook switch confirmation tone is received System Attendant To program a name for another station 1 Dial 071 the Attendant User Name Program code a A O N Press the PGM button Dial the station number Dial the name up to 12 characters refer to Station Speed Dial for character entry Press SAVE button Conditions 1 2 3 4 Available characters are A to Z space and period The LCD will display multiple names one per LCD line up to 16 characters If a user selects a directory with no entries or there is no match to the user entry the No Entries message is displayed and error tone is provided Dial by Name is only available to iPECS Phones with a display Other users will receive error tone if an attempt is made to access Dial by Name A user may both scroll and enter characters to search a directory Programming STATION 1 System Speed Dial Access PGM 106 Btn 16 Related Features Station Speed Dial System Speed Dial Hardware iPECS Phone w Display 86 iPECS LIK
343. on a CO IP call 1 Press the RECORD button record warning tone heard and recording starts To stop Two Way Record while on an CO IP call 1 Press the RECORD again Or 1 Hang up return to idle To manage the recordings use the procedures outlined in the Phontage or UCS Client User Guide Conditions 1 The RECORD button LED will flash at 240 ipm while recording 2 This feature is available when using the VMIM VSF VM the Feature Server or using an external AA VM which employs the SMDI communications mode When an external AA VM system employs the in band DTMF mode Two Way Record is not available 3 With the Feature Server or VMIM internal calls can be recorded as well as external Calls 4 Use of this feature when the Two Way Recording Warn Tone is disabled may be interpreted as a violation of federal state or local laws and an invasion of privacy Check applicable laws in your area before recording calls using this feature 5 If a destination for the recording is not defined for the RECORD button the Call Record Destination defined in PGM 112 is employed Programming STATION 1 Two way Record Privilege ON PGM 112 Btn 11 2 Auto Call Record PGM 112 Btn 20 3 Call Record Destination PGM 112 Btn 21 SYSTEM 1 Two way Record Warning Tone PGM 161 Btn 19 356 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features External Auto Attendant Voice Mail VM
344. on of the Net Conference Engineering notice When IP phone sends Invite Setup to Non IP phone this message will be rejected When Non IP phone is going to invite IP phone normal Setup message should send to the IP phone instead of Invite Setup message Programming SYSTEM 1 Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 2 Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 2 70 2 7 Message Waiting Indication MWI Description MWI is the same meaning of CLI Calling Line Indication message wait service As usual in normal ISDN call a station can leave a message wait for an unanswered station of another node if CLI message wait is enabled MWI is indicated by CLI message on station LCD panel Also it can be supported by supplementary service without CLI when press MSG CALLBK button during hearing ring back tone at Net call 187 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation To retrieve MWI message 1 Press the flashing MSG CALLBK button and dial 2 2 MWI contents CLI number date and time the calling count from the same CLI will be shown on LCD 700100 mm dd hh mm CNT 01 3 Press the A gl button The previous or the next MWI is displayed To delete the current CLI Message and see the next one 1 Press button 2 Current MWI message is cleared with a confirmation tone and the next MWI message is displayed To make a call back 1 Retrieve MWI with pressing the fla
345. on operation When a station is unregistered from VMEX it goes to Out Of Service state automatically To activate the station for other user you can replace type and MAC and force Service state by click STA check SVC and save in PGM103 Also you can replace that station automatically by station login with ID PWD table in PGM 443 In PGM 443 just input same station number as the deactivated station and that will be activated automatically Station Order Li 100 101 200 201 30011301 400 401 50011501 6001 Eesen umbi Mobile Number Connection Table Proxy Address Failover 03145040051028 po o a 010550512 A TE rem ITE 3 VMEX attributes SIP Data PGM 215 1 Station Number vou can change station number and this is same as vou do in PGM 105 2 Mobile Number 427 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 aincoming CLI from remote Mobile Phone address of SIP From message header This is ID of SIP Extension With this CLI the Mobile is identified as an extension 3 Connection Table Outgoing destination address to Mobile Phone Connection IP information of Mobile Phone index of connection table 4 Failover Failover information PGM 236 Mobile Extension Table Usage Fail Over CO Group a public CO Telephone Number a public telephone number c f currently have a thing to do more In this ve
346. on will display Night and Timed Ring Mode and the DND button LED will flash 6 If a CO IP line is not assigned to ring at any station incoming calls on the CO IP line will ring the first available Attendant Programming CO IP 1 CO Ring Assignment PGM 144 TABLES 1 Auto Ring Mode Selection Table PGM 233 Related Features e Day Night Timed Scenario Ring Mode e Auto Service Mode Control e Off Hook Signaling Hardware 287 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 6 CO LINE RELEASE GUARD TIME Description To assure that the PSTN switching equipment has sufficient time to restore to the idle condition the system will hold analog CO lines in a busy state to users after release of a CO line by a station The time between the station disconnect and when the system changes the CO line status from busy to idle is the CO Line Release Guard time Operation System Operation of this feature is automatic Conditions Programming SYSTEM 1 CO Release Guard Timer PGM 180 Btn 16 Related Features Hardware 288 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 7 CO RING DETECT Description The system incorporates timers for Ring on and Ring off durations to assure proper alerting When the duration of the ring signal exceeds the Ring on timer alerting will start When the ring is not present for a period exceeding the Ring off timer alerting will
347. one To mark urgent press two To mark private press 3 To mark urgent and private press 4 To request delivery receipt of the message for future press 5 Step 4 Press 1 4 The prompt will state Your message has been sent Refer to the private Press 5 The prompt will state Your message has been sent Refer to Mark a message for delivery confirmation Conditions 1 This option is only played to the mailbox owner if the mailbox COS allows it 2 This can be available for station Programming Related Features Hardware 2 73 12 Distribution Lists Description This allows a mailbox owner to setup a group of mailboxes and send a message using one number instead of having to enter each mailbox individually A maximum of 5 distribution lists can be set up per mailbox Operation The main menu prompt will be modified to add for personal options press 5 Main Menu for personal options press five Step 1 From the main menu press 5 The prompt will state to edit a list press 1 229 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Step 2 Press 1 The prompt will state Enter list number l 57 Step 3 Press 1 5 The prompt will state to a edit list press 1 to delete a list press 2 Step 4 The prompt will state to add a mailbox press 1 to delete a mailbox press 2 to listen to mailboxes in list press 3 Step 4 1 Press 1 Add mailbox fro
348. only Rule 4 If there are both Allow and Deny entries the Deny entries are searched If the dialed number matches a Deny entry the call is restricted if no match is found the call is allowed 89 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation System The system automatically applies the assigned COS Conditions 1 The dialing privileges are based on the CO and Station COS 2 The selection of the COS is made based on the Authorization code entered by the user 3 COS does not apply to calls placed over a VoIP channel Programming STATION 1 Station COS PGM 116 CO IP 1 CO COS PGM 141 Btn 2 SYSTEM 1 DISA COS PGM 166 2 PBX Trunk Access Codes PGM 172 3 LD Digit Count PGM 177 Btn 4 4 LD Digit Code PGM 177 Btn 19 TABLES 1 Toll Restriction PGM 224 Related Features e Dav Timed amp Night Station COS e Direct Inward System Access DISA e Temporary Station COS Lock e Walking COS Hardware 2 31 2 Day Timed amp Night Station COS Description Each station DISA line and Authorization code is assigned a COS for two modes Day which includes Timed and Night service modes The service mode is generally controlled by the System Attendant and based on the mode appropriate dialing privileges are established Operation System Dialing restrictions are automatically applied based on COS assignments Conditions 90 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation
349. ons of VMIM VSF AA Announcements and ICLID Call Routing apply 2 Only the caller entered digits are employed for ACD ICLID routing 3 The ICLID Table routing is only followed if the 15t ACD announcement is Guaranteed ICLID Usage is enabled and the digits are entered during the 15t Announcement 4 The caller may correct an entry by dialing and dialing the correct entry Programming STATION GROUPS 1 ACD Group PGM 191 2 ICLID Usage PGM191 Btn 21 TABLES 1 ICLID Table PGM 203 2 ICLID Ring Assignment 204 30 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features e Automatic Call Distribution e ICLID Call Routing e VMIM VSF Auto Attendant Hardware 2 5 11 Supervisors 2 5 11 1 Supervisor Login Logout Description Each ACD group is assigned up to five 5 Supervisors to monitor and control real time status of the ACD group and Agents assigned to the group A Supervisor can be assigned to multiple groups The Supervisor login logout feature provides a means for a supervisor to log into one or more ACD groups and monitor calls Each Supervisor has a unique 4 digit Agent Id used to login and logout of active ACD group participation Supervisors can login from any station in the system but only at one station at a time If a Supervisor logs into a group from a station while logged in at another station the active login is terminated and the new login is honored Operation Supervisor
350. or POOL button will display the status of a call until the station no longer has call supervision i e the call is successfully transferred Programming STATION 1 Direct Transfer Mail Box Destination PGM 120 Btn 6 SYSTEM 1 Transfer Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 7 Related Features e Hold Recall e Call Waiting Camp On e External Auto Attendant Voice Mail e VMIM VSF Voice Mail Hardware e iPECS Phone 62 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 18 CALL WAITING CAMP ON Description Call Waiting is used to notify a busy station that a call is waiting to be answered The busy station is notified of the waiting call by a Camp On tone For users of an iPECS Phone the LED of the HOLD button will flash After receiving a busy signal the calling station camps on to the called station The called station can respond by a answering the waiting call which places the active call on hold first b sending a silent text or voice message c activating One Time DND or d ignoring the Camp On tone Operation iPECS Phone To activate a Camp On while receiving Intercom busy tone 1 Press the button called and calling stations receive Camp On tone SLT To activate a Camp On while receiving Intercom busy tone 1 Press the button called and calling stations receive Camp On tone Conditions 1 The user may only Camp On to a station in the busy mode A user ma
351. or 3 or 4 or more digits starting with a specific prefix digit or digits xxii xxx xxxx dial the other 2 3 or 4 digits and press to send xxxx dial the other more than 4 digits and press ff to send Digit Map for 274 Dial Tone Play self dial tone by SIP Phone Example in case of LIP8002 88xx SIP Phone type 9 9 is CO access code in the first CO group Programming Related Features Hardware 410 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 4 CALL ANSWER Description A SIP Phone will accept a call when it receives call on idle state On busy state it is different according to Call Wait supported or not Operation Receives 1 call on Idle State 1 Accept the call and respond with Ringing Pickup Handset to answer the call Receives 2 call on Busy State 1 If do not support Call Wait or disabled Reject the call by 486 busy If support Call Wait and enabled Accept the call and respond with Ringing an A O N The call is waited on the SIP Phone 6 SIP Phone will serve self indication for the second call Handsfree Automatic Answer 1 By SIP Phone self programmable option always 2 By System in case of receiving call by Voice Over Intrusion Forced Handsfree Paging LG Ericsson SIP Phone only supported Conditions Programming Related Features Hardware 411 iPECS LIK Feature Descript
352. orwarded station is ringing 4 Answer the ringing at forwarded station The calling and forwarded station can make a conversation To deactivate Net Call Forward 1 Press the FWD button when it is flashing The FWD button will be extinguished Conditions 1 If both of served and diverted to stations are located in the same system the networking path will be cleared That is the forwarded call will be setup as intercom call 2 System does not check the status of diverted to station that is in DND CFW or Empty 190 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming SYSTEM 1 Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 2 Networking Supplementary Attribute PGM 321 BTN 1 3 Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 4 Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 2 70 2 11 Net Call Forward Busy No Answer Description It is possible for a user to forward his station remotely when the station does not answer within the CFW NO ANS Timer The forwarded destination can be over the network Engineering notice Currently iPECS system supports both rerouting and join method by admin programming Operation To activate Net Call Forward 1 Press the SPEAKER button and the FWD button 2 Dial Net Call Forward code 4 and dial the station number of another system The FWD button will be flashing and a confirmation tone will be provided if allowed 3 Dial the station number th
353. orwards all calls except recalls to the selected station when the station does not answer within the No Answer timer only SLT Code 9 Off Net Busy No Answer forwards calls if the selected station is busy or does not answer within the No Answer timer only SLT Operation iPECS Phone To activate Call Forward Unconditional or Busy No Answer 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button to receive dial tone 2 Press the FWD button 3 Dial desired Call Forward code 1 4 4 Dial the station or station group to receive calls Or Dial CO access code 9 8xx 88xx and desired external phone number Press SAVE button to save or Press SPEED button Dial desired bin number Replace the handset return to idle 46 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 To activate Call Forward Remote Follow me 1 Press the FWD button Dial Call Forward code 0 oa Ff WwW NY 7 Lift the handset or press SPEAKER button to receive dial tone Dial the station s Authorization Code Station number password Dial Forward condition 1 4 Dial the destination station or station group or Dial CO access code 9 8xx 88xx and desired external phone number Press SAVE button to save or Press SPEED button Dial desired bin number Replace the handset return to idle To deactivate Call forward 1 SLT Press flashing FWD button Call For
354. ory for protection from power outage 11 A station in a Station Hunt Group ACD Circular or Terminal can be assigned to receive incoming hunt calls overriding any Call Forward That is the system either recognizes the Forward condition and bypasses hunt calls around the station or routes hunt calls to the station based on the system database Member Forward 12 Off Net Call Forward of incoming CO IP calls is essentially an automated DISA call which will establish an Unsupervised Conference Such calls are subject to the conditions of a DISA call and Unsupervised Conference and may require entry of an Authorization Code 13 Off Net forward calls are not answered until the system completes dialing of the external call The call internal or external is then connected to the Off Premise call 14 1f the Speed Dial number used in Off Net Call Forward contains a Flash only digits prior to the Flash are dialed 15 An unlimited number of stations may be set up in a Call Forward chain forwarding calls from one station to the next However a station cannot forward calls to a station already a part of the chain 16 Calls to a Call Forward chain will progress as appropriate through the chain to the last station If the last station enters DND CO IP calls revert to the previous station while intercom calls receive DND tone 48 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 17 No Answer forward employs the Stati
355. otification as a wav file if the Attach Message option PGM 111 is enabled If disabled the notification e mail does not include an attached wav file If the below E mail program is duplicated with each other Station program have prority Programming STATION 1 VSF MSG SMTP Mail Server Address 2 VSF MSG Receiver Mail Address 3 VSF MSG SMTP Mail Server ID 4 VSF MSG SMTP Mail Server P W 5 VSF MSG Add Message 6 VSF MSG Delete Message After Add 7 VSF MSG SMTP Security 8 VSF MSG SMTP Port 9 VSF MSG Sender Mail Address BOARD 1 UMS Sender Mail Address PGM 132 Btn 6 SYSTEM 1 VSF VMIM SMTP Port Related Features VMIM VSF Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail Hardware VSF and or VMIM 215 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 73 3 6 Voice Mail Back up Station Description With the VSF or VMIM an iPECS soft phone Phontage and UCS Client user receives notification of new messages for assigned stations The soft phone will indicate the total messages for the assigned stations and the soft phone The soft phone user can download the messages for other stations to the hard drive of the soft phone PC and using the soft phone application manage the messages on the hard drive If enabled the soft phone user may delete voice messages from the VMIM VSF memory Operation System System automatically notifies back up station of new messages Phontage or
356. oup Attributes PGM 191 Terminal Circular Group Name PGM 191 Btn 20 ACD Group Name PGM 191 Btn 22 Ring Group Name PGM 191 Btn 18 VM Group Name PGM 191 Btn 9 UCS Group Name PGM 191 Btn 16 oak G M A Related Features e Station Groups Hardware 2 5 9 Incoming Call Routing Description Incoming calls to an ACD group route directly to the station agent that has been idle the longest Uniform Call Distribution or an ACD group announcement recorded by an Attendant If all agents are busy the call is queued to the group or routes to the Alternate Destination The queued caller receives ACD group announcements or audio from the defined music source Callers that remain in queue receive audio from the defined music source or ring back tone and after the defined Overflow time route to an Overflow destination Agents can be assigned a priority from 0 9 0 being the lowest priority and 9 the highest When priorities are assigned calls are routed to the highest priority Agent that has been idle the longest If there are no Agents active in the group when a call arrives the call will receive the No Member treatment Intercom calls receive re order and external callers are routed to an Attendant Operation System Routing of ACD group calls is automatic based on the ACD group assignments Conditions 1 The Alternate ACD Destination can be a station or a group but cannot be a member of t
357. oup activity The following provides a sample report and description of the major fields in the report Site Name abc co Report Type CO Group Summary Report Today Peak Date 09 08 02 08 34 Peak Hour for All CO 11 00 Grp Num Anal Total Total Inc Out Grp No COs Hour Usage Seize Seize Seize Ovi ACB FAO 1 16 10 00 9 6 4 2 0 0 0 20 1 10 00 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Field Description Grp No CO IP Group number Anal Hour Analysis hour hour during the analysis period with peak usage Total Total number of call attempts on CO IP lines in the Group Usage Total Seize Total number of times CO IP lines in the group were used for any call Inc Seize Incoming Seizures Total number of incoming calls answered for CO IP lines in the group 203 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Out Seize Outgoing Seizures Total number of outgoing calls attempted on CO IP lines in the group ACB All COs Busy Percentage of the time that all CO IP lines in the group were simultaneously busy FAO Failed Attempts Outgoing Percentage of outgoing calls offered to the CO IP lines in the group that were denied due to All Trunks Busy condition Operation System Attendant To print the CO IP Traffic Summary Report 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 0128 the CO IP Traffic Summary report code 3 Select Analysis Period 1 75 4 Press the SAVE button To print the CO IP Hourly Traffic Report 1 Press the
358. owing tables Users placing an outgoing call or dialing after answering a call will be allowed the dialing privileges assigned Station DISA Code Class of Service There are eleven 11 Station Class of Service assignments which also apply to DISA and Authorization Code users based on the assigned COS Station COS Dialing Restriction 1 No restrictions are placed on dialing 2 Assignments in Exception Table A are monitored for allow and deny numbers 3 Assignments in Exception Table B are monitored for allow and deny numbers 4 Assignments in Exception Tables A amp B are monitored for allow and deny numbers 5 The leading digit cannot be a Long Distance code and assignments in Exception Table C apply 6 Number of digits cannot exceed LD digit count and assignments in Exception Table C apply 7 Intercom and Emergency number calls are allowed Incoming and transferred calls are allowed 8 Assignments in Exception Table D are monitored for allow and deny numbers 9 Assignments in Exception Table E are monitored for allow and deny numbers 10 The assignments in the Exception Table D amp E are monitored for allow and deny numbers 11 The assignments in the Exception Table A amp B and D amp E are monitored for allow and deny numbers CO Class of Service There are five 5 CO line COS assignments Station COS Dialing Restriction 1 Dialing privil
359. ppropriate CO IP line becomes available the system calls the waiting station on a first in first out basis Operation iPECS Phone To request to be placed in queue for a busy CO IP line 1 Press busy CO IP or CO IP GRP button 2 Press the MSG CALLBK button confirmation tone is received 3 Hang up the MSG CALLBK LED flashes To cancel the queue from the queued station 1 Press the MSG CALLBK button the MSG CALLBK LED extinguishes SLT To request to be placed in queue while receiving All Lines Busy signal 1 Momentarily press the hook switch 2 Dial 556 the Callback feature code To cancel the queue from the queued station 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 556 the Callback feature code System When a CO IP line becomes available 1 Send distinctive Queue recall to the station with oldest queue flash appropriate CO IP line button LED Make CO IP line and station busy to all other users Conditions 1 A CO IP line can have any number of simultaneous queue requests 2 Astation may only have a single active CO IP queue request Activating a new queue request will replace and thus cancel an existing queue 3 A Queue recall will always signal the station with tone ring ignoring the station s assigned Intercom Signaling mode 4 Queue recall will bypass a busy station and place the station at the bottom of the queue list 5 Queue recall will signal a station for 15 se
360. provided and the station cannot retrieve the call When an Attendant changes from unavailable to available status any queued Attendant calls will be available to the Attendant Programming Related Features Hardware 363 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 3 ATTENDANT POSITIONS Description The iPECS 50 and 100 can have a maximum of four 4 Attendants Other iPECS systems have capacity for five 5 Attendants Each Attendant position must be equipped with an iPECS multi button Phone and may include multiple DSS Consoles There are 2 different types of Attendant as follows e System Attendant The first station in Attendant Group In addition to Main Attendant features the System Attendant is commonly used for System Attendant Programming Admin Programming and Day Night Timed Mode control e Main Attendant Attendant group stations other than the first station of Attendant Group Operation Condition 1 As a default the first Attendant System Attendant is assigned as Station 100 logical number and others are not assigned 2 Attendant calls dialing O and recalls are routed to first available attendant Programming SYSTEM 1 System Attendant Assignment PGM 164 Btn 1 2 Main Attendants Assignment PGM 164 Btn 2 4 5 Related Features Hardware e iPECS Phone 364 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 4 ATTENDANT RECA
361. pt at a Hot Desk station where the user Authorization code is required Programming NUMBERING PLAN ACD Agent Primary Login code PGM 109 Btn 5 ACD Agent Primary Logout code PGM 109 Btn 6 ACD Agent Secondary Login code PGM 109 Btn 7 ACD Agent Secondary Logout code PGM 109 Btn 8 ACD Group PGM 191 Discovery Manager Print PGM 160 Btn 13 Application Interface Msg PGM 161 Btn 18 STATION GROUPS SYSTEM HM A A BR GM A Related Features e Station Groups e Hot Desk e Authorization Codes Password Hardware 2 5 1 3 Agent Help Request Description Agents request assistance from a Supervisor using the ACD Help Code default 574 Using iPECS Phones agents with the HELP button can request assistance without interrupting an active conversation iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation Agent iPECS Phone To assign HELP buttons 1 PGM FLEX 574 ACD Group Number optional SAVE To request Supervisor assistance while on an active ACD call 1 Press the HELP button SLT To request Supervisor assistance while on an active ACD call 1 Hook flash 2 Dial 574 the Agent Help code 3 Dial the desired ACD Group number Conditions 1 Agents receive error tone to indicate there is no active Supervisor 2 Using the HELP button during a call no signals are sent on the active conversation and the connected party is unaware of the requ
362. ption amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features e Station Speed Dial e System Speed Dial e LNR Last Number Redial e CO Line Flash Hardware e iPECS Phone 343 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 22 SILENT TEXT MESSAGE Description Silent Text Messaging is used to respond to an OHVO call without disconnecting the existing call Silent Text Messages are sent by pressing a pre programmed message button or DND button Operation iPECS Phone To program a TEXT MESSAGE button 1 PGM FLEX PGM 51 Display Message code 00 20 SAVE To respond to an Off Hook Voice Over call with a Text message 1 Upon receiving announcement press the desired TEXT MESSAGE or DND button text message is sent to the display of the calling party OHVO call is terminated Conditions 1 Silent Text Messaging employs the Custom Message Pre defined Display Messages But Display Message code in TEXT MESSAGE button is 01 09 the STA INDO NOT DISTURB message is displayed 2 When Silent Text Messaging is used to respond to an OHVO call the existing call will not be disconnected 3 Whena SLT places the OHVO call the receiving station will receive the NO DISPLAY AVAILABLE message and error tone to indicate Silent Text Messaging is not available to the SLT Programming STATION 1 Voice Over PGM 113 Btn 6 Related Features e C
363. pts The system prompts time date etc are employed by the Auto Attendant and Voice Mail applications as well as other system features Available storage time for the various iPECS models is provided in Table 1 2 1 Approximately 35 minutes of storage is employed for the fixed system prompts 2 73 2 VMIM VSF Auto Attendant Description When a call comes into the system through a DID or DISA line the call may be routed to one of 70 user recorded VMIM VSF Announcements An announcement is assigned as a Station Group announcement or as an Auto Attendant announcement with an Audio Text Table that permits CCR Caller Controlled Routing Station Group announcements are played when a call is routed to the group based on definitions in the Station Group Attributes For an Auto Attendant Announcement the system will play the announcement and monitor for digits from the connected external party A CCR Audio Text Table defines a dialed digit 0 Q and 7 to a route Each single digit is defined a corresponding route Station Station group Speed Dial number Page Zone Voice Mail VMIM VSF Announcement In addition the system will monitor digits for a station number If the user dials a station number the Auto Attendant will complete an unsupervised call transfer to the station 206 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation System Attendant To record an Auto Attd Announce
364. quest Code PGM 109 Btn 1 SYSTEM 1 SMDR Save PGM 177 Btn 1 Related Features e ISDN Supplementary Services Hardware e ISDN line e iPECS Phone 308 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 17 PRIVATE LINE Description One or more iPECS Phone users can be assigned exclusive use of a CO line or lines These Private lines are assigned to CO line Group 00 by the iPECS system and an appearance CO button must be assigned at the user s iPECS Phone Operation iPECS Phone To place an outgoing Private line call 1 Press the CO button assigned as the Private line dial tone is received from the CO line 2 Dial the desired number To answer an incoming Private line call 1 Press the flashing CO button Conditions 1 Private lines will not recall to the Attendant station 2 Private lines are not subject to Call Pick Up except by an assigned Secretary with an appearance of the Private line 3 When put on hold a Private line will recall the user after the appropriate Hold timer The user will receive recall for the Hold Recall time and if still unanswered the user will continue to receive recall for the Attendant Recall time If the call remains unanswered at expiration of the Attendant Recall time the call will be disconnected and the Private line returned to idle 4 A Private line will follow Call Forwarding only if the receiving station has an appearance
365. r And LIP 8048 DSS also can supply power to maximum two DSS 6 Linked pair Slave station cannot use the serial DSS 7 If LSS label is not programmed MFIM gives the default name of LSS feature 8 If ICM number is programmed to LSS and the label is not programmed destination station name is displayed If the station doesn t have its name STAXXX is displayed by default 9 If Speed number is programmed to LSS and the label is not programmed the Speed name is displayed If the Speed bin doesn t have its name SPDXXX is displayed by default 10 When program DSS button feature of Label 15t DSS starts from button 49 2 4 DSS starts from button 97 3 DSS starts from button 145 4th DSS starts from button 193 11 When using keyset admin serial DSS buttons don t work 12 To program DSS button using keyset admin press the VOLUME UP DOWN button to scroll flexible button number index 13 When DSS configuration is changed the initial value of 48Btn DSS is as same as initial value of DSS map1 map4 12BTN DSS and 12BTN LSS doesn t have initial values 14 1f DSS configuration is changed and the phone restarts programmed DSS data is initialized from the changed DSS 15 To Control LSS contrast press the VOLUME UP DOWN button in idle state DSS contrast is changed with keyset LCD 16 Once after serial DSS is connected to LIP 8000 the configuration DB is saved until different type of serial DSS is connected to the station 17
366. r operation Even though System is Day Night Timed mode it works by system call routing scenario And so System call routing is highest priority than others We recommend that Co and Station are same tenancy group and zone If Start time is 0700 and End time is 1900 it works from AM 07 00 to PM 07 00 The total numbers of table are 16 MFIM1200 32 and have 10 scenario respectively And so you can set maximum 160 MFIM1200 320 scenarios VMID should be Station number that is virtual or not Virtual means that Station number is exist but it has not Hard Phone VMID is used when Destination Type is Hunt and Destination is VSF hunt group If you set Disa Active ON and Destination is VSF 1 CCR will work after announcing 1 If VSF is 0 and Disa Active ON you can hear Disa dial tone If you choose ATD STN for the type of Caller ID it works rerouting to STA Hunt Mail Box Network call and SPEED instead of ATD for internal attendant call in this condition 10 Scenario group is only used as manual setting by attendant 11 If attendant want to use manual SCR using Scenario group you should do as following 241 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation 1 Press DND in system attendant 2 Choice 5 3 Select Scenario 01 16 32 if MFIM1200 This is Scenario Group number in ADM 251 4 Press SAVE button Programming SYSTEM 1 System Call Routing PGM
367. r Mailbox EE 224 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 73 8 Announce Only Mailbox is iii iii EES 226 2 73 9 Message Cascade EE 226 2 73 10 Class of Service Settings 2 2222 2 cccce cece inbena 227 Eh Send Messa e E 228 2 73 12 Distribution BEEN 229 2 73 13 Mark a message D IERE 230 2 73 14 Mark a message for delivery confirmation nn 231 2 74 WAKE UP ALARM ONE TIME WAKE UP ALARM 00 233 2 75 WAKE UP ALARM FIVE TIME WAKE UP ALARM 235 2 76 ZONE HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT cccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 237 2 77 REMOTE DEVICE ZONE MANAGEMENT 0ceeeeeeees 238 2 78 ZONE CALL AND CONNECTION NUMBER LIMIT 239 2 78 1 Zone Outgoing CO call Number Limit nn 239 2 78 2 Inter Zone Connection Number Limit L 239 2 79 SYSTEM CALL ROUTING amp vaicccccccscssnccisevesevevedconsbscestapansccsecsee 241 2 80 CO CALL REROUTIN G ia ESA NEE 243 2 81 OUTGOING MAILBOX DESTINATION ce nnnnnnnennnzznnznni 245 2 82 REMOTE CONTROL WITH MOBILE EXTENSION 246 2 83 PREFIX DIALING TABLE i a op 247 2 84 IP CALL RECORDING ia ta in 249 2 85 3RD PARTY CALL RECORDING EE 250 2 86 FORCED DISCONNECT BUTTON EMERGENCY SUPERVISOR BUTTON ia scedasseveceesecansevenccnenssitaseuen cecesxs 251 2 87 CALL BACK TO CO ii ian ed a pen kan 253 2 88 PERSONAL GROUP RER 255 8 INTEFA iii i a a i a A e 257 3 1 DIRECT STATION SELECT BUSY LAMP FIELD DSS BLF 257 3 2 INTERCO
368. r takes no action after going off hook for the Dial Tone timer or fails to dial an additional digit within the Inter digit timer the station will receive error tone for 30 seconds and be placed out of service locked out The LED of associated DSS BLF buttons as well as the station s ICM button flutter rapidly to indicate the out of service state For iPECS Phone users if the SPEAKER button is used the station will receive error tone for 30 second and then automatically return to idle Operation System Operation of Intercom Lockout is automatic based on the Dial Tone amp Inter digit timers Conditions 1 If the station is assigned Howler Tone error tone is presented for 30 seconds followed by 30 seconds of Howler tone followed by lockout and silence Programming STATION 1 Howler Tone PGM 111 Btn 5 SYSTEM 1 ICM Dial Tone Timer PGM 181 Btn 6 2 Inter Digit Timer PGM 181 Btn 7 Related Features e Intercom Call ICM Call Hardware 262 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 6 INTERCOM STEP CALL Description When busy tone is received on a dialed Intercom call the user may place a call to another station by dialing the last digit of the station number The system replaces the last digit of the previously dialed busy station with the dialed digit and places an Intercom call to the new station number Operation iPECS Phone To activate step call while receiving b
369. r the ACD DND Wrap up time iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation Agent iPECS Phone To assign an ACD ON OFF DUTY GROUP button PGM FLEX 571 optional ACD group number optional Reason Code SAVE To toggle to Off duty state from On Dutv 1 Dial 571 Agent On Off Duty Code 2 Dial ACD group number 3 Dial Reason Code 0 9 U or ff 1 Press ACD ON OFF DUTY GROUP button 2 Dial Reason Code 0 9 T or ff Or 1 Press ACD ON OFF DUTY GROUP REASON button To return to an On duty state 1 Dial 571 Agent On Off Duty Code 2 Dial ACD group number Or 1 Press the ACD ON OFF DUTY GROUP button Or 1 Press the ACD ON OFF DUTY GROUP REASON button To assign an ACD ON OFF DUTY IN ALL HUNT GROUP button 1 PGM FLEX the code for Agent On Off duty in all hunt group optional Reason Code SAVE 2 The code for Agent On Off duty in all hunt group is in PGM109 Btn 17 If a station is included in two or more hunt group To go to ON duty in all hunt group when the user is OFF duty in more one hunt group 1 Dial the code for Agent On Off duty in all hunt group Or 1 Press ACD ON OFF DUTY IN ALL HUNT GROUP button Or 1 Press ACD ON OFF DUTY IN ALL HUNT GROUP REASON button If a station is included in two or more hunt group To go to OFF duty in al
370. ration Manual Issue 5 6 Operation iPECS Phone To program KEYPAD FACILITY button 1 PGM FLEX PGM 89 SAVE To activate the keypad facility while on an ISDN line 1 Press the KEYPAD FACILITY button 2 Dial desired digits other actions disable Keypad facility feature Conditions 1 This feature can be activated or deactivated only after a CO line ISDN is seized 2 Once activated the system will continue to send dialed digits as Keypad Facility IE messages regardless of ISDN messages Thus in the connected mode DTMF tones are not sent to the connected party only the keypad message is sent 3 If a Speed Dial bin includes MSG CALLBK button as the first entry the remaining digits in the Speed Dial number will be sent in a Keypad Facility IE 4 This feature may not be available in the specific ISDN or may be a subscription service 5 The system can handle only a single Call Reference services that require handling of two simultaneous Call References cannot be supported Programming STATION 1 Flex Button Assignment PGM 115 Related Features e Station Speed Dial e System Speed Dial Hardware e iPECS Phone e ISDN gateway Module 4 15 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Description MSN enables up to 8 Subscriber Numbers to be allocated to one Basic Rate Interface allowing Direct Dial In call delivery Sub Address information is included as additional digits in the Called Party Num
371. re 40 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 7 AUTOMATIC PRIVACY Description Privacy is insured on all communications in the system If desired the customer may elect to disable the Automatic Privacy feature allowing another station to join in an existing external conversation uninvited In such a case a conference is established Operation iPECS Phone To intrude into a call when Privacy is disabled 1 Press a busy lit steady individual CO IP access button user connected to the call with existing internal station user Conditions 1 With Automatic Privacy disabled privacy is still assured on all intercom and conference calls 2 To override privacy Privacy must be disabled and the intruding station must have Override enabled as well as a direct appearance for the desired CO IP line 3 Only one station can intrude on an active call 4 An intrusion tone can be provided to the call indicating another station has accessed the line 5 If either internal party presses another CO IP a DSS PAGE CONF or other conflicting button the party is removed from the Conference and must press the CO IP button again to reenter the conversation Programming STATION 1 Override Privilege PGM 113 Btn 4 SYSTEM 1 Privacy PGM 161 Btn 3 2 Privacy Warning Tone PGM 161 Btn 4 Related Features e Multi Partv Voice Conference e Station Flexible Buttons
372. rected to the first station in the group and if needed hunt through each station in the group until reaching the last station The call may remain at the last station passed to an overflow destination or sent to a voice mailbox Terminal Station Group Calls to a station in a Terminal Station Group that encounter an unavailable or unanswered status will be routed through the hunt process The call will proceed to the next listed station in the group until reaching the last listed station in the group The call may remain at the last station or be routed to an Overflow destination A Terminal Hunt Group can be assigned with a pilot number the Station Group number so that calls to the pilot number will hunt In this case the call will route as described for Circular Pilot Number hunting ACD Station Group Calls can be sent to an ACD group by dialing the Station Group Number or assigning CO IP lines to ring directly to the Station Group Calls are directed to the station in the group that has been idle for the longest continuous time Uniform Call Distribution If all stations are busy or unavailable when the call is received the call may be routed to an alternate location or may continue to wait queue for an available station in the group After queuing to the group the caller may be routed to an overflow destination which can be a Station Station Group or Voice Mailbox 166 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Ma
373. register to system password should be available not empty This should be same as SIP Phone s Authorization Password value Desired Number Mandatory Extension Number This should be same as SIP Phone s User Name or Phone Number value 399 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Examples If Save is OK it means that you can use the Extension number 4 Lock Key Install Need not Lock Key LG Ericsson LIP8002 WIT400H Yamaha ACT 50 PJP 50 Need Lock Key Number of SIP Extension Copies Other SIP Phones except above NOTE To acquire Lock Key contact to LG Ericsson Enterprise Solution Sales Team Index L Value State Network Installed EZ ATTD IC J _ Installed CTKTAPI ITT Installed Disconnect j Basic 100 Copy PHONTAGE ITT Deluxe TT Copy 2 copies free UCS Client E 0 Copy Web Phone E j 0 Copy TNET LOCAL SURVIVAL installed NMS ml CS fens L morr emo Rey f F i expire Re Registration 1 Role a portion of keep alive update address information of SIP Phone 2 Progress after 15t Registration De Registration gt Registration 3 Re Registration frequencv Registration Timer 4 Related Attributes SIP Data SIP Phone Attributes 211 Registration Timer Usage ON OFF Registration Timer by Provisioning in case of LG Ericsson SIP Phone
374. ress DND button 3 The ringing call is rejected or only ring is muted according to SIP Phone s implementation Conditions 1 To follow up DND for SIP Phone DND authority should be ON in Station Programming 111 Programming Related Features Hardware 415 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 9 CONFERENCE Description SIP Phone who has 3 way conference capability can make conference call by Phone itself without utilize system s conference feature Also SIP Phone can utilize system s conference feature Conference Room and Conference Group To serve system conference for SIP Phone a mixing device MCIM is required Operation SIP Phone Self Conference 1 Make a call and connected 2 Press CONFERENCE button 3 Dial 274 call and connected 4 Press JOIN button Or Make a call and connected Press HOLD button Dial 2 call and connected 4 Press 3 WAY CONFERENCE button System Conference Feature 1 Conference Room refer to 2 23 1 Conference Room SLT Operation U N gt 2 Conference Group refer to 2 23 4 Conference Group Operation 3 System need to be equipped MCIM module to mix voice Conditions 1 To serve system conference for SIP Phone a mixing device MCIM is required Programming Related Features Hardware 416 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 10 CALL
375. ributed Systems Network paging E 911 support for Emergency dialing VSF VMIM Outbound Notification to Pager or External Phone TLS for Web Admin and Webphone iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 ISSUE DATE DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES 5 0 26 July 08 General updates amp errata Change MFIM references to iPECS include iPECS 50 and updated capacity table Reference to VSF VMIM announcement changed expansion from 20 to 70 codes VSF MOH code 21 or 71 Multi language code 22 or 72 throughout Updates for iPECS release 5 software One time DND forward For TNET added paging reference and RTP description Device Zone Management Call Coverage enhancement SIP Extension support Tenancy Group ring mode for Flexible DID ICLID Station ICR Conference Group w recording iP Bridge Cabinet Alarm NMS System DECT DISA Call Forward removed Added LIP 8000 series soft key operation for auto dial features LNR SAVE etc Added Attendant active MFIM display Updated Table 1 2 1 and updated VSF capacity Call Forward using external number added Added Option for voice mail attachment to e mail Change BGM operation SMDR ICM added 5 0d1 07 Jan 09 Add in capacity table and Changed for iPECS 1200 5 0d2 17 Feb 09 Add group name for Terminal Circular VM UCS 5 0d3 13 Apr 09 Add condition 3 in 2 72 3 6 Voice Mail Back up Station 5 0d4 12 May 09 Update for outg
376. ription amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 12 MCIM REQUIREMENT FOR SIP PHONE Description For SIP Phone system should be equipped MCIM module to serve below features 1 Conference Room Conference Group Voice Over Intrusion Automatic Two Way Recording O A ON Conditions Programming Related Features Hardware 419 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 13 VOIP OR VOIM8 24 REQUIREMENT FOR SIP PHONE Description For SIP Phone system should be equipped VOIP or VOIM8 24 module to serve below features 1 SR A CO Line for H323 Networking SIP Trunking DSP for generation of Busy Error Confirm Ring Back Hold Page Warning OHVA Intrusion Dial tones from system to SIP Phone Relay of Music On Hold from system to SIP Phone Relay of Paging from to SIP Phone Voice RTP Packet Relay between private LAN and public WAN local and remote NAT resolution Conditions Programming Related Features Hardware 420 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 14 CALL TRACE OF SIP EXTENSION FOR DEBUGGING Description If debugging is required you can set call trace on MFIM for SIP Extensions Operation Basic ts call ts rawdata tb slot add remove SIP Extension Call Trace ts sipext Jl add tr sipext remove add remove SIP Stack Trace ts sip Jl add tr sip remove add
377. rning to idle Programming TABLES 1 Tel Number PGM 236 Btn 6 2 VSF VMIM Notify PGM 236 Btn 7 3 Notify Retry PGM 236 Btn 8 4 Retry Interval PGM 236 Btn 9 219 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features e Mobile Extension e Message Retrieval e Remote Message Retrieval e Message Retrieval Options Hardware e VSF and or VMIM 2 73 4 System Voice Memo Description This feature provides several general Voice Memos to provide the system time and date as well as station number and settings over the iPECS Phone speaker or the handset for SLTs Operation iPECS Phone To hear Date amp Time Prompt 1 Dial feature code 661 for IPECS Micro amp 50 amp 100 661 for all other systems Announcement for date amp time is heard Date is May 2nd Time is xx xx pm To hear Station Number Prompt 1 Dial feature code 662 for IPECS Micro amp 50 amp 100 662 for all other systems the station number announcement for station is heard This is station 150 To hear Station Settings 1 Dial feature code 663 for IPECS Micro amp 50 amp 100 663 for all other systems status for the station is reported Items reported are as follows 2 Station IP Address e Station Mac Address e Station ICM Mode Handsfree Tone Privacy e Listed message x x number of all message waiting e Wake Up Time hh mm e Do not disturb e Forwarded to stat
378. rogramming Codes Hardware 257 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 2 INTERCOM CALL ICM CALL Description A non blocking ICM is available to all stations in the system Users may place an intercom call to other stations in the system by dialing applicable digits as defined in the system s Numbering Plan Operation iPECS Phone To place an intercom call 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button to receive ICM dial tone 2 Dial station number or press DSS BLF button 3 For ring back tone await answer or For Intercom splash tone speak and await answer SLT To place an intercom call 1 Lift the handset to receive ICM dial tone 2 Dial station number 3 For ring back tone await answer or For Intercom splash tone speak and await answer Conditions 1 Intercom dial tone will time out if action is not taken within Dial Tone Time or if the time between digits exceeds the Inter digit Timer Error tone is received should a time out occur 2 ICM Dial tone is removed after dialing the first digit 3 If the called station is busy Intercom Busy tone is provided for the Busy Tone time 7 seconds then error tone is sent by the system The caller may disconnect or activate a feature such as Message Wait Callback prior to the time out 4 For iPECS Phone users consecutive Intercom calls can be placed without the need to regain ICM dial tone no need t
379. rsion failover is implemented when receive 408 time out message from SIP stack You should wait somewhat long time to meet 408 time out message after dial the VMEX And there is no ringback tone when failover is tried will add failover time in PGM 211 per stations and will modify for ringback tone serve This failover is not only for VMEX but also for all of SIP extensions Station Order 1 180 101 200 201 30011301 40011401 50011501 600 Check Ait Order Slot Station Number Mobile Number Connection Table Proxy Address Failover 8 10s0 103145040051028 150 150 1502 01055051234 r 3 2 hos I b 4 VMEX Connection Table SIP Data PGM 216 Number of table is 10 because there can be some of different trunk over different SIP service provider Proxy IP IP address of VMEX over SIP service provider Domain Name domain name instead of IP address will be supported later currently you can input same IP address as Proxy IP Port SIP Port Number of VMEX over SIP service provider Firewall Apply use firewall IP of MFIM Not use LAN IP of MFIM E164 type It was originally modification of incoming invite from Mobile by removing nation and area code manually But currently it is just for reserved because incoming invite is automatically modified for example if To lt sip 999908920533 tdc se gt then 999908920533 is converted to 999908920533 and 428 iPECS
380. rward is only available for external users 3 In Admin VSF is used as the single reference for a parameter that applies to both the VSF and the VMIM Programming Related Features e Message Storage e Message Retrieval e Remote Message Retrieval e Message Retrieval Options Hardware e VSF and or VMIM 218 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 73 3 9 Outbound Message Notification Description The VSF and VMIM are able to dial an external number to notify a user of a new voice message The system employs the mobile extension number registered for the station receiving the message When a caller leaves a message with notification configured the system places a call to the registered mobile extension When the user answers the extension prompt is played followed by the new message prompt You have xx new messages The new message prompt indicates the number of unheard messages The user must listen to the new message to confirm the notification If the user takes no action within the CCR Inter digit timer or hangs up the call is disconnected and the system will retry the call after the retry timer expires until the user listens to the message or the number of attempts reaches the retry counter If the user does not answer the ISDN or VoIP connection times out or disconnects before answer or is busy the system disconnects the notification and will retry the call after the retry timer T
381. s allowing the AA VM to respond appropriately to the call These definitions are entered in the Voice Mail Dialing Table Operation System The system will interface with the External AA VM based on database assignments Conditions 1 Selection of SMDI or in band signaling can be alternated using the 274 Virtual Dip switch 2 Only one AA VM Group External VMIM VSF or Feature Server can be defined in the system Multiple definitions may cause erroneous system operation Programming STATION GROUPS 1 Station Group Assignment PGM 190 2 Station Group Attributes PGM 191 TABLES 1 Voice Mail Dialing Table PGM 234 DIP SWITCH 1 Virtual Dip Switch PGM 453 Btn 2 Related Features e AA VM Group e SMDI Simplified Msg Desk Interface e Auto Call Recording e Two Way Record Hardware e External AA VM system 2 38 3 SMDI Simplified Msg Desk Interface Description The system may employ SMDI Simplified Message Desk Interface protocol to communicate with an adjunct AA VM system When a call is routed to an AA VM SLT port the system will send SMDI messages over the assigned SMDI RS 232 port informing the AA VM of the characteristics of the call SMDI Protocol 107 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 There are three types of SMDI messages Within each message is an Action Code which defines the function or required action of the AA VM system Fields within the message
382. s In Queue Page Alert cceccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaaaes 24 29 6 Event Messa es cacsucscey cnc rescutaeonesusecevecenegndvenunedh pE EE EEEE eu ba 26 2 5 1 Group Mail BOK E 27 2 5 8 E ele E EE 28 2 0 9 Incoming RECHNEN 29 2 5 10 ACD Caller Controlled ICLID Routing L 30 25 Ee EE 31 2 5 11 1 Supervisor Login Logout EE 31 2 5 11 2 Supervisor Help Response 32 2 5 11 3 Agent Call Monitor dee a Nee 33 2 5 11 4 Group Status Display nn ee nr nn nanna 34 2 5 11 5 Group Parameter Control Lee nn nn nnnn enza 35 4 91 1 60 A ent Status COMO sis ebda pe b ad mad rd tag Made bata 36 25 12 ACD Statistics REPO i A d le a a d e A 38 2 6 AUTOMATIC PAUSE INSERTION ssennennzzznnnnnennnzznnenenznzzz 40 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 7 AUTOMATIC PRIVACY EE 41 2 8 AUTO SERVICE MODE CONTROL eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 42 2 9 AUTOMATIC SYSTEM DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME 43 2 10 AUTOMATIC SYSTEM TIME SYNCHRONIZATION 44 2 11 BATTERY BACK UP MEMORY seceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 45 2 12 CALE FORWARD i i e ieaie da ieee aaae T Esas 46 2 13 CALL FORWARD PRESET i 50 2 14 CALE E 52 2 15 CALL PIGK UR ii a a a 54 2 15 1 Directed Call Pick Up WEE 54 2 19 2 Group Gall Pick Up EE 55 2 15 3 Pick Up Group Call Pick Up een g 56 2 16 AUTO CALL RECORDING ss snnennnnzzznnnnnnnnznznnnnnnnnnnnznnnnnznz 58 2 17 CALL TRA
383. s also define the called calling station and station status The various message types and definition of the fields are shown in the chart below Type message cr If MD ggg mmmm a xXxxxxxxxx sp yyyyyyyyy sp cr If Y Type Il message cr If MD ggg mmmm a xxxxxxxxx sp sp cr If Y Type IIl message cr If MD ggg mmmm a SP yyyyyyyyy sp cr If Y Field Description cr carriage return If line feed MD Message Desk ggg Message desk number AA VM system default 001 mmmm Message Desk terminal 0001 9999 VM port a action code XXX X called station number or station calling the VM group yy y calling station number sp ASCII space character NY end of SMDI message control Y 0x19 The following table provides detailed information on the meaning and function of the various SMDI messages used Table 2 38 3 1 SMDI Messages Action Reason Purpose In band Message SMDI Code code Type Message MD 001 0001 A Unconditional forward to VM Put Mail P II A XXXXX VVVVV B Called Station busv Busv Mail P 3P Il B XXxxx yyyyy C Disconnect connected party disconnect Il C XXXXX yyyyy D Direct Fwd to VM group Get Mail P Il D XXXXX yyyyy E Error invalid number Error P 5P ll E Xxxxx yyyyy H Two way Record record None II H xxxxx yyyyy l DND DND P 6P Il XXXXX yyyyy N No Answer No Answer P 4P II N XXXXX VVVVV Direct CO IP ring to VM group AA None III R XXXXX yyyyy 108 iPECS
384. s feature is not available to an Attendant Programming Related Features e Silent Text Message e DND Do Not Disturb e Call Forward e Speed Dial Hardware e jiPECS Phone required to receive Display Messages 2 60 1 DND operation in internal call to pre selected station Description When a station is set Pre selected Message and other station call to the pre selected station The pre selected station can receive the ring of internal call or not by P MSG DND Admin If P MSG DND Admin of the pre selected station is ON the pre selected station doesn t receive the ring and the caller hears DND tone It is same operation with DND except that the pre selected message is printed in LCD of caller 149 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation IP MSG DND admin is off 1 Call to Station XXX and Station XXX was set Pre Selected MSG feature 2 Station XXX can get the ring 3 Caller hears ring back tone IP MSG DND admin is on 1 Call to Station XXX and Station XXX was set Pre Selected MSG feature 2 Station XXX doesn t receive the ring 3 Caller hears DND tone Conditions Programming STATION 1 PMSG DND PGM 114 Btn 22 Related Features e Station Speed Dial e System Speed Dial Hardware 150 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 61 REDUNDANT SYSTEM PROCESSOR Description The iPECS system supports redunda
385. s that activate External Control Contacts Each contact is assigned to one of several functions including a Loud Bell Control If used as a Loud Bell Control the contact will activate when e External Page is accessed e Assigned Station receives ring LBC e UNA Universal Night Answer CO IP line receives a call while in the Night or Timed Ring mode Operation System Operation of the relays is automatic when defined Conditions 1 The number of available contacts is given in Table 1 2 1 2 When assigned to activate as a Loud Bell Control CO IP ring transfers and tone ring Intercom calls to the assigned station will activate the contacts 3 The contacts are rated at 1 amp 24 VDC 4 If the system is in the Night or Timed ring mode with External Night Ring enabled a call on a CO IP line assigned with UNA will activate the LBC 1 contact This permits operation of an external night ring device While in the Night or Timed ring mode LBC1 is not activated by ringing at the assigned station Programming CO IP 1 Universal Night Answer PGM 141 Btn 7 SYSTEM 1 External Night Ring PGM 160 Btn 6 2 External Contact Control PGM 168 Related Features e Universal Night Answer e Door Open Hardware e External Control Contact connected to an external loud bell 136 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 54 MOBILE EXTENSION Description A mobile phone may be registered to a stat
386. s value will be 14 and represent a directory request New system prompts will be added to the VMIB The prompts will read as follows e Press one to search by first name Press two to search by last name e Enter the first 3 characters of the person s first name Enter the first 3 characters of the person s last name e Transferring to programmed name e For subscriber name e press X X 1 9 e No match was found for your entry Related Features e CCR Hardware e VSF and or VMIM 2 73 6 Record VM Greeting using CCR Description This feature provides an option to record a System 001 072 greeting in each VM Boards by reaching CCR or Flexible DID Table Administrator can assign VM Greeting option at CCR menu or Flexible DID Table Operation An outside caller reaches the CCR menu and presses the digit associated with recording a VM Greeting prompt The system will prompt for a password enter password System main attendant telephone number its password should be entered Once the correct password is entered System will check the installed VMIM board in the system And if there is only VMIM board the system will prompt enter system greeting number But if there are two or more over installed VMIM boards in the system the system will prompt enter slot number Please remember installed VMIM slot number in iPECS system You have to enter 3 digit for slot number ex 001 010 slot number of inst
387. s were ringing or in queue for attendant before abandoned NoAns Speed Ans Speed of Answer Average time calls rang before answer by Attendant ATD type Attendant Type System or Main Operation System Attendant To print the Attendant Traffic Report 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 0124 the Attendant Traffic report code 3 Select Analysis Period 1 75 200 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 Press the SAVE button Conditions 1 The Peak Hour is the hour when the system has the highest total call volume Programming SYSTEM 1 RS 232 Port Settings PGM 174 2 Serial Port Function Selections PGM 175 Related Features e SMDR Station Message Detail Recording e ACD Statistics Report Hardware e device to capture reports 2 71 2 Traffic Analysis Call Reports Description Call activity statistics are provided in the Hourly Call and Call Summary Reports Hourly Call Report The Hourly Call Report covers hourly completed call activity for the selected Analysis period The report indicates the number of completed calls for each hour during the Analysis period as shown below Site Name abc co Report Type Attendant Traffic Report Today Peak Date 06 05 02 08 35 Anal Hour Calls Completed 15 00 0 14 00 0 05 00 211 04 00 543 Totals Calls 154 201 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation System Atten
388. sage Summary Report e CO Summary Report e Hourly CO Report Summary Traffic Reports cover one of five Analysis periods selected at time of print 1 Today s peak activity hour within 24 hours 2 Yesterday s peak activity hour 24 hours prior to Today s activity 3 Last hour activity 4 Today s total activity 5 Yesterday s total activity Operation System Attendant To print the All Summary Traffic Report 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 0122 the All Summary report code 3 Select Analysis Period 1 5 4 Select hour for print 0O 23 5 Press the SAVE button To cancel the periodic All Summary Report 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 0123 the cancel All Summary report code 3 Press the SAVE button 198 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 To print a traffic report 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial the report code 0121 8 0124 0129 0121 All Summary Traffic Reports 0124 Attendant Traffic Report 0125 Call Summary Report 0126 Hourly Call Report 0127 Hardware Usage Summary Report 0128 CO IP Summary Report 0129 Hourly CO IP Report 3 Press the SAVE button Conditions 1 The Print All Summary Traffic Reports generates the Attendant Call Summary and CO IP Summary Traffic Reports Programming SYSTEM 1 RS 232 Port Settings PGM 174 2 Serial Port Function Selections PGM 175 Related Features e SMDR Call
389. series soft buttons 1 Press the DIR soft button 2 Press the SPEED soft button 3 Dial the desired bin number To program a Station Speed Dial number using the SPEED button 1 Press the PGM button Press the SPEED button Dial the Speed Dial bin number Press the CO IP LOOP or POOL button or dial the CO IP line group access code A O N 5 Dial the number to be stored 6 Press the SAVE button 7 If desired enter a name see alphanumeric entry chart below 8 Press the SAVE button To program a Station Speed Dial number using the LIP 8000 series soft buttons 1 Press the DIR soft button Press the SPEED soft button Press the ADD soft button Dial the Speed Dial bin number Press the CO IP LOOP or POOL button or dial the CO IP line group access code oa A O N Dial the number to be stored Press the SAVE button If desired enter a name see alphanumeric entry chart below Press the SAVE button O ON O SLT To dial using a Station Speed Dial 1 Lift handset 2 Dial 558 the SLT Speed Dial access code 3 Dial the desired bin number 158 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 To program a Station Speed Dial number 1 Dial 558 the SLT Speed Dial access code Dial the Speed Dial bin number NO Om kO DN Dial 561 the SLT Programming code Dial the CO IP line group
390. shing MSG CALLBK button and the LA Y button 2 Press SAVE button 3 Then system makes a net call according to MWI data Conditions 1 MWI is applied to LCD panel installed station only 2 When system makes a call back according to MWI data the CO line is selected within the network CO group Programming STATION 1 STATION Attribute PGM114 BTN10 CLI Message Wait SYSTEM 1 Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 2 Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 3 Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 2 70 2 8 Net Call Forward Unconditional Description It is possible for a user to remotely forward to another station immediately over the network Engineering notice Currently iPECS system supports both rerouting and join method by admin programming Operation To activate Net Call Forward 1 Press the SPEAKER button and the FWD button 2 Dial Net Call Forward code 1 and dial the station number of another system The FWD button will be flashing and a confirmation tone will be provided if allowed 188 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 Dial the station number that is set Net Call Forward to a station of another node The call is routed to a forwarded station immediately and the forwarded station is ringing 4 Answer the ringing at forwarded station The calling and forwarded station can make a conversation To deactivate Net Call Forward 1 Press th
391. sired station range to receive the message STA 100 124 SEND SAVE CANCEL_ 5 Dial the message using two digits for each character as shown in the table below use the REDIAL button to delete a character 6 Press the SAVE button to send and store the message or ff to cancel To retrieve SMS Messages 1 Press MSG CALLBK button The message contents summary will be shown as below ST CL VS VM FS MS 001 001 005 006 001 004 2 Dial 6 to select MS SMS message wait 1 ST Station Message wait 2 CL CLI Message wait 3 VS VMIM VSF message wait 4 VM external Voice Mail 5 FS Feature server 6 MS SMS message wait The display shows the first line of received SMS messages MSG 0 EMERGENCY CONFER 1 LETS GO TO LUNCH 3 Use the VOL UPJ IVOL DOWN to scroll through messages MSG 2 WE HAVE A MEETING A 3 CONFERENCE AT 9 AM 271 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 Dial the message number 01 10 to view the entire message use the VOL UP VOL DOWN to view each line of the message MSG gt WE HAVE A MEETING AT gt 7PM IF YOU CAN NOT MAKE IT To delete SMS message 1 Dial DELETE MESSAGE YES 1 NO 2 ALL 3 2 Dial 1 to delete current message 2 to return to idle or 3 to delete all received SMS
392. splay code 3 Dial 1 to see the Group Status information Or 1 Press the flashing GROUP STATUS button 2 Dial 1 to see the Group Status display Conditions 1 The Supervisor must be assigned as a Supervisor for the ACD Group and be logged into the group to access the Group Status display information 2 The GROUP STATUS button will flash when the Calls in Queue exceed the assigned Supervisor Call Count and or a call has been queued for longer than the Supervisor Queued Call Timer Programming NUMBERING PLAN STATION GROUPS ACD Group Status Code PGM 107 Btn 7 ACD Group PGM 191 ACD Group Supervisor PGM 191 Btn 18 Supervisor Timer PGM 191 Btn 14 Supervisor Queued Call Count PGM191 Btn 15 RwWNDN A Related Features e Station Groups Hardware e iPECS Phone 2 5 11 5 Group Parameter Control Description An ACD Group Supervisor can adjust several of the ACD Group routing parameters in real time Adjustable parameters are e Overflow Destination e Overflow Time e Wrap up Time e ACD Voice Mailbox Password 35 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation Supervisor iPECS Phone To assign a GROUP STATUS button at the Supervisor 1 PGM FLEX 576 Group Number SAVE To use the Supervisor Status Menu 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the GROUP STATUS button 1 ACD STATUS
393. ss to the Call Log menu Operation iPECS Phone To assign a CALL LOG button 1 PGM FLEX PGM 57 SAVE To access the Call Log menu 1 Press the CALL LOG button STATION 101 T 14 SUN 04 14 30 CALLED DIALED LOST 2 Using the Soft keys select the desired call log incoming outgoing or missed STATION 101 T 14SUN04 14 30 PREV NEXT SEND 3 Use Previous and Next soft keys to view the log contents Conditions 1 This feature applies to the LIP 7016D 7024D 7024LD 8012D 8024D and 8040L Related Features Hardware e iPECS 7016D 7024D 7024LD 8012D 8024D 8040L Phone 321 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 7 CO LINE NAME DISPLAY Description When a CO IP call is received or a user seizes a CO IP path the CO IP number is displayed on the LCD If the CO IP path is assigned a name and CO IP Name Display is enabled the CO IP name is displayed instead of the CO IP number Operation iPECS Phone To display the CO IP line name while calling 1 Press the CO IP button or CO IP Access code LCD displays CO IP line name Conditions 1 Each CO line and IP group is assigned a name of up to 12 characters in the system database Programming CO IP 1 CO Line Name Display PGM 142 Btn 1 2 CO Line Name Assign PGM 142 Btn 2 Related Features Hardware e iPECS Phone w Display 322 iP
394. ssage Programming Related Features Hardware 2 73 8 Announce Only Mailbox Description This feature provides a method to mark a mailbox as an announce type This type of mailbox plays a greeting only and then returns the caller to the previous menu or hangs up Operation An administration option shall enable disable the announcement only flag An administration option shall allow the selection of previous menu or hang up after the mailbox greeting Previous menu is for CCR feature Conditions 1 There is no limit to the number of mailboxes that can be marked as announcement only Programming e Station Attribute PGM 127 Announce Only Mailbox On Off e Station Attribute PGM 127 Announce Only Option Previous menu hang up Related Features Hardware 2 73 9 Message Cascade Description Message cascading is a feature that copies messages left for the originating mailbox to another mailbox Once the message is copied into the other mailbox notification events can take place based on that mailbox settings 226 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation A mailbox has a cascade field in administration That field is another mailbox number A mailbox has a cascade field type in administration One of the following types may be selected e Disable Disable this function e Copv Immediatelv Copy Cascading begins immediately allowing storage of duplicate messages in sever
395. st be assigned as a Supervisor for the ACD Group and be logged into the group to access the Group Status display information Programming NUMBERING PLAN 1 ACD Group Status Code PGM 107 Btn 7 STATION GROUPS 1 ACD Group PGM 191 2 ACD Group Supervisor PGM 191 Btn 18 Related Features e Station Groups Hardware 39 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 6 AUTOMATIC PAUSE INSERTION Description In addition to a manually entered Pause the system will automatically pause dialing to allow for potential connection delays The pause will be inserted when any of the following occur e After a Flash is encountered in a Speed Dial number e After a PABX access code is encountered in a Speed Dial or redial number e After a Pulse to Tone Switchover is encountered in a Speed Dial or Redial number e When a connect message is received on an ISDN Line Operation System The system automatically pauses dialing after an appropriate event Conditions 1 An automatically inserted pause is not counted as a digit in a Speed Dial number 2 The LCD of the iPECS Phone will show a P when a pause is encountered This indication is not shown if the system inserts the Pause automatically Programming SYSTEM 1 Pause Timer PGM 181 Btn 10 Related Features e Station Speed Dial e System Speed Dial e Auto Called Number Redial ACNR e LNR Last Number Redial e Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover Hardwa
396. stem Call Routing Hardware 375 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 6 11 DSS CONSOLES Description The system allows an unlimited number of DSS LS Consoles to be installed in the system Up to 1 DSS DLS consoles may be associated with a station connected to an iPECS Micro and up to 3 DSS DLS consoles may be associated with a station connected to an iPECS 50 or 100 and up to 9 may be associated with a station for all other system configurations Each button on the console can be assigned as CO IP line DSS or feature button For ease of programming each console is assigned to a button map in the system database The user or Administrator may then change individual Flex buttons as desired Operation of the DSS BLF Console Flex buttons is the same as Flex buttons on the iPECS Phone Operation Conditions 1 Each DSS DLS Console is assigned to operate in connection with a specific station 2 There is no limit to the number of DSS DLS units in a system beyond the basic system capacities 376 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 Assignments for the DSS DLS button maps are detailed in the iPECS Admin amp Programming Manual Note that the individual button assignments can be changed as with the iPECS Phone Flex buttons Table 6 11 1 DSS DLS button maps iPECS Micro
397. sten to the existing conversation Speech The intruding extension can join to the existing conversation In PGM 113 Barge In mode Barge In supervisor mode can be set If 0 Barge In is disabled If 1 Barge In is possible only monitor other s conversation If 2 Barge In is possible monitor other s conversation join it and forced disconnected it Operation Monitor 1 Call to the busy station and user hears the busy tone 2 Press the MONITOR button on 3 soft buttons Use Navi gt Key to Display 3 Caller can listen to the existing conversation The others hears Warning Tone Speech amp Drop 1 During caller listen to the existing conversation press the JOIN button on 3 soft buttons 2 Caller can join the conversation The others hear Intrusion Tone 3 Supervisor can cancel the conversation with DROP button on 3 soft buttons 4 Supervisor can exit from barge in by hang up the phone Conditions 1 This feature is only supported for digital phone with 3 soft buttons 2 This feature is only available for called party is talk state with CO Line or Station 3 Barge In supervisor can see the other party of called station before monitor operation 4 Barge In to SIP extension is allowed only when MCIM is installed Programming e PGM 113 Barge In Mode Related Features e Intrusion Hardware 282 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 CO I
398. still hears a ring back tone 3 Both the outside user and the destination station can make a conversation when the destination station answers the ringing Conditions 1 Any timer is not assigned to the transit CO line 2 Outside caller hears busy tone when a networking path is not available during transit Programming 2 70 2 13 CO Transit Out Description The sub system that has no connection to public network can make a use of the main system that has connection to public network as well as sub system This feature enables a user to maximize use of the network and reduce call costs by routing outgoing calls to the nearest appropriate point on the network The system should provide sufficient digit translation or string analysis options to enable the switch to route the call correctly Operation 1 Astation of sub system seizes CO line 2 The dummy CO dial tone in case of PRI real dial tone from PX will be heard is provided from the main system or the sub system According to the CO dial sending mode of en block or overlap the CO dial tone providing system is decided 3 Dial the telephone number of public network user 4 The dialed telephone on public network receives the call alert ring and the station of sub system hears the ring back tone 5 The call connection between the public network telephone and the station of sub system is established when the call is answered 192 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp
399. stop This allows the system Ring cycle detection to be matched to the many and varied PBX systems Operation System Operation of Ring detect is automatic Conditions 1 Ring On and Ring Off are assigned on a system basis 2 The CO Ring Detect is applied to analog CO Lines only Programming SYSTEM 1 CO Ring OFF Timer PGM 180 Btn 17 2 CO Ring ON Timer PGM 180 Btn 18 Related Features Hardware 289 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 8 DIAL PULSE SIGNALING Description An analog CO line will send dial pulse signals to the central office If programmed as a pulse CO line the system will send open loop pulses at 10 pps with the assigned break make ratio Operation System Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Conditions 1 The break make ratio is system programmable as 60 40 or 66 33 Programming CO IP 1 CO Line Signal Type PGM 141 Btn 5 SYSTEM 1 Pulse Dial Ratio PGM 176 2 Pause Timer PGM 181 Btn 10 Related Features e Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover e DTMF Signal Sending Hardware 290 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 9 DIRECT INWARD DIAL DID Description A carrier service known as Direct Inward Dial DID sends digits to the system so that the call may be routed directly to a specific station or system facility Digits sent to the system are generally the last digits 3 or 4
400. t But now it is recommended to enter only Numerals 3 Default value for PGM 143 Station CLI Type is CLI Index 1 Normal CLI Programming STATION 1 PGM 114 Station CLI 2 Station CLI 5 CO IP 1 PGM 143 Choice CLI Type CLI 1 CLI5 2 PGM 143 COLP CLIP Table Related Features Hardware 312 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 IPECS PHONE 5 1 ANSWERING MACHINE EMULATION Description When a call is sent to a Voice mailbox the associated station can be assigned to notify the user and allow the user to screen the call Two methods of notification and call screening are provided Ring or Speaker mode In the Ring mode the user is notified by flashing of the AME Answering Machine Emulation Flex button The user may press the Flex button to hear the caller as the voice message is stored In the Speaker mode when the call is sent to the Voice Mailbox the caller s voice is automatically broadcast over the speaker of the user s iPECS Phone The user may terminate the screening leaving the caller in voice mail to record a message talk with the caller and record the conversation in the mailbox or answer the call and disconnect the Voice Mail The user s iPECS Phone must be assigned with an AME Flex button for proper operation Operation iPECS Phone To assign an AME button Ring Mode 1 PGM FLEX 564 0 SAVE Speaker Mode
401. t handset or press SPEAKER button 2 Dial 584 the ACD Agent Secondary Logout code or press the Logout Flex button 3 Dial the ACD group number 4 Dial the Agent ID the agent is logged out of the ACD Group SLT To Login to a primary group using the Agent Id 1 Lift handset 2 Dial 581 the ACD Agent Primary Login code 3 Dial the ACD group number 4 Dial the Agent ID the agent is logged into the ACD group To Logout of the primary ACD Group 1 Lift handset 2 Dial 582 the ACD Agent Primary Logout code 3 Dial the ACD group number 4 Dial the Agent ID the agent is logged out of the ACD Group 14 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 To Login to a secondary group using the Agent ld 1 Lift handset 2 Dial 583 the ACD Agent Secondary Login code 3 Dial the ACD group number 4 Dial the Agent ID the agent is logged into the ACD group To Logout of the secondary ACD Group 1 Lift handset 2 Dial 584 the ACD Agent Secondary Logout code 3 Dial the ACD group number 4 Dial the Agent ID the agent is logged out of the ACD Group Conditions 1 The system outputs ACD events including Login Logout messages when Discovery Manager Print is enabled 2 The Agent Id can be any 4 digit number 0000 9999 iPECS does not verify the Agent Id other than requiring that four digits be entered 3 Any Agent Id may be used to login exce
402. t the desired Scenario number 0 9 4 Select the type of Caller ID 0 5 Type 0 Station CID Type 1 All Station Type 2 CO CID Type 3 All CO call Type 4 All call Type 5 N A 5 Enter the Scenario Start and End Date YYMMDD 6 Select day of week using Flex button e Flex button 1 MON Flex button 7 SUN e Flex 8 button Holiday 7 Enter scenario Start Time and End time HHMM 8 Select Type of destination 0 6 e Type 0 Station e Type 1 Hunt group e Type 2 CO Line Number e Type 3 CO Group number e Type 4 CO Loop e Type 5 CO Transit e Type 6 N A 9 Select Scenario Priority 0 to 9 To activate ICR call forward 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button to receive a dial tone 2 Press the FWD button 3 Dial the desired Call Forward code 0 4 4 Dial 587 the Station ICR code 329 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 Replace the handset return to idle Conditions 1 Any station allowed access may define scenarios in the station s Web portal 2 The conditions as listed under Call Forward may apply Programming STATION SYSTEM Related Features e Call Forward Hardware e iPECS Phone Call Forward PGM 111 Btn 2 Station Call Forward No Answer Timer PGM 123 Btn 1 System Call Forward No Answer Timer PGM 181 Btn 1 330 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6
403. tation Programming STATION Call Coverage Enable PGM 111 Btn 12 Call Coverage Ring PGM 111 Btn 13 Call Coverage On Busy PGM 111 OFF ON Call Coverage Through Mobile Ext PGM 111 OFF ON 5 Call Coverage On Busy Range PGM 111 External Call Only External and Internal Call 6 Call Coverage Delay Ring Method PGM 111 by Originator by Member 7 Call Coverage For Wakeup Ring PGM 111 OFF ON SS Ga h A Related Features Hardware 165 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 66 STATION GROUPS Description Stations can be grouped for incoming call routing and Call Pick up purposes Ten types of groups can be defined e Circular e Terminal e ACD e Ring e Pick Up e External Voice Mail e VMIM VSF Voice Mail e Feature Server UMS Group e Net VM Centralized External VM e Unified Communication Solution Server Circular Station Group In Circular Hunt calls to a station in the group will go to the station if unavailable or unanswered in the hunt no answer time the call will be directed to the next station defined in the group The call will continue to hunt until each station in the group has been tried The call remains at the last station or passes to a designated overflow station or group A Circular Station Group can be assigned with a pilot number the Station Group Number so that calls to the pilot number will hunt In this case the call will be di
404. tendant plays immediately or after a defined delay The message repeats at assigned intervals until the number of Calls in Queue falls below the threshold iPECS allows different treatment and VMIM VSF announcements for up to three different Calls In Queue thresholds Operation System When the number of Calls In Queue changes up or down the iPECS Checks CIQ thresholds Determines if threshold is reached Queues announcement for threshold sets Delay timer Plays CIQ announcement a A O N gt Repeats announcement as defined 24 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 System Attendant To record a CIQ Announcement for an ACD Group 1 Dial 06 the Message Record code Dial VSF VMIM sequence number to select a VSF VMIM Dial the VMIM VSF Announcement number 01 70 Dial language selection 1 3 the current announcement is played followed by the oa A W N 6 7 8 Press the PGM button Press to record prompt Dial ff After the beep tone record message Press the SAVE button to stop recording and save the message To delete a recording 1 Dial 06 the Message Record code Dial VSF VMIM sequence number to select a VSF VMIM Dial the VMIM VSF Announcement number 01 70 Dial language selection 1 3 the current announcement is played followed by the an A O N Press the PGM button Press to r
405. th the connection will display INTER CONN LIMIT OVER on the LCD As the connection limit is processed at the moment of the connection establishment if the limit is over while incoming ring is answered the call will be released immediately after answering and error procedure will be activated If the recording connection for call recording is over the limit the call will be recorded without content Programming ZONE DATA 1 Zone Attributes PGM 439 Web only 2 Inter Zone Attributes PGM 441 Web only Related Features Hardware 240 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 79 SYSTEM CALL ROUTING Description System can change destination automatically or manually by condition of time days CLI CPN CO Zone and Tenancy Group number about incoming calls If scenarios are set incoming calls are routed to the destination like as 231 Flex Did destination by the condition Item of Condition Table Caller ID Called Num Days and time Start Day and End Day weeks start time and end time Destination Type and Value Scenario Priority Scenario Active or Not Scenario Voice Mail box Scenario COS Scenario Disa Active or Not Scenario Tenancy Group number Scenario Zone Scenario Start CO and End CO Scenario Group this is used for scenario group by attendant Conditions 1 CO Scenario Active should be set ON and Day condition chosen a day or everyday fo
406. the call then releasing to complete the transfer 3 When a call is transferred via OHVO the receiving station will receive muted ringing after the transfer is complete 4 The Pre defined or Custom Text Display Message feature may be used in response to a Voice Over announcement and the conditions associated with these features apply 5 Both the originating and receiving station must be programmed to allow OHVO calls 6 When Silent Text Messaging is used to respond to an OHVO call the existing call will not be disconnected 7 If the receiving station is in conference or using the Speakerphone or Group Listen Voice Over is not available Camp On will be activated and a Camp On tone sent to the receiving station 358 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Programming STATION 1 Voice Over PGM 113 Btn 6 Related Features e Call Waiting Camp On e Group Listening e Silent Text Message e Pre defined amp Custom Text Display Messages Hardware e iPECS Phone to receive Voice Over 359 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 9 29 SERIAL DSS Description LIP 8000 keyset supports Serial DSS to be connected through serial cable There are 3 types of serial DSS 12 button Serial DSS LIP 8012DSS 12 button Serial DSS with LCD LIP 8012LSS 48 button Serial DSS LIP 8048DSS Operation Connecting Serial DSS to LIP 8000 keyset 1 Check the station have t
407. tically recorded about call external and conference call Operation Registration 1 SIP phone of 34 party server can be registered 1 1 System need one more SIP unlock key 1 2 ID and password for SIP phone should be set in 3 d party server 1 3 If SIP ID is not allowed it s set SIP ID and password on PGM 443 in system Programming Agent ID and VM group lt VM group setting gt 1 VM xxxx SERVER TYPE is 3 TYPE in PGM 191 B10 2 VM xxxx SERVER Number is Server number of PGM 237 in PGM 191 B11 3 VM xxxx MEMBER TYPE is SIP TYPE in PGM 191 B12 4 Match Agent ID to favorite station in PGM 237 Two way recording 1 You should set External VM group ex 620 and the SIP number of the 3rd party server as the member of Ex VM in PGM190 2 Automatic Recording Destination should be set the Ex VM ex 620 of 3rd party server in station PGM 111 113 You can set automatic call recording ALL or CO In case CO it s recorded only CO 250 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation 1 It s followed as IPCR call recording way 2 You can do manually recording by information from 3rd party sever using SIP information Conditions 1 3 d partv server can be registered up to 10 servers in a svstem 2 This 3 0 party call recording server has only the member of SIP type You don t use it by SLT type Related features Hardware 2 86 FORCED DISCONNECT BUTTON EMERGENCY SUPE
408. tion 81 Disconnected toll restricted 84 85 Disconnected disconnect supervision 0 Other The SMDR record output for internal calls is as shown in the figure below Site Name i STA CO TIME START DIALED COST ACCOUNT CPN NUMBER CODE NUMBER 102 00 00 01 06 11 08 10 53 E103 102 00 00 00 06 11 08 14 13 103 102 00 00 10 06 11 08 11 05 E Conf Rm 1 120 00 00 03 06 11 08 11 11 P123 STA DIALED Meaning 100 E101 1 Station 100 called station 101 and station 101 answered 2 In a conference station 100 was a conference master station 101 was a conference member 105 103 Station 105 sent an internal SMS to station 103 110 E Conf Rm 1 Station 110 was the member of conference room 1 120 P123 Station 120 paged station 123 Operation System For real time SMDR records are output after completion of the call as shown in the figure above System Attendant To print SMDR records 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 0111 the SMDR print code 3 Enter the desired station range 4 Press the SAVE button To delete stored records 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 0112 the SMDR delete code 3 Enter the desired station range 172 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 Press the SAVE button To abort SMDR printing 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 0114 the SMDR abort code 3 Press the SAVE button Conditions 1
409. tion Manual Issue 5 6 9 Duplicate or conflicting System Authorization codes are not allowed when using the older and code operation For example code 1234 conflicts with code 123 and cannot be recognized as a unique code Since the index operation employs the table index and the station number forms part of the Station code conflicts will not occur and duplicate codes are allowed for these types of Authorization code 10 Use of Authorization codes varies based on the system nation code In some regions particularly the US and UK a System Authorization code may be required for DISA access Entering a Station code on a DISA line will fail in these areas In other regions a System Authorization code can be used with Walking COS 11 In case of System Authorization code there is a system base admin option End code f usage in System Auth Code PGM 160 Btn 26 If this value is set to ON user must enter End Code after entering authorization code Programming STATION CO IP SYSTEM TABLES Station Account PGM 112 Btn 19 CO IP Group Authorization PGM 141 Btn 8 DISA Authorization Code PGM 142 Btn 5 DISA Retry Counter PGM 160 Btn 5 FAC Retry Count PGM 160 Btn 16 Old Auth Code Use PGM 161 Btn 16 COS 7 When Auth fails PGM 161 Btn 17 End code usage in System Auth Code PGM 160 Btn 26 LCR Check Password PGM 221 Btn 6 2 Station Authorization Code Table PGM 227 OO
410. tion can be established between a standard ISDN modem and the iPECS BRI PRI module The connection can be set up over a normal or DID BRI PRI line The system negotiates access using 2 User Ids and matching passwords assigned in the database In addition for DID access the Called Party number must match the assigned system PPP destination Once a connection is established over the BRI PRI the user s Web browser can be opened and pointed to the system s IP address and assigned port for access to the database When accessed the system will deliver the IPECS Admin and Maintenance Web page From this page selecting Admin amp Maintenance will return the login page where the user must enter a password that matches an assigned password Based on the password entered the user is permitted access to specified system program codes 178 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 For detailed information on database administration and maintenance refer to the iPECS Admin amp Program Manual Operation Operation is detailed in the iPECS Admin and Maintenance Manual Conditions 1 For Web Admin the password can be encrypted using the LG Ericsson Java Virtual Encryption plug in A Java Virtual Machine MS or Sun must be installed in the user s PC to support password encryption Programming NUMBERING PLAN 1 System IP Address Plan PGM Code 102 SYSTEM 1 Web Server TCP Port PGM 161 Btn 14 2 WEB Pass
411. to prevent Toll abuse When an IP Line is seized the system does not monitor for dial tone Programming STATION 1 No Touch Answer PGM 111 Btn 6 SYSTEM 1 Transfer Recall Timer PGM 180 Btn 7 Related Features e Hold Recall e Call Transfer CO IP e Call Waiting Camp On e Station Flexible Buttons Hardware 2 17 2 Call Transfer CO IP Description A station may be permitted to transfer a CO IP call to another CO IP line establishing an Unsupervised Conference between the two external parties If the receiving party is called through an ISDN or VoIP path the Transfer Hold Recall Timer is initiated and if it expires Hold Recall is initiated Operation iPECS Phone While on a CO IP call Screened Call Transfer 1 Press TRANS button 2 Place CO IP call in normal manner 3 At answer announce the call 4 Hang up to complete the transfer While on a CO IP call Unscreened Call Transfer 1 Press TRANS 2 Place CO IP call in normal manner 60 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 Hang up to complete the transfer SLT While on a CO IP call Screened Call Transfer 1 Momentarily depress the hook switch 2 Place CO IP call in normal manner 3 At answer announce the call 4 Hang up to complete the transfer While on a CO IP call Unscreened Call Transfer 1 Momentarily depress the hook switch 2 Place CO IP call in normal manner 3 Hang up to c
412. turns to idle 3 Hang up to return to idle and normal display To display ACD Call Queue status when the Agent is on a call 1 Press the DISPLAY CALL QUEUE button the displays shows the queued status for seconds and then returns to the normal call display Conditions 1 The Agent cannot display queued call status while the phone is ringing 2 If there are no queued calls to display the phone returns to idle after providing error tone Programming NUMBERING PLAN 1 Display ACD Call Queue Status PGM 107 Btn 6 STATION GROUPS 1 ACD Group PGM 191 Related Features e Station Groups Hardware e iPECS Phone with Display 2 5 1 5 Agent Automatic Wrap Up Description When an Agent completes an ACD group call the Agent automatically enters into the Wrap up state In this state an Agent will not receive ACD calls allowing the Agent to complete paperwork etc The Agent remains in this automatic Wrap Up state for the duration of the ACD group Wrap Up Timer After the Wrap Up Timer or by using Wrap Up End feature the Agent returns to available status and can receive ACD group calls 17 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation Agent iPECS Phone To assign a WRAP UP END button PGM FLEX 585 SAVE Activation Automatic when Agent completes an ACD group call Deactivation 1 Automatically after Wrap Up Timer Or 1 Dial 585 the Wrap Up En
413. ty receives a ringing signal for the networking call 4 When system detects the fatal error from the network system sends the digit stream to the network using the alternate speed dial bin In this case the call is not a networking call 5 The Net Call is also applied CO Call Restriction Timer PGM180 Btn14 Programming SYSTEM 1 Networking Basic Attributes PGM 320 2 Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 3 Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 183 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features Hardware 2 70 2 2 Net Transfer Description A station user can transfer any kind of CO line to a station in other systems by pressing TRANS button and dialing a transferred station such as a call transfer within the same system There are two kinds of transfer screened and unscreened transfer Engineering notice There are two kinds of standard transfer method in QSIG and H 450 Transfer by join and Transfer by rerouting The main difference is how control the connecting path between transferring and transferred station In case of Transfer by join additional connecting path will be needed to transfer the call to another station In case of Transfer by rerouting new connecting path is used to transfer the call and old connecting path of transferring station will be cleared Operation Screened transfer 1 Press the TRANS button at a station during conversation with a CO lin
414. umber 72 2 Multi language support is only available with the VMIM and VSF 3 Separate announcements must be recorded by the Attendant for each language supported Programming SYSTEM 1 Multi language PGM 179 Related Features e VMIM VSF Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail e Direct Inward Dial DID e Station Groups 139 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 e Announcements e Direct Inward System Access DISA Hardware e VSF and or VMIM 140 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 56 MULTIPLE VOICE MAILBOX SUPPORT Description A station can access any Voice Mailbox by dialing the VM group the mailbox number and password iPECS Phone users may assign one or more Flex buttons to access a specific mailbox and receive a visual indication LED flashes of message status in the mailbox A Flex VMAILBOX button is assigned to allow access to multiple Voice Mailboxes Operation iPECS Phone To assign a VMAILBOX Flex button 1 PGM FLEX VM group Mail box station number SAVE To access a Voice Mailbox using the VMAILBOX Flex button 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the VMAILBOX Flex button 3 Dial the Mailbox password Conditions 1 AFlex button can be assigned to access the Mailbox for a Station Group or CO IP Line Voice Mailbox 2 The VMAILBOX button LED will flash indicating new mess
415. ur tones are fixed and the 5th through 8th Ring tone can be downloaded from a library of 10 tones stored in the system s protected memory After downloading the tone from the system memory it can be selected as the Differential Ring Tone Operation iPECS Phone To download a Ring Tone from the system memory 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 15 Ring Tone Download code 3 Dial the desired Ring tone location 5 8 4 Dial digits 00 through 10 to hear the Ring Tones 5 Press the SAVE button To select the downloaded Ring Tone 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 11 for Intercom Ring tones 12 for CO IP Ring tones 3 Dial the digit 5 8 to select the Ring Tone 4 Press the SAVE button Conditions 1 The downloadable ring tone files are stored in system memory as wav files with a maximum length of 4 seconds These files can be replaced as desired using the Web Upload function Programming Related Features e Station User Programming A Codes e Differential Ring Hardware e iPECS Phone 341 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 21 SAVE NUMBER REDIAL SNR Description The last dialed number on a CO IP call may be stored up to 48 digits in a buffer for future redial This number is saved in memory until the user requests a new number be stored Numbers dialed for subsequent calls do not affect the Save Number buffer
416. ure Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Operation Conditions 1 These two timer is applied only for Russia Programming CO IP 1 CO Line Attribute 2 PGM 142 Related Features e DISA Service Attribute e DID Service Attribute Hardware 83 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 28 DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE Description The system software incorporates various diagnostic and maintenance routines that may be called remotely or locally through the systems RS 232 serial ports a TCP IP connection using a Web browser established over IP networks or a PPP connection over ISDN Routines that can be accessed include trace functions at the device level commands for diagnostics and maintenance and tools for manipulation at the OS level An optional Network Management System application is available providing remote access to the system for maintenance and diagnostics For details on the iPECS NMS application refer to the iPECS NMS Manual Operation Conditions Programming Related Features Hardware 84 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 29 DIAL BY NAME Description A name up to 16 characters may be assigned to each Station and System Speed dial In addition each station may be assigned a 12 character name When assigned a user may place an intercom call to another station or select a Station or System Speed d
417. us for the duration of the call e A Loop button provides an appearance for incoming CO IP calls when a direct CO IP appearance is not available The Loop button LED provides the status for the duration of the call e A Station User Program Code button access or activate the special features available with the Station User Program Codes see section 5 24 e ACO Line Appearance button provides access to the individual CO Line assigned to the Flex button The CO Line button LED provides the status of the CO Line With the exception of CO Line buttons Flex buttons can be assigned at the station by the end user If allowed in the database the user can also assign or reassign CO Line buttons Operation iPECS Phone To assign a Flex button at the station 1 Press the PGM button 2 Press the desired Flex button 3 Dial the digits from the Flexible Numbering Plan 4 Press the SAVE button Or Press the PGM button Press the desired Flex button Press the PGM button Dial the digits from the Station User Program Code or Fixed Number Plan Press the SAVE button oa A O N gt 347 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Conditions 1 2 The LOOP and POOL buttons provide a status indication for the call as long as the station has supervisory control If there is no available CO IP LOOP or POOL button for a call the station will not ring for an incoming CO
418. user makes hold with 15t call and makes 2 call 2 After 274 call is connected the SIP Phone user talks with 2 call partv 3 If he want to return to 1 call party without hang up the 274 call SE party SIP Phone press HOLD button once LG Ericsson WIT400H SIP Phone press HOLD button once LG Ericsson LIP88xx and LIP8002 SIP Phone press Up or Down of Navigation button Conditions 1 Broker Call Switch of Talking operation mavbe different according to what kind of SIP Phone tvpe Programming Related Features Hardware 417 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 11 CALL PARK Description SIP Phone user can park a talking call to system s Call Park Location And the other Station user can retrieve the parked call The parking operation is Blind Transfer Operation Call Parking 1 SIP Phone user is on a CO talking 2 SIP Phone user park the talking call and the call will be parked to system s Call Park Location press BLIND TRANSFER button dial Park Bin number SEND 3 The SIP Phone user will page to inform somebodv to pickup the call 4 Somebody will retrieve the parked call Conditions 1 Transfer for Call Parking should be implemented by Blind Transfer operation Programming CALL PARK LOCATIONS 1 Numbering Plan PGM 106 109 Call Park Locations Related Features Hardware 418 iPECS LIK Feature Desc
419. usy on a dialed Intercom call 1 Dial a digit other than the last digit of the busy station s intercom number Conditions 1 If the user dials the last digit of the busy station Camp On will be activated 2 After receiving busy tone if the user takes no action for the Busy Tone timer 7 seconds the system will start the Intercom Lockout procedure Programming Related Features e Intercom Lock Out e Intercom Call ICM Call Hardware 263 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 3 7 INTERCOM TENANCY GROUP Description Stations in the iPECS are assigned to an Intercom Tenancy Group group 00 15 Stations in a group are allowed or denied the ability to place intercom calls to stations in other groups on a group by group basis Each Intercom Tenancy Group is assigned an Attendant station All dial O calls from a station in the group are routed to the assigned Attendant In addition the assigned Attendant can control the Day Night Ring mode for stations in the group switching from Day to Night mode Each group is assigned a separate Auto Ring Mode Table to change the Ring and COS mode automatically during the day and night service mode In addition DID calls to the system can be routed to a specified Intercom Tenancy group By defining the group as the destination in the Flexible DID Conversion table calls will follow the Tenancy Group Auto Ring Mode table Operation System Operat
420. utton will remain lit 3 A Flash may be stored as a part of a Station or System Speed Dial number 4 While connected to an internal call or dial tone pressing the FLASH button will regain ICM dial tone 5 While making a Page Announcement internal or external including all call paging pressing the FLASH button will terminate the Page Announcement and return ICM dial tone 6 The Flash function is not available on VoIP calls Programming CO IP 1 Flash Type PGM 141 Btn 6 2 CO Flash Timer PGM 142 Btn 12 Related Features e Station Speed Dial e System Speed Dial Hardware 284 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 4 3 CO IP LINE GROUPS Description The CO IP lines in the system can be placed together into groups for assigning access by stations and common access dial codes There are 20 groups in the iPECS Micro amp 50 amp 100 72 groups available in the iPECS 300 amp 600 and 200 groups available in the iPECS 1200 Unused CO lines are assigned to CO IP Group 21 in the iPECS Micro amp 50 amp 100 73 in the IPECS 300 8 600 and 201 in the iPECS 1200 Private Lines are assigned to CO IP Group 00 Operation Conditions 1 Unused CO IP lines should be assigned to the appropriate group so that stations cannot access these lines 2 CO IP lines in Groups 01 through 72 200 can be accessed individually by dialing the code 88 and the CO IP line number 3 Only
421. verage Hardware e iPECS Phone 325 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 5 10 FLEX BUTTON DIRECT SPEED DIAL ASSIGNMENT Description A user may program a telephone number directly to a Flex button without the need to assign the number to a Speed Dial bin In this case the telephone number is allocated to the highest numbered Station Speed Dial bin available Operation iPECS Phone To assign a telephone number to a Flex button 1 Press the PGM button 2 Press the desired Flex button 3 Press the soft button below the TEL NUM display selection or for iPECS 24D and 24DH phones press the ICM button Press the CO IP line button or dial the CO IP line access code Dial the telephone number Press the HOLD SAVE button Dial the name to be associated with the number optional 8 Press the HOLD SAVE button To place a call using the Flex button 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press the assigned Flex button N DO on P Conditions 1 This feature is available to users of the iPECS 7016D 7024D 7024LD 8012D 8024D or 8040L Phones only 2 When a Flex button is assigned with a telephone number the system will allocate the number to the highest available Station Speed Dial bin number If no bin is available the user will receive error tone when attempting to assign the telephone number 3 The telephone number may include
422. vice Attributes PGM 145 Station Groups PGM 190 Station Group Attributes PGM 191 DISA Retry Counter PGM 160 Btn 5 DID DISA Destination PGM 167 CCR Analysis Timer PGM 180 Btn 13 VSF User Record Timer PGM 181 Btn 3 VSF Valid User Message Timer PGM 181 Btn 4 CCR Audio Text Tables PGM 228 Flexible DID Table PGM 231 e Automatic Call Distribution e Direct Inward System Access DISA e Direct Inward Dial DID e Remote Message Retrieval e Multiple Language Support e MOH Music On Hold Hardware e VSF and or VMIM 208 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 73 3 VMIM VSF Voice Mail 2 73 3 1 Message Storage Description When a station activates Call Forward to the VMIM VSF Group a call is transferred to a VMIM VSF mailbox or a transferred call recalls the VMIM VSF the call is handled by the iPECS Voice Mail application The caller connects to the called station s User Greeting followed by beep tone The remote caller can record a message and hang up or dial 7 for further options At disconnect the VM application stores the message in the called user s voice mailbox and activates the Message Waiting indication at the user s station If VM back up is assigned the back up station Phontage or UCS Client is also notified Operation Remote Caller To leave a voice message after Greeting and beep leave the message 1 Hang up to quit recording or dial 7 for furth
423. ward will deactivate and the FWD button LED is off To activate Call Forward Unconditional Busy No Answer to an internal number 1 5 6 Lift the handset to receive dial tone 2 Dial Call Forward feature dial code 554 3 4 Dial the destination station station group or dial CO access code 9 8xx 88xx and Dial desired Call Forward code 1 4 desired external phone number Momentarily press the hook switch receive confirmation tone Replace the handset return to idle To activate Call Forward to a Speed number 1 2 3 4 5 Lift the handset to receive dial tone Dial Call Forward feature access dial code 554 Dial Call Forward code 6 9 Dial Speed Dial bin number Replace handset to return to idle To activate Call Forward Remote Follow me 1 Dial the Call Forward feature code 554 Dial Remote Forward code 0 ona fF ON Lift the handset Dial the station s Authorization Code Station Password Dial Forward condition 1 4 Dial the destination station station group or dial CO access code 9 8xx 88xx and desired external phone number Momentarily press the hook switch receive confirmation tone 47 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 8 Replace handset return to idle To deactivate the Call forward 1 Lift the handset receive stutter dial tone 2 Dial Cal
424. word Encryption PGM 161 Btn 15 3 Admin Access Authority Web only ISDN ICLID 1 BRI PRI PPP Web Admin Attributes PGM 205 Related Features e Kevset Administration e Multi Level Admin Access Hardware 2 69 4 Web User Manual Description The iPECS User Guide is available on line as part of the IPECS Web services The IPECS main Web page permits access to the Web User guide The guide is an html document which can be modified by replacing the HTML ROM image in the system with an external ROM image in accordance with the appropriate LG Ericsson R amp D STI Operation Operation is detailed in the iPECS Admin and Maintenance Manual Conditions 1 Access to the User Guide is not password protected 2 To support local languages the HTML ROM image of a translated Web User guide may be loaded into system memory Programming 179 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 Related Features e Web Administration Hardware 180 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 70 SYSTEM NETWORKING 2 70 1 Centralized Control TNET Description In a Centralized Control TNET Transparent Network a central MFIM controls all remote modules and terminals providing transparent networked access to all the features and functions of the central IPECS as well as the resources connected to the iPECS Where the remote device is not directly reachable by the iPECS R
425. xternal AA VM Group the system will search the group for an idle port and deliver the call Signaling information between the iPECS and AA VM system may be assigned for in band DTMF signaling or the SMDI Simplified Message Desk Interface signaling protocol over the assigned iPECS system RS 232 port Operation The system will interface with the External AA VM based on database assignments Conditions 1 Selection of SMDI or in band signaling can be alternated using the 274 Virtual Dip switch 2 Only one AA VM Group External VMIM VSF or Feature Server can be defined in the system Multiple definitions may cause erroneous system operation Programming STATION GROUPS 1 Station Group Assignment PGM 190 2 Station Group Attributes PGM 191 TABLES 1 Voice Mail Dialing Table PGM 234 DIP SWITCH 1 Virtual Dip Switch PGM 453 Btn 2 Related Features e In band DTMF Signaling e SMDI Simplified Msg Desk Interface e Auto Call Recording e Two Way Record e VMIM VSF Integrated Auto Attd Voice Mail Hardware e External AA VM system 106 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 38 2 In band DTMF Signaling Description The system may employ in band signaling to communicate with an External AA VM system When a call is routed to the AA VM SLT port the system will send DTMF signals informing the AA VM of the characteristics of the call DTMF digit strings are assigned to various function
426. y Port Server port number in sight of SIP Extension toward MFIM Transport Signaling mode SIP Extension s CODEC Priority NTP Server and DST setting Default volume of Speaker Handset Headset maximum volume of Handset Digit Map If you can utilize SIP Phone s programmable Dial Digit Map you can make immediate sending out dials w o press SEND or key lt Refer to below gt Digit Map for Call Setup in SIP Phone you can program Digit Map according to System Numbering Plan Example in case of LIP8002 88xx SIP Phone type X T 0 xx xxx 1xxx 2xxx 3xxx xxxx Explanation 0 dial 0 for attendant call you can specify other single digit if you want it to be sent immediately when press the digit without ending by 1XXX 2xxx 3xxx extension numbering you can specify other 2 or 3 or 4 or more digits starting with a specific prefix digit or digits xxii xxx xxxx dial the other 2 3 or 4 digits and press to send xxxx dial the other more than 4 digits and press to send Digit Map for 274 Dial Tone Play self dial tone by SIP Phone Example in case of LIP8002 88xx SIP Phone type 9 f 9 is CO access code in the first CO group Operation SIP Data SIP Phone Provisioning 212 1 2 Select one of CONFTYPE LG Ericsson SIP Phone Type By default you do not need to input Private MAC address because you want to make provision
427. y not Camp On to a station in DND in a conference receiving a Page etc 2 The Camp On procedure is employed by an Attendant or Secretary of an Executive Secretary pair to activate DND Override 3 A Camp On tone is sent each time the calling user presses the 7 button 4 A text or voice message Pre defined or Custom may be used to respond to a Camp On Ow Programming Related Features e Pre defined amp Custom Text Display Messages e DND Do Not Disturb e Intercom Call ICM Call e Silent Text Message e Voice Over Hardware 63 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 19 CO IP ACCESS Description Stations can access outgoing CO IP lines based on CO IP Group Access programming iPECS Phones may use flexible buttons assigned to access a specific CO line POOL button for outgoing calls or a LOOP button Individual users may be allowed to assign CO IP access flexible buttons Operation iPECS Phone To assign a LOOP button 1 PGM FLEX PGM 85 SAVE To assign a POOL button 1 PGM FLEX 8x SAVE To place an outgoing CO IP call 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 Press desired CO line POOL LOOP button or dial the CO line or Group access code To answer an incoming CO IP call 1 Lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button Or 1 Press flashing CO line POOL or LOOP button
428. ystem Network Page destination could be Internal Page MFIM100 1 10 MFIM300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 1 35 External Page 1 2 All Call Page Internal External All User will hear an error tone if there is no idle networking path or if the page destination is invalid User can make a page announcement without lifting the handset Programming SYSTEM 1 Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 2 Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 3 Network Numbering Plan Table PGM 324 4 Network Feature Code Table PGM 325 197 iPECS LIK Feature Description amp Operation Manual Issue 5 6 2 71 TRAFFIC ANALYSIS Description The iPECS monitors stores and periodically or upon request outputs various traffic statistics covering system resources The output from the system can be used to e Monitor and evaluate system performance e Observe usage trends and recommend possible corrective actions e Determine possible trunk problems i e blocking level too high and or e Recommend system upgrades Attendants enable Periodic Reporting Once enabled the system continues to monitor and output the requested report until Periodic Report is disabled On demand reports selected by the System Attendant are output only upon request The Traffic Report is sent to the defined system RS 232 or TCP port System resources covered by Traffic Repots are e Attendant Traffic Report e Call Summary Report e Hourly Call Report e H W Unit U

iPECS Feature and Operations Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents